Home

FrameSaver SLV, Models 9126, 9128, and 9128

1. ifName Description ifDescr ifEntry 2 ifIndex Physical Layer Network T1 T1 network interface Network T1 T1 FR NAM 101001001 Hardware Version hhhh hhh DSX 1 T1 DSX 1 interface DSX 1 T1 T1 FR NAM 101002001 Hardware Version hhhh hhh Sync Data Port Synchronous Data Synchronous Data Port Slot 1 101003001 S01P1 Port 1 Port 1 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh Sync Data Port Synchronous Data Synchronous Data Port Slot 1 101003002 S01P2 Port 2 if applicable Port 2 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults B 4 Table B 1 Paradyne Interface Objects Information 2 of 3 ifName Description ifDescr ifEntry 2 ifIndex Physical Layer cont d COM Communications port COM Port T1 FR NAM 101004001 Hardware Version hhhh hhh Modem Modem port Modem Port T1 FR NAM 101005001 Hardware Version hhhh hhh ISDN BRI ISDN BRI DBM ISDN BRI DBM T1 FR NAM 101110001 DBM interface if applicable Child Card ISDN BRI DBM S W Release MM mm bb Hardware Version hhhh hhh ISDN PRI ISDN PRI DBM ISDN PRI DBM T1 FR NAM 101111001 DBM interface if applicable Child Card ISDN PRI DBM S W Release MM mm bb Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame Relay Logical Layer FR Bundle Multilink Frame Relay FR Bundle Profile Link Namej 9126 MFR Bundle Hardware Version hhhh hhh 101025001
2. Change 15 devFrExt mib report LMI Protocol is set to a devErExtDlciDIci ees and the network s CIR devFrExt mib i String z ea CIR on ifString changed to devFrExt mib CIR bps devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib enterpriseConfig devLastTrapString Configuration has been changed Change 6 devHealthAndStatus via the menu driven user mib interface an SNMP Manager or auto configuration after 60 seconds has elapsed without another change String Device configuration change enterpriseDLCI devFrExtDicilflndex The DLCI has been deleted The delete 17 devFrExt mib network no longer supports the devFrExtDlciDIci DLCI and it was removed devFrExt mib Strings devLastTrapString ue deletediby Auto DLEI devHealthAndStatus i enterpriseDLCI mib DLCI Status is set to Inactive the Down 11 DLCI is down Strings ifString down Due to LMI or physical failure ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown enterpriseDLCIUp 1 2 DLCI Status is set to Active DLCI is up again String ifString up November 2000 B 13 Table B 7 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults enterprise Specific Traps and Variable Bindings 2 of 3 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause enterpriseMissedSLV _ devFrExtDicilflndex Received SLV communications Down 16 devFrExt mib have been missed SLV Timeout de
3. Ethernet Port FrameSaver SLV 9128 II only Standard Data rates 8 position modular unkeyed jack ANSI IEEE Standard 802 3 Ethernet Version 2 10 100 BaseT auto sensing 10 and 100 Mbps Ethernet rates November 2000 D 5 Technical Specifications D 6 Table D 3 14 Slot 9000 Series Access Carrier Technical Specifications Specification Criteria Approvals FCC Part 15 Class A digital device FCC Part 68 Refer to the equipment s label for the registration Industry Canada NRTL C and CSA number Refer to the equipment label for the certification number Refer to the equipment label Physical Environment Operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Shock and vibration 35 F to 122 F 1 7 C to 50 C 4 F to 158 F 20 C to 70 C 5 to 85 noncondensing Withstands normal shipping and handling Physical Dimensions Height 10 5 inches 26 7 cm or 6U Width 17 2 inches 43 7 cm Depth 14 3 inches 36 3 cm Weight Empty access carrier without power supply 11 Ibs 6 oz 5 16 kg AC Power Requirements AC Power Supply DC Power Supply 90 to 265 VAC 50 60 Hz 3A maximum 48 VDC 6 6 amps 316 watts Heat Dissipation Max 227 VAC 48 VDC Fully loaded access carrier 585 Btu per hour maximum 465 Btu per hour maximum Typical Power Consumption AC Power Supply 1 power supply installed 2 power supplies installed
4. cc ec eee eee eens 5 70 Upgrading ISDN BRI DBM Software 0000 ee eee 5 71 Determining Whether a Download Is Completed 5 72 Changing SomWale cccc ci ctcdimietetasdew ied nasdaekecnewed 5 72 Transferring Collected Data 0 00 c cece cece eens 5 73 Turning Off the System Alarm Relay 0000 annann 5 74 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 6 9128 A2 GB20 40 Contents Troubleshooting Proplem Indicators ci chisiciawendicecdtadndeeicimrnadeciaawragbes 6 2 Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication 6 3 Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu 00055 6 3 Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power 2 0005 6 3 Restoring Communication with a Misconfigured Unit 6 4 Troubleshooting Management Link Feature 2 0 00 eee 6 5 LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature 00 cece eee eee 6 5 Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface 6 6 ANAS in22 2092260920 bi40t b098 Fb PREE HOLST DPISEDOTAEODIEEH ETERS 6 7 Viewing the Trap Event Log a 2iccisceiciestesawiedemestawbedended 6 14 Troubleshooting Tables cscccidt brite tobegethieicie ectaetedemead 6 14 Device Probleme sgatacsitidiageutseiadaiimesiadecasdsimadas 6 14 Frame Relay PVC Problems 0000ee cece eee eeeeee 6 16 SONDEM ProblemMS snc ducgea gina ethdne ee be ednddne Hebd ee beats 6 17 Tests Available lt 2 6cse2s6y tieih
5. Allows the initiation and termination of the Data Channel Loopback V 54 Loop 2 to be controlled by the receipt of a DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequence either V 54 or FT1 ANSI compliant sequences from the network or far end unit When this configuration is enabled V 54 FT1 or Both receiving a DCLB actuate sequence ona particular port causes the unit to initiate a DCLB on that port provided that a DCLB can be performed based on the current state of the port and unit Receiving a DCLB release sequence terminates the DCLB Display Conditions This option only appears for Port 2 on a FrameSaver SLV 9128 or 9128 II when Port Use is set to Synchronous Data Disable Ignores the DCLB actuate and DCLB release for the port v 54 DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences that comply with the V 54 standard for inter DCE signaling for point to point circuits are recognized and will control the initiation and termination of a DCLB V 54 Loop 2 for the port ANSI_FT1 DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences that comply with either the ANSI 403 Annex B standard for in band signaling for fractional T1 FT1 channel loopbacks are recognized and will control the initiation and termination of a DCLB for the port V 54_ amp ANSI DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences that comply with either the ANSI or V 54 standard are recognized and will control the initiation and termination of a DCLB for the port
6. 0 000 ee eee 7 1 m Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System 0 0c cece eee eee 7 2 Setting Up FrameSaver SLV Support 0 00 cece eee eee 7 3 8 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices E Prepa aO c032 chasant oiiakateehatecadsataabadasdacarahie dasa 8 2 m Configuring NetScout Manager Plus 00 cece eee eae 8 3 Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus NCIWOIK cc ctsacecn tera etigemetsa Garten eee mdadeen aA 8 4 Verifying Domains and Groups 02 0 cc cece eee eee 8 5 Correcting Domains and Groups 0e cece ee eens 8 6 Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template 00020ee eee 8 8 EdiMG AIMS cjctiad cited ehbaee Hebd et hdd riii ritik 8 9 Adding SLV Alarms Manually 20000 ce eeee eee eee 8 11 Creating History PIGS 2icc6caseesaloie aera dtakeatere diea 8 13 Installing the User Defined History Files 005 8 15 Monitoring a DLCl s History Data 0 00000 c cee eee 8 16 Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus 8 18 Statistical Windows Supported 0006 e eee eee eee 8 20 9 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Installation and Setup of Network Health 000002 eae 9 2 m Discovering FrameSaver Elements 2 0000ceee eee eee 9 3 Configuring the Discovered Elements 0000ee eee eee 9 4 a Grouping Elements for Reports
7. 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 18 9 1 5 1 Unavailable Seconds MIB DS1 E1 MIB RFC 1406 Tag dsx1TotalUASs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D Rx FECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D Rx BECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D Frames Sent MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx CIR Utilization MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx DLCI Link Utilization MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 1 D Frames Received MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Rx DLCI Link Utilization MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 D Tx Frames Exceeding CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D Frames Dropped by Network MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag frFrExtDiciNetDropFr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 23 1 D Missing Latency Responses MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciMissedSLVs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 6 1 D Congested Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciStsCongestedSecs 1 3 6 1
8. November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 22 Modem Port Options 2 of 4 Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether a user ID and password referred to as the login is required in order to log on to the asynchronous terminal connected to the modem port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Requires a login to access the menu driven user interface Disable Does not require a login Port Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies the level of user access privilege for an asynchronous terminal connected to the modem port NOTE The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the port or the user For example if the Port Access Level assigned is Level 2 but the User Access Level is Level 3 then only Level 3 access will be permitted for the modem port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Level 1 Allows full access and control of the device including monitoring diagnostics and configuration The user can add change and display configuration options save and perform device testing If Login Required is set to Enable the effective access level is determined by the user s access level Otherwise the access level is 1 CAUTION Before c
9. Software Revision Software version currently being used by the FrameSaver units DBM Format nn nn nn consists of a 6 digit number that represents the major and minor revision levels For an ISDN PRI DBM None displays because the DBM does not have loaded software it runs from the NAM s software Hardware Revision FrameSaver DBM s hardware version Format nnnn nnx consists of a 4 digit number followed by 2 digits and 1 alphabetic character 5 4 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance Viewing LEDs and Control Leads FrameSaver SLV 9126 or 9128 faceplates include LEDs light emitting diodes that provide status on the unit and its interfaces These faceplates are shown in the following sections The Display LEDs and Control Leads feature allows you to monitor a remote unit it is useful when troubleshooting control lead problems The Display LEDs and Control Leads screen shows the appropriate interfaces for the unit with the appropriate status highlighted FrameSaver SLV 9126 LEDs and Control Leads 9128 A2 GB20 40 The FrameSaver SLV 9126 unit s faceplate includes 12 LEDs light emitting diodes that provide status on the FrameSaver unit its network interface DSX 1 and DTE interface gt amp FrameSaver SLV CED O 00 16182 01 To access the Display LEDs and Control Leads screen Main Menu gt Status Display LEDs and Control Leads Display LEDs amp
10. APVC connection is configured between the network and port DLCls 2MPorts Auto configuration is enabled on both Port 1 and Port 2 only applies to models with multiple data ports A multiplexed network DLCI containing three EDLCls is configured for Port 1 customer data Port 2 customer data and management data PVC connections are configured between the network and port DLCls A management PVC is configured on the network interface November 2000 3 13 Configuration Discovery Mode Configuration Description NetOnly Auto configuration of a network DLCI only no Port 1 or PVC connections are configured No Port 1 PVC connection or management DLCI is configured Disable No frame relay discovery or automatic configuration takes place The FrameSaver unit will be configured manually NOTE If 1MPort the default is not the setting required for your application change the Frame Relay Discovery Mode before connecting the network cable or editing discovered option settings Otherwise the FrameSaver unit will start discovering DLCls as soon as it powers up To recover from this problem and when some DLCls or PVC Connections have been configured manually edit a selected discovered DLC or PVC connection manually If only a local management PVC between the router and the FrameSaver unit has been configured select the desired Frame Relay Discovery Mode a
11. Average Latency AverageLatency Frames Received SLVFramesRec Current Latency CurrentLatency These alarms and current values can be found in NSHOME ustr slvtemplate fet which is used as a starting point for loading new alarms This file can be copied and edited so the alarm threshold values match service level agreement values The copied fct file can then be used to replicate alarm threshold values for all DLCls on the unit using the eztrap utility All fct files must be in NSHOME usr To configure alarms manually see Adding SLV Alarms Manually NOTE Perl must be installed in your system to use the eztrap utility in the procedure below If you have an NT system please install Perl before proceeding B gt Procedure 1 Open a terminal window and go to NSHOME usr 2 Type eztrap i filename fct o agentname fct agentname and press Enter to run the eztrap utility to create alarm threshold values across all DLCls for the copied fct file The message eztrap done appears when the fct file is transferred 3 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window 4 Edit any alarm values that need to be changed 5 Select the Install button down the center of the Configuration Manager main window to load alarms for the unit This may take some time so please be patient See Edit
12. Back to Back Mode Active The operating mode has been configured for back to back operation Main Menu gt Control gt Change Operating Mode The FrameSaver unit can be connected to another FrameSaver unit without a frame relay switch between them This feature is useful for product demonstrations or for a point to point configuration using a leased line Backup Active Backup has been established and data is flowing over the alternate DLCI CTS down to Port 1 Device The user data port CTS control lead on the FrameSaver unit is off DBM BRI Card Failed ISDN BRI DBM only One or more of the access unit s integrated circuit chips has failed to internally loop data through the dial backup unit BRI circuit November 2000 5 19 Operation and Maintenance 5 20 Table 5 7 Health and Status Messages 2 of 7 Message What It Indicates DBM Download Required ISDN BRI DBM only A download attempt was interrupted and failed to complete The NAM software and DBM software are incompatible DCLB Active Interface A V 54 Loopback is active on the specified interface DLCI nnnn Down frame relay link 1 2 The DLCI for the specified frame relay link is down DTE External LB Active Port n A Data Terminal Loopback is running on the specified user data port DTE Init Ext LB Active Port n The DTE has initiated an external DTE Loopback on the specified u
13. DPO busy USER xxxx The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent a user defined pattern of ABCD xxxx USER xxxx 1 xxxx is the same value on both the Network and the DSX 1 sides November 2000 3 57 Configuration Assigning a Synchronous Data Port to Network or DSX 1 Time Slots For a FrameSaver SLV 9128 or 9128 II which has two data ports another assignment screen is available Use the Sync Data Port Assignment screen to view the status of All DSO assignments on the Network interface All DSO assignments on the DSX 1 interface Then you can a assign synchronous data port to Network interface time slots DSX 1 interface time slots Synchronous Data Port Assignment Screen Example main config tslot_assign sync_data net 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 SYNC DATA PORT ASSIGNMENT Assign To Netl N01 N02 N03 N04 N05 N06 N07 N08 Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned Port 2 Port 1 Assigned N09 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned Port 2 Port 1 Available N17 N18 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Availablel Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save ClearAll DSXAssign FrAssign Value Meaning Assign To Specifies either Neti network or DSX1 1 DSX 1 time slo
14. Specifies the maximum clock rate for a user data port The data rate for this port is limited to the rate specified by this option so that the maximum rate supported by an attached DTE is not exceeded Display Conditions This option only appears when the Port Use is set to Frame Relay and if the unit has multiple data ports the selected port is Port 2 1536 The maximum port rate for the port is 1536 kbps 2048 The maximum port rate for the port is 2048 kbps Port Base Rate Kbps Possible Settings Nx64 Nx56 Default Setting Nx64 Specifies the base rate for the data port which is a multiple from 1 to 24 of the base rate specified by this option N is a number from 1 to 24 Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Synchronous Data This option does not appear for a FrameSaver SLV 9128 II Nx64 The base rate for the port is 64 kbps Nx56 The base rate for the port is 56 kbps Invert Transmit Clock Possible Settings Auto Enable Disable Default Setting Auto Determines whether the clock supplied by the FrameSaver unit on interchange circuit DB ITU 114 Transmit Signal Element Timing DCE Source TXC is phase inverted with respect to the clock used to time the incoming Transmitted Data TD Auto The port checks the clock supplied by the DCE on TXC on this port If necessary the port automatically phase inverts the clock with respect to the tra
15. 3 Select the Up code in the Remote Line Loopback row to put a remote device into loopback 4 To start the test highlight Send under Command in the Remote Line Loopback row and press Enter The code is sent for up to 10 seconds or until an acknowledgement is received from the remote end The length of time that the test has been running is shown in the Results column 5 To stop the test send the Down code to take the remote device out of loopback November 2000 6 33 Troubleshooting Send and Monitor Pattern Tests 6 34 The pattern tests enable a FrameSaver unit to either send or monitor a known bit pattern These tests generate industry standard bit patterns that can be used to determine whether information is being correctly transmitted across a circuit The following test patterns are available QRSS 511 All zeros 2047 All ones 2E15 1 215 1 1 in 8 2E20 1 220 1 3 in 24 User defined 2 byte test pattern a0a0 63 A Send Pattern test cannot be started when the following tests are running Any Loopback on the same interface Send Pattern Test on any port assigned to this network interface m Send V 54 or FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous and assigned to this network interface gt Procedure To send and monitor a Pattern Test 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Test Netwo
16. 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 41 Configuration Configuring the DSX 1 Interface Select DSX 1 to display or change the physical configuration options when a DSX 1 interface is installed see Table 3 6 Main Menu gt Configuration DSX 1 Table 3 6 DSX 1 Physical Interface Options 1 of 2 Interface Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether the DSX 1 interface selected is available for use Enable The interface is available Disable The interface is not available for use If there are time slots assigned to the DSX 1 interface when you attempt to disable it the message This action will clear all DSX 1 Cross Connections Are You Sure No appears If you select No The operation is cancelled Yes The following occurs All existing DSX 1 interface cross connect assignments are cleared Alarms or traps associated with the DSX 1 interface are not generated LEDs associated with the DSX 1 interface are held in an off state Line Framing Format Possible Settings D4 ESF Default Setting ESF Specifies the framing format for transmitted and received signals on the DSX 1 interface D4 Uses D4 framing format ESF Uses Extended Superframe ESF framing format Line Coding Format Possible Settings AMI B8ZS Default Setting B8ZS Specifies the line coding format for the DSX 1 interface AMI Uses Alternate M
17. Check that the port cable is securely attached at both ends Check the status of the attached equipment 1 nnnn indicates a DLC number of 16 through 1007 2 frame relay link is one of the following Neti FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with a user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface November 2000 6 7 Troubleshooting 6 8 Table 6 1 Alarm Conditions 2 of 7 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do EER at Network 1 The error rate of the received network signal exceeds the currently configured threshold This condition only occurs if the network interface is configured for ESF framing This condition clears when the error rate falls below the threshold value which may take up to 15 minutes Verify that the network cable is securely attached at the network interface Contact your network provider Ethernet Link Down The communication link for the Ethernet port is down and the Interface Status for the port is enabled Check the LAN connected to the Ethernet port Internal Modem Failed The unit s internal modem failed to pass the self test Reset the FrameSaver unit Main Menu gt Control gt Reset Device If the modem fails again contact your service representative ISDN Link Profile Disabled ISDN Link Name A
18. 8 position keyed modular jack The following tables show pin assignments for the ISDN PRI and BRI DBMs and the purpose of each FrameSaver SLV 9128 ISDN PRI pin assignments Function Circuit Direction Pin Number PRI Receive Ring DBM1 From Local Loop 1 PRI Receive Tip DBM2 From Local Loop 2 PRI Transmit Ring DBM4 To Local Loop 4 PRI Transmit Tip DBM5 To Local Loop 5 FrameSaver SLV 9126 ISDN BRI U pin assignments Function Circuit Direction Pin Number BRI Transmit Receive Ring DBM4 To From 4 Local Loop BRI Transmit Receive Tip DBM5 To From 5 Local Loop ISDN Modular Cable The ISDN cable comes with the FrameSaver unit ordered with the DBM feature November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Technical Specifications 9128 A2 GB20 40 The following technical specifications are included m FrameSaver NAM Network Access Module and its interfaces m 1 Slot FrameSaver Unit and its interfaces m 14 Slot 9000 Series Access Carrier ISDN BRI DBM ISDN PRI DBM Table D 1 NAM Technical Specifications 1 of 3 Specification Criteria Approvals FCC Part 15 Class A digital device FCC Part 68 Refer to the equipment s label for the Industry Canada Safety Registration Number Refer to the equipments label for the Certification Number Refer to the equipments label for safety information Physical Environment Operating temperature Storage temp
19. DC Power Supply 1 power supply installed 2 power supplies installed 100 VAC 60Hz 1 7amps_ 171 watts 120 VAC 60Hz 1 03 amps_ 60 watts 100 VAC 50Hz 1 15 amps_ 60 watts Result 207 Btu per hour 100 VAC 60Hz 1 25amps_ 64 5 watts 120 VAC 60Hz 1 5amps_ 177 watts 230 VAC 50Hz O 9 amps 172 watts Result 221 Btu per hour 104 watts at 48 VDC Result 355 Btu per hour 124 watts at 48 VDC Result 423 Btu per hour November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Technical Specifications Table D 4 ISDN BRI DBM Optional Feature Technical Specifications Specification Criteria Standards Compliance ANSI T1 601 1992 physical layer Bellcore SR NWT 001937 Issue 1 February 1991 ITU Q 921 1992 link layer ITU Q 931 1993 network layer TR TSY 00860 ISDN Calling Number Identification Services February 1989 and Supplement June 1990 Power Consumption 60 mA at 15 VDC Average power 9 watt 3 07 Btu per hour Weight 0 27 lbs 4 3 oz 0 12 kg 122 grams Switch Compatibility National ISDN 1 NI 1 Service Supported Capability Package IOC B for 1B service which supports up to two circuit switched B channels BRI B1 and BRI B2 with one Service Profile Identification SPID number and one local phone number Capability Package IOC R for 2B service which supports up to two circuit switched B channels BRI B1 and BRI B2 with two SPID numbers and
20. Description Part Number Feature Number RJ48C T1 Network Cable 035 0209 2031 3100 F 1 500 RJ48C to RJ48C 20 feet 6 1 meters RJ48C DSX 1 Network Cable 8 pin modular to 8 pin modular 20 feet 6 1 meters ISDN BRI DBM Cable RJ49C to RJ49C 20 feet 6 1 meters ISDN PRI DBM Cable RJ48C to RJ48C 20 feet 6 1 meters T1 Line Interface Cable 035 0221 2031 3100 F1 510 RJ48C to CA81A 20 feet 6 1 meters For use in Canada COM Port to Terminal Cable 035 0314 1431 3100 F2 540 8 pin modular to DB25P 14 feet 4 3 meters COM Port to PC Cable 035 0313 1431 3100 F2 550 D Sub9 to DB25 for PC serial port 14 feet 4 3 meters COM Port to LAN Adapter Cable 035 0315 1431 3100 F 1 910 custom unkeyed 8 pin plug to 8 pin plug modular cable 14 feet 4 3 meters Used for a LAN Adapter LANA Adapter DB25 plug to 8 position modular 002 0069 0031 3100 F 1 920 receptacle Used with the COM Port to LAN Adapter Cable T1 Mass Termination Cable 035 0363 0531 9007 F 1 500 50 pin plug to seven RJ48S plugs 5 feet 1 5 meters Connects carrier mounted units to a M66 block DSX 1 Adapter Cable 035 0386 0031 9008 F 1 560 RJ48C to DB15 1 foot 0 3048 meters For use by FrameSaver 9126 E 4 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Index Numbers 1MPort mode auto configuration 1Port mode auto configuration 2MPorts mode auto configuration 55 hexadecimal t
21. Invalid date must be mm dd yyyy A non valid date was entered on the System Information screen Reenter the date in the month day 4 digit year format Invalid date and or time A non valid date or time was entered on the System Information screen The date does not exist e g February 30th Reenter the date in the month day 4 digit year format and or time in the hour minutes seconds format Invalid Link Already Active Start was selected for a Test Call but the selected frame relay link is currently in use Wait until the link is available and try again Invalid No ISDN Channels Available Start was selected for a Test Call but all supported ISDN channels are currently in use Wait until a channel is available and try again Invalid No Test Call Active Stop was selected for a Test Call and no test call is active on the selected link This can occur when the test is ended because the link is needed for an active connection but the PVC Test screen has not yet been updated to Start Start the Test Call again when the connection is Inactive again November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Table 5 5 Device Messages 3 of 6 Operation and Maintenance Message What It Indicates What To Do Invalid time must be hh mm ss A non valid system time was entered on the System Information screen Reenter the time in the hour mi
22. Specifies the maximum rate that will be attempted for the frame relay link when it is activated The actual rate achieved on the link depends upon the number of successful calls placed or answered and the negotiated rate on each call NOTE This option takes effect as soon as a change is saved If the rate is increased additional calls will be placed If the rate is decreased calls will be dropped For extra calls to be successful the Maximum Link Rate must be increased at the originating device before it is increased at the answering device 64 An individual frame relay link is formed and a single call is placed using a B channel when the link is activated 128 1472 A constituent link is configured for each multiple of 64 kbps in the specified bandwidth This bundle of constituent links will function as a single frame relay multilink When the multilink aggregate link is activated calls will be placed or answered on as many constituent links as possible based upon available B channels 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 49 Configuration Table 3 9 ISDN Link Profile Options 3 of 3 Caller Identification Method Possible Settings Caller ID Proprietary Default Setting Caller ID Specifies the method used to identify callers NOTE The Caller Identification Method setting must be the same at both ends of the circuit Caller ID Incoming calls will only be answered and the frame relay link on
23. System Contact Name and how to contact the system person can be up to 255 characters Date Current date in the month day year format mm dd yyyy Time Current time in the hours minutes format hh mm NOTE To clear existing information place the cursor in the Clear field Tab to the Clear field and press Enter See Chapter 4 Security and Logins to set up and administer logins 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 9 Configuration Setting Up the Modem The unit has an internal modem for dial in access to the menu driven user interface as well as dial out capability when an SNMP trap is generated When the modem will be used to dial out Modem Directory phone numbers need to be set up Otherwise simply configure or change dial in access to the unit The modem port is already configured for connection to an asynchronous terminal and dial in access with Port Use set to Terminal However additional changes may be needed see Table 3 22 Modem Port Options Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Modem Port For dial in access to the menu driven user interface via Telnet make sure Port Use is set to Net Link the IP address and subnet mask are entered if they are different from the node s and that the Link Protocol is correct For dial in access to the router connected to the unit s COM port make sure the Communication Port s Port Use option is set to Modem PassThru See Setting Up Call Dir
24. power recycling the ISDN BRI DBM may have failed November 2000 5 7 Operation and Maintenance 5 8 Table 5 1 General Status LEDs 2 of 2 Label Indication Color What It Means ALM cont d Operational Alarm Fail Red ON FrameSaver unit has just been reset or an error or fault has been detected Alarms appear on the System and Test Status screen See Table 5 7 Health and Status Messages for additional information OFF No failures have been detected TST Test Mode Yellow ON Loopback or test pattern is in progress initiated locally remotely or from the network OFF No tests are active BKP Backup Yellow ON FrameSaver unit is in Backup mode that is the backup link has been established and backup is in progress through the specified Alternate Destination Link OFF FrameSaver unit is not in Backup mode Blinking ON and OFF Alternate Destination Link is being established but no data has been passed FR Mode 2 Model 9128 II only Frame Relay Mode Multi colored Yellow LMI is down on the FrameSaver SLV 9128 lII Green LMI is up on the FrameSaver SLV 9128 lI 2 On the Display LEDs amp Control Leads screen for the Model 9128 II only FR Mode is On or Off When On highlighted the FrameSaver unit is in Frame Relay mode November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40
25. 10E 7 Declares an EER if more than 9 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 1076 or 1075 or 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 10 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 8 Declares an EER if more than 41 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals or a 1077 10 6 10 5 10 4 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 42 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 9 Declares an EER if more than 4 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals or a 1078 10 7 10 6 10 5 or 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 5 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period Circuit Identifier Possible Settings ASCII Text Entry Clear Default Setting blank Identifies the transmission vendor s circuit information to facilitate troubleshooting ASCII Text Entry Edit or display circuit identifier information maximum 255 characters Clear Removes the circuit identifier information 3 36 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Configuring a User Data Port 9128 A2 GB20 40 Select Physical from the Data Ports menu to display or change the physical characteristics of the data port connected to the DTE see Table 3 5 Main Menu gt Configuration Data Ports Physical Table 3 5 Data Port Physical Interface Options 1 of 5 Port Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting
26. 5 66 PLB 6 28 Policing Traffic Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks Access Level 3 90 B 93 4 3 assigning port to network or DSX 1 time slots assignment clearing Base Rate bursting communication options control leads Ethernet connector pin assignments C 13 Ethernet interface status LED modem options Status data ports Use 3 37 8 88 3 92 IN 8 PPP 3 92 3 94 previous recent cause values Primary Clock Failed 5 23 6 11 Source Primary Destination Primary Frame Relay Link Primary Link RIP printed reports printer COM port cable problem indicators product related documents Profile ID SPID profiles entering Proprietary Caller Identification Method 3 50 4 5 RIP 3 75 Protocol address resolution Link 3 92 3 94 LMI 3 60 Point to Point PPP 3 92 3 94 Routing Information RIP 3 75 3 91 Serial Line IP SLIP 3 92 3 94 Simple Network Management SNMP Proxy ARP PVC availability backup over network interface connection status connections total number Loopback Management total number dedicated name 3 71 3 82 tests troubleshooting problems quality of service Quick Reference November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 R ratios FDR and DDR remote loopbacks 6 31 6 33 Repeater Loopback reports Network Health reset last time
27. 60 Default Setting 10 Determines the amount of lapsed time before disconnecting a user session in minutes Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Inactivity Timeout is set to Enable 1 60 Sets the number of minutes allowed before the modem disconnects IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies a unique IP address for accessing the system via the modem port This option is only in effect when the modem port is configured as a network communication link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the modem port which you can view or edit Clear Clears the IP address for the modem port and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 When the IP Address is all zeros the modem port uses the Node IP Address if one has been configured Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the system This option is only in effect when the modem port is configured as a network communication link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the modem port which
28. Available Settings 50 51 52 10000 Default Setting 10000 Specifies the number of milliseconds that must be exceeded before an SLV Latency Threshold alarm event is declared and backup if configured is initiated for a DLCI 50 10000 Sets the limit for these error events SLV Round Trip Latency Clearing Event Threshold Available Settings 1 2 3 4 20 Default Setting 2 Specifies the number of consecutive SLV latency measurements that must be received before it is determined that a DLCI is suitable for normal multiplexed PVC operation and the alarm is cleared 1 20 Sets the limit for the clearing event SLV Packet Size bytes Available Settings 64 2048 Default Setting 64 Sets the size of packets in bytes that will be used for SLV communications SLV packets are used to track latency and other SLV related variables When the packet size is changed a new round trip and average latency calculation must be performed so these measurements will not appear on the SLV Performance Statistics screen until a new sampling interval has occurred 64 2048 Sets the packet size for SLV communications SLV Synchronization Role Available Settings Tributary Controller None Default Setting Tributary Determines the role the unit plays in maintaining synchronization of user history data collection and storage between FrameSaver SLV and or FLEX devices Tributa
29. Copy file from a local directory on the host to file 2in the current directory of the FrameSaver node If file2 is not specified the file will be named file on the FrameSaver node recv file1 file 2 Same as a get send file1 file 2 Same as a put pwd Print the name of the current directory of the FrameSaver unit node bin Places the FTP session in binary transfer mode November 2000 5 69 Operation and Maintenance Upgrading System Software If you need to upgrade the FrameSaver unit s program code you must transfer the upgrade of the nam ocd file in the system memory directory using the put command NOTE Upgrades can be performed through the network using a Management PVC or through the COM port if Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 3 20 Communication Port Options B gt Procedure To download software 1 Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are upgrading 2 Type bin to enter binary transfer mode 3 Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the upgrade provided this function is supported by your equipment 4 Type cd system to change to the system directory 5 Perform a put of Rxxxxxx ocd xxxxxx being the software release number to the nam ocd file to start the upgrade If the message displayed is Then nam ocd File Transfer Complete The download was successful The file is loaded into system memory nam ocd
30. DLCI in connection Delete connection first User tried to delete a DLCI that was part of a connection No action needed or Delete the connection then delete the DLCI DLCI Number Already Exists The DLCI number entered on the DLCI Record Entry screen has already been created so is not unique Enter another DLCI number November 2000 5 11 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 5 Device Messages 2 of 6 Message What It Indicates What To Do DLCI Number User tried to designate a No action is needed Reserved special troubleshooting DLCI Duplicate DLCI Number DLCI number entered is not unique for the frame relay link No action needed previous contents of the DLCI number field is restored File Transfer Complete Seen at an FTP terminal A file transfer was performed successfully Switch to the newly downloaded software See Changing Software File Transfer Failed Invalid file Seen at an FTP terminal A file transfer was attempted but it was not successful Try again making sure you type the filename correctly Exit the FTP session or download another file See Changing Software Invalid Already Active A test was already in progress when it was selected No action needed Invalid Character x A non valid printable ASCII character has been entered Reenter information using valid characters
31. FrameSaver SLV Models 9126 9128 and 9128 Il USER S GUIDE Document No 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 KANADAN S Copyright 2000 Paradyne Corporation All rights reserved Printed in U S A Notice This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Ave N Largo FL 33773 Paradyne Corporation makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Further Paradyne Corporation reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of Paradyne Corporation to notify any person of such revision or changes Changes and enhancements to the product and to the information herein will be documented and issued as a new release to this manual Warranty Sales Service and Training Information Contact your local sales representative service representative or distributor directly for any help needed For additional information concerning warranty sales service repair installation docu
32. November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 13 PVC Connection Options 2 of 3 Primary Destination Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 ISDN Link Name Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface used as the primary destination link the to end of a from to link The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLC or EDLCI defined which are not part of a PVC connection or management link For example if the network interface has no DLCls defined Neti FR1 would not appear as a valid setting Net1 FR1 Specifies the Network interface as the destination link ISDN Link Name For units with ISDN backup capability specifies the ISDN link of the DBM as the destination of the connection This can be any nonnull link name configured on an ISDN frame relay link Primary Destination DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the primary destination DLCI for a frame relay interface The DLCI must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection NOTES Primary Destination DLCI has no value if Primary Destination Link contains no value When an ISDN DBM is installed and the DLCI assigned to the PVC is in a Backup Group s
33. Requires a login to access the menu driven user interface Disable Does not requires a login November 2000 3 89 Configuration Table 3 21 Communication Port Options 3 of 5 Port Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies level of user access privilege for an asynchronous terminal connected to the COM port If a login is required for the port the effective access level is determined by the user s access level When a login is not required the effective access level is determined by this option NOTE The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the port or the user For example if the Port Access Level assigned is Level 2 but the User Access Level is Level 3 then only level 3 access will be permitted for the port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Level 1 Allows full access and control of the device including monitoring diagnostics and configuration The user can add change and display configuration options and perform device testing CAUTION Before changing the communication port s access level to Level 2 or 3 make sure that either Telnet Session Access Level or the Modem Port s Port Access Level is set top Level 1 and at least one Login ID is set to Level 1 Otherwise access will be lost If this occurs you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin
34. linkUp and linkDown Variable Bindings 1 of 2 Interface Variable Bindings Possible Cause Physical Sublayer T1 Network DSX 1 PRI Supported by the media specific DS1 MIB iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib linkDown One or more alarm conditions are active on the interface Alarm conditions include Loss of Signal LOS or far end loss of signal Out of Frame OOF Alarm Indication Signal AIS Excessive Error Rate EER Yellow Alarm Strings ifString down No alarms exist e g Network T1 down due to yellow alarm ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp No alarms on the interface String ifString up Synchronous Data Port Supported by the media specific RS232 like MIB iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib linkDown One or more alarm conditions are active on the port Alarm conditions include DTR off RTS off 2 Not DTR or RTS but link is down String ifString alarmString down e g Sync Data Port SO1P1 DTR and RTS down ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp No alarms on the port
35. the letter designation assigned to the group of DLCls appears next to the primary destination DLCI number on the Management PVCs Options screen 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number inclusive Primary EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the EDLCI number used for a management PVC when a multiplexed DLCI is selected EDLCls identify individual connections within multiplexed DLCls that are unique to those DLCls Use a unique EDLCI to identify an individual connection within a multiplexed DLCI Use 0 to identify the primary EDLCI Use 1 62 to identify secondary EDLCls Use the primary EDLCI for customer data which has a higher utilization rate than management data with slightly less line overhead Display Conditions This option does not appear if the DLCI field does not reference a multiplexed DLCI NOTE Clearing the DLCI or changing it to a standard DLCI suppresses EDLCI field 0 62 Specifies the EDLC number inclusive 3 74 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 15 Management PVC Options 3 of 4 Primary Link RIP Possible Settings None Proprietary Standard_out Default Setting For multiplexed DLCls Proprietary For nonmultiplexed DLCIs Standard_out Specifies which Routing Information Protocol RIP is used to enable routing of management between FrameSaver units and attached equipment None D
36. 10 Specifies how many error free messages it will take to clear the error event LMI Status Enquiry N1 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 255 Default Setting 6 Configures the LMI defined N1 parameter which sets the number of status enquiry polling cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is initiated Applies to the user side of a UNI only 1 255 Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated before a full status enquiry is initiated LMI Heartbeat T1 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 10 Configures the LMI defined T1 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI Applies to the user side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI Inbound Heartbeat T2 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 15 Configures the LMI defined T2 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI Applies to the network side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI N4 Measurement Period T3 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 20 Conf
37. 3 20 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Restricting Automatic Backup and Configuring Backup Timers You can specify when auto backup is allowed to occur If backup is restricted and a backup is active when the allowed time for backups is over then the backup is terminated and the data is returned to the primary data path regardless of the primary path s condition You can restrict auto backup to occur only On certain days of the week Atcertain times of the day The following additional features can be configured Delays can be configured to control how long the unit will wait before initiating backup when a DLCI is declared down and how long it will wait to restore service once the DLCI is declared operational again A threshold can be set to determine how many times a primary destination DLCI can transition between Active and Inactive before the unit initiates backup B gt Procedure To set the criteria and backup timers for automatic backup 1 Enable Auto Backup Main Menu gt Configuration Auto Backup Criteria When a failure occurs the unit automatically enables the Alternate Link and traffic is rerouted over the backup alternate interface 2 Specify the amount of delay after a DLCI is declared down before backup is initiated DLCI Down Backup Activation Delay 3 Set the threshold for transitions of the DLCI s status before backup is initiated DLCI Down Backup Activation Transmis
38. Basic Rate Interface or Primary Rate Interface Dial Backup Module is installed the following ISDN backup features are provided Provides automatic dial backup through the ISDN for data when primary frame relay network or access line failures occur then automatically restores data to the primary route when service returns to normal Backup is supported regardless of whether or not Caller ID is provisioned on the ISDN circuit A secondary backup phone number is also available to call when a backup link cannot be established with the primary backup site Supports simultaneous origination answering or origination and answering backup calls as needed based upon how the ISDN Link Profile is set up This feature is also known as peer to peer calling Provides automatic configuration of an alternate route and DLCI for automatically created PVCs at either the remote site or central site based upon the learned far end DLCI number When the automatic backup feature is enabled backup and restoration occur automatically Provides backup timers that can be configured to better control the amount of time required before backup is initiated when a backup call will be terminated once the failure condition clears and a delay before normal service is restored These features are useful during periods of frequent service disruption In addition round trip latency thresholds can be configured that will initiate backup when configured t
39. Configuration Table 3 19 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 5 of 5 Trap Disconnect Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the internal modem disconnects after the SNMP trap message has been sent This configuration option only applies to modem connections initiated as a result of sending the SNMP trap message Enable Disconnects the call after sending an SNMP trap message s Disable Does not disconnect the call and holds the line until it is disconnected manually or by the remote modem This allows the NMS to poll the FrameSaver unit for more information after receiving an SNMP trap Call Retry Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Controls whether an incomplete call busy no answer etc is retried when an SNMP trap message is sent to the modem port If an Alternate Dial Out Directory is specified the alarm directory s telephone number is called first If the call cannot be completed then the alternate directory s telephone number is called see the Control menu s Modem Call Directories Enable Attempts to retry the call up to one time per SNMP trap message with a delay between the retry The delay is specified by the Dial Out Delay Time Min configuration option Disable Does not retry an incomplete call Dial Out Delay Time Min Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 5 Specifies the amount
40. Conversations Disable Disable Short Term History samples seconds 5 Long Term History samples seconds 4 Click on the domain from the Domains list and configure the following Property Description Setting Groups Stats S Statistics collection Enabled for all domains Hosts H Level 3 information Enabled for IP domain only network Disabled for all other domains Conversations C Protocols being used Disabled for all domains Logging Event logging Disabled for all domains and groups 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to apply the changes Refer to Configuring Domains in Properties Files in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 8 7 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template Once DLCls have been discovered SLV alarms should be configured and assigned to each DLCI OpenLane provides a template for configuring alarms DLCI alarms can be configured manually but using the Paradyne alarm defaults template greatly reduces configuration time The following alarms are configured for each DLCI included in the Paradyne MIB Frames Sent SLVFramesSnt Rx DLC Utilization SLVrxDLCIUtil Tx CIR Utilization SLVTxCIRUtil Frames Sent Above CIR SLVFramesTxAbvCIR Tx DLCI Utilization SLVTxDLCIUtil
41. DBM cable problem T1 facility problem LOS at Network 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the network interface Clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal to 12 5 Possible reasons include Network cable problem No signal is being transmitted at the far end FrameSaver unit T1 facility problem Monitor Pttn Active DLCI nnnn frame_relay_link 1 2 The unit is monitoring a test pattern on the specified DLCI on the specified frame relay link Monitor Pttn Active Interface A Monitor Pattern test is active on the specified interface using a selected pattern This test cannot be activated on user data ports that have Port Use set to Frame Relay Network Com Link Down The communication link for the COM port is down and the COM port is configured for Net Link Network Initiated ISDN BRI Test Active ISDN BRI DBM only An ISDN test has been initiated by the ISDN BRI network and it is currently active OOF at DSX 1 An Out of Frame OOF condition is detected on the DSX 1 interface Possible reasons include Incompatible framing format between the DTE and the FrameSaver unit DSX 1 cabling problem 1 nnn indicates a DLC number of 16 through 1007 2 frame relay link is one of the following Neti FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated wi
42. FR SERVICE Profile Link Name T1 FR NAM Child Card ISDN BRI DBM S W Release MM mm bb Hardware Version hhhh hhh 101018001 101018002 Frame relay logical link on PRI if applicable For the user side ISDN PRI DBM of FR DTE Profile Link Name T1 FR NAM Child Card ISDN PRI DBM S W Release MM mm bb Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the network side ISDN PRI DBM of FR SERVICE Profile Link Name T1 FR NAM Child Card ISDN PRI DBM S W Release MM mm bb Hardware Version hhhh hhh 101017001 to 101017024 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 B 5 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable For remote monitoring at sites where FrameSaver units are operating with NetScout Probes use the following ifName ifDescr and iflndex Table B 2 NetScout Interface Objects Information 1 of 2 Sync Data Port 2 link on Synchronous Data Port 2 RMON IN OUT Synchronous Data Port of FR DTE Slot s Port 2 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the network side RMON IN OUT Synchronous Data Port of FR SERVICE Slot s Port 2 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh ifName Description ifDescr ifEntry 2 ifIndex Frame Relay Logical Layer Frame Relay 1 Frame relay logical For the DTE side 1 Network link on the network RMON IN OUT Network T1 of interface FR DTE T1 FR NA
43. Neti FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with the user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface 3 Does not apply to a TS Management Link DLCI November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 7 Health and Status Messages 7 of 7 Message What It Indicates Timeslot Discovery in Progress Network 1 Time slot discovery is currently taking place to determine the time slots that will be used for frame relay traffic on the network interface This message only appears when the Time Slot Discovery option is enabled Main Menu gt Configuration Time Slot Assignment Frame Relay Network Assignments and an LMI failure is detected on the network interface s frame relay link Two Level 1 Users Accessing Device Two Level 1 users are already using the menu driven user interface only two sessions can be active at one time Test Call Active ISDN Link Name A test call is active on the specified frame relay link the link being the ISDN Link Name assigned in the ISDN Link Profile This message would only appear for models with the built in DBM Yellow at DSX 1 A yellow alarm signal is received on the DSX 1 interface DTE has detected a LOS or OOF condition Yellow at ISDN PRI Active Idle ISDN PRI DBM only A yellow alarm signal is rec
44. P Routing Table Performance Statistics Clearing Performance Statistics Service Level Verification Performance Statistics DLCI Performance Statistics Frame Relay Performance Statistics ESF Line Performance Statistics DBM Call Performance Statistics Ethernet Performance Statistics 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 5 1 Operation and Maintenance 5 2 Trap Event Log Modem Operation Activating the Modem PassThru Feature Canceling Modem PassThru Operation Manually Disconnecting the Modem Verifying Modem Operation ISDN DBM Operation Forcing Backup Disruptive Placing a Test Call Nondisruptive Verifying ISDN Lines Verifying That Backup Can Take Place FTP File Transfers Upgrading System Software Upgrading ISDN BRI DBM Software Determining Whether a Download is Completed Changing Software Transferring Collected Data Turning Off the System Alarm Relay November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Displaying System Information Operation and Maintenance Use the Identity screen to view identification information about the FrameSaver unit This information is useful if you are purchasing additional or replacement units and or making firmware upgrades Main Menu gt Status gt Identity View this field To find the System Name Domain name for this SNMP managed node up to 255 ASCII characters System Contact Contac
45. PLB is controlled by PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands Receiving a PLB Actuate command causes the system to enter a payload loopback provided a PLB can be performed in the system s current state Receiving a PLB Release command terminates the PLB Disable The system ignores the PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands NOTE When disabled the unit is not in compliance with ANSI T1 403 or AT amp T TR 54016 ANSI Performance Report Messages Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether ANSI T1 403 compliance performance report messages PRMs are generated and sent to the ISDN over the ESF facility data link every second Display Conditions This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF Enable Generates and sends PRMs Disable Does not generate and send PRMs November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 8 ISDN PRI DBM Physical Interface Options 3 of 3 Excessive Error Rate Threshold Possible Settings 10E 4 10E 5 10E 6 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 Default Setting 10E 4 Sets the error rate threshold that determines when an EER condition is declared The excessive error rate is determined by the ratio of the number of CRC6 errors to the total number of bits received over a set period of time Display Conditions This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF 10E 4 Declares an
46. Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Generating Reports for a Group Once Network Health has had sufficient time to gather data from the polled DLCls and the DLCls have been grouped you can start generating reports When selecting a report Section select WAN from the drop down list See Running Reports from the Console in the Network Health Reports Guide for additional information That section also tells you how to schedule automatic report generation NOTE Network Health provides information with each chart or table generally referred to as a report Click on the hyperlink Explanation of for an explanation of the report and its features You can also refer to the Network Health Reports Guide About Service Level Reports For long term analysis and reporting you will want to license the Service Level Reports application This application analyzes data collected over months or by quarters and provides service level information about an enterprise a region department or business process Executive IT Manager and Customer Service Level reports are provided Using these reports you can measure service performance against goals and agreements Ranges for service level goals can be set for up to five variables availability bandwidth bytes health exceptions and latency These ranges need to be set before reports are scheduled About At a Glance Reports At a Glance Reports consolidate various important DLCI
47. String ifString up 1 The DTR alarm condition will only generate a linkUp linkDown trap if the DTE supports the DTR lead state 2 The RTS alarm condition will only generate a linkUp linkDown trap if the DTE supports the RTS lead state November 2000 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults B 12 Table B 6 linkUp and linkDown Variable Bindings 2 of 2 Interface Variable Bindings Possible Cause Physical Sublayer Cont d BRI Supported through iflndex RFC 1573 iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib linkDown One or more alarm conditions are active on the interface Strings ifString down No alarms exist on the link ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp No alarms on the interface String ifString up Logical Link Sublayer T1 Network BRI PRI Synchronous Data Port Service Side of the Frame Relay UNI Supported by the media specific Frame Relay Services MIB iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib m linkDown LMI is down for the LMI Protocol configured or Frame Relay link is disabled Strings ifString down No alarms exist on the link due to LMI ifString LMI down No
48. Table 5 2 Operation and Maintenance Network DSX or PRI Interface LEDs Label Indication Color What It Means SIG Signal Green ON OFF A recoverable signal is present on the Network DSX PRI interface The signal cannot be recovered from the Network DSX PRI interface An LOS condition exists OOF Out of Frame Yellow ON OFF At least one OOF was detected during the sampling period No OOFs were detected during the sampling period ALM Alarm Yellow ON OFF An alarm condition is present on the network DSX PRI interface Current alarm conditions Loss of Signal LOS Loss of Frame LOF Out of Frame OOF Excessive Error Rate EER a Yellow Alarm Signal a Alarm Indication Signal AIS No alarm condition is present on the Network DSX PRI interface Table 5 3 User Data Port LED Label Indication Color What It Means OK 1 Operational Status Green ON OFF The interchange circuits for the port are in the correct state to transmit and receive data The port is idle Occurs if the port is disabled or if the port is configured to monitor DTR and or RTS and the lead s is not asserted 1 The FrameSaver SLV 9128 II only has one OK LED even though it has two user data ports If either port is enabled and active the LED is on If both ports are enabled and one of the por
49. The Ethernet port is operating in full duplex mode 4 wire Half The Ethernet port is operating in half duplex mode 2 wire Disabled The Ethernet port has been disabled Frames Transmitted The number of successfully transmitted frames on the port Frames Received The number of frames received on the port Errored Frames The number of errors detected on the port Possible errors include Internal transmit and receive errors Transmitter and receiver overruns Receive checksum errors Alignment errors Long frames Excessive Collisions The number of failed frame transmissions due to excessive collisions Carrier Sense Errors The number of times the carrier sense condition was lost or was never asserted during frame transmissions Deferred The number of delayed first transmissions due to the line being Transmissions busy November 2000 5 61 Operation and Maintenance Trap Event Log 5 62 The Trap Event Log displays all traps stored in the SNMP trap event log The following log example describes the alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP trap for a physical interface and for the frame relay LMls and DLCls These alarm conditions also generate Health and Status messages seen on the System and Test Status screen Main Menu gt Status gt Trap Event Log Trap Event Log Screen Example main status event_log 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 TRAP
50. are always maintained so SLAs can be verified and they can be viewed from an SNMP NMS However since statistics can be cleared locally the statistics viewed via the menu driven user interface may be different from those viewed from the NMS gt Procedure To clear all statistics Performance Statistics Clear All Statistics B gt Procedure To clear specific sets of statistics 5 48 Use the ClrSLV amp DLCIStats function key to reset the SLV and DLCI performance statistic counters for the currently displayed DLCI from one of the following screens Performance Statistics Service Level Verification Performance Statistics DLC Use the ClrLinkStats function key to reset the frame relay link performance statistics Performance Statistics Frame Relay Use the ClrNearStats or ClrEarStats function key to reset all near end or all far end Extended SuperFrame ESF line performance statistics Performance Statistics ESF Line Use the ClrDBMStats function key to reset the DBM call performance statistics Performance Statistics DBM Call Use the ClrStats function key to reset all Ethernet port performance statistics Performance Statistics Ethernet November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance Service Level Verification Performance Statistics These statistics appear when Service Level Verification SLV is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status Performance
51. m Intelligent Service Level Verification Provides accurate throughput latency and availability measurements to determine network performance and whether service level agreements SLAs are being met along with SLA reporting Router Independence Unique diagnostics performance monitoring PVC based in band network management and SNMP connectivity is not dependent upon external routers cables or LAN adapters Inverse ARP and Standard RIP Support Provides Inverse ARP Address Resolution Protocol support so the frame relay router at one end of a management PVC can acquire the IP address of a FrameSaver unit at the other end of the PVC Standard RIP Routing Information Protocol allows the router to automatically learn the routes to all FrameSaver units connected to that FrameSaver unit RMON Alarms and Configurable Alarm Thresholds Provides the ability to change SLA parameter and RMON alarm thresholds via the OpenLane system to correct them in real time before the SLA is violated Security Provides multiple levels of security to prevent unauthorized access to the unit 1 2 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 About the FrameSaver SLV Auto Configuration Provides the following automatic configuration features Time Slot Discovery For automatic configuration of all network DSO assignments Frame Relay Discovery For automatic discovery of network DLCls and configuration of a user data port
52. multiplexed network DLCls Unsupported standard network DLCls that are not configured as the primary destination in a management PVC Non management PVCs in which unsupported standard network DLCls are included DLCls not included in three consecutive LMI full status response messages LMI status responses that indicate a Deleted status for the DLCI All configured options relating to the deleted circuits are also deleted and they revert to their default settings A DLCI will not be deleted if the physical interface or frame relay link is down or if the DLCI is used for the TS Management Link Disable Unused network DLCls PVC connections and management PVCs must be manually removed If the model has ISDN backup capability ISDN Link Profiles associated with the deleted records and alternate destinations will be deleted as well November 2000 3 15 Configuration Setting Up Dial Backup When configuring units with ISDN backup capability the following guidelines apply Central site configuration guidelines Set up the ISDN DBM physical interface If a BRI DBM change the Automatic Backup Configuration to Multi_Site_Backup A PRI DBM is already configured for multisite backup Modify the Link Profile s that Automatic Backup Configuration created to add a phone number Remote site configuration guidelines Set up the ISDN DBM physical interface If a PRI DBM change the Automatic Backu
53. only one ISDN link to the central site is needed Alternate destinations are automatically configured using a single ISDN Link Profile to backup all network PVC Connections and Management PVCs over the primary destination ISDN link Initially PVCs with alternate destinations are configured on the first ISDN Link Profile using the same DLCI number as the network DLCI being backed up However primary destination PVCs on the ISDN DBM interface are automatically updated to use a different DLC number for the alternate destination DLCI derived from the first SLV message received on the each network DLCI Multi_Site_Backup default for a PRI DBM Used at central sites since multiple ISDN links are needed one for each remote site Alternate destinations are automatically configured using a separate ISDN Link Profile to backup each network PVC Connection and Management PVC over the ISDN interface Initially all DLCIs are configured on the ISDN links using the same DLCI number as the network DLCI being backed up However primary destination PVCs on the ISDN DBM interface are automatically updated to use a different DLC number for the alternate destination DLCI derived from the first SLV message received on the each network DLCI Automatically created alternate destination Link Profiles appear as Bkupnnnn nnnn being the DLCI number e g Bkup200 would be configured for network DLCI 200 Disabled No auto
54. see Table 3 21 Communication Port Options Ethernet For the FrameSaver SLV 9128 II only uses the Ethernet port Only appears when the Ethernet port s Interface Status option is enabled see Table 3 20 Ethernet Port Options PVCname Uses the defined management linkname the name given the Management PVC This selection only appears when at least one Management PVC is defined for the node General Traps Possible Settings Disable Warm AuthFail Both Default Setting Both Determines whether SNMP trap messages for warmStart and or authenticationFailure events are sent to the currently configured trap manager s An authenticationFailure trap indicates that the unit is the addressee of an SNMP protocol message or an incoming ISDN call is not properly authenticated Disable Does not send trap messages for these events Warm Sends trap messages for warmStart events only AuthFail Sends trap messages for authenticationFailure events only Both Sends trap messages for both warmStart and authenticationFailure events 3 82 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 19 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 3 of 5 Enterprise Specific Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events are sent to the currently configured trap manager s Enable Sends trap messages
55. to 101025051 9128 101025001 to 101025120 FR UNI Frame relay logical For the DTE side 101015001 link on the T1 network Network T1 of FR DTE interface T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the DCE side Network T1 of FR SERVICE T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame relay logical For the user side 101016001 link on the Sync Data Port 1 Synchronous Data Port of FR DTE Slot s Port 1 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the network side Synchronous Data Port of FR SERVICE Slot s Port 1 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Table B 1 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Paradyne Interface Objects Information 3 of 3 ifName Description ifDescr ifEntry 2 ifIndex Frame Relay Logical Layer cont d FR UNI Frame relay logical link on the Sync Data Port 2 if applicable For the user side Synchronous Data Port of FR DTE Slot s Port 2 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the network side Synchronous Data Port of FR SERVICE Slot s Port 2 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh 101016002 Frame relay logical link on BRI if applicable For the user side ISDN BRI DBM of FR DTE Profile Link Name T1 FR NAM Child Card ISDN BRI DBM S W Release MM mm bb Hardware Version hhhh hhh 101018001 101018002 For the network side ISDN BRI DBM of
56. 1 2 second during execution of the test When the test is stopped the LEDs are restored to their normal condition Main Menu gt Test gt Lamp Test If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled and a Test Duration is set the Lamp Test stops when the test duration expires See Test Timeout Feature for additional information 6 36 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices This chapter includes OQOpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System Setting Up FrameSaver SLV Support OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices 9128 A2 GB20 40 Paradyne s OpenLane Service Level Management SLM system supports all FrameSaver and FrameSaver SLV devices with the following features m Web and database services m Web access to health and status information Web access to real time as well as historical graphs and reports m Web access to SLV reports m On demand polling of FrameSaver devices SNMP polling and reporting m Web based diagnostic tests end to end PVC loopbacks connectivity and physical interface tests Basic device configuration including RMON alarm and threshold configuration m ISDN backup support Automatic SLV device and PVC discovery of SLV devices with their SLV Delivery Ratio configuration option enabled The maintenance scheduling feature allows for the scheduling of multiple periodic maintenance periods and provides a record
57. 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 Rx Nonoctet Aligns MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 Rx CRC Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxCrcErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 18 1 Rx Illegal Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxllFrames 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 19 1 Tx Total Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 20 1 Rx Total Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 28 1 Rx Overruns MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxOverruns 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 B 33 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 15 Alarm OID Cross Reference 3 of 3 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 29 1 Tx Underruns MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTxUnderruns 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 Total LMI Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotalLMIErrs 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number B 34 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Rear Panels 9128 A2 GB20 40 This appendix shows the FrameSaver unit rear panels and pin
58. 1795 2 24 2 13 1 2 1 4 H T N IP Top Listeners 1 6 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devRmon PTopNDstIP 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 13 1 2 1 6 H T N IP Top Talkers 1 6 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devRmonIPTopNSrclP 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 3 1 D DLCI CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciFrCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 7 1 D Tx DEs MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDIciTxDE 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 8 1 D Tx BECNs MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrCircuitTxBECN 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 1 D Tx Frames Above CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciTxFrOutCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 18 1 D Rx Frames Above CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDliciRxFrOutCIR 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D Network Frames Lost MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciNetDropFr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 22 1 D Rx DEs MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRxDE 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 37 1 D Network Frames Offered MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRmtOffFr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 39 1 D Network Frames Offered In CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDliciRmtOffFrinCir 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask N Additional numeric
59. 2 10 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration This chapter includes the following Basic Configuration Configuration Option Areas Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options Changing Configuration Options Saving Configuration Options m Using the Easy Install Feature Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock Setting Up the Modem Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out Setting Up to Use the Modem PassThru Feature Setting Up Auto Configuration Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode Automatically Removing a Circuit Setting Up Dial Backup Setting Up the DBM Physical Interface Setting Up Automatic Backup Configuration Modifying ISDN Link Profiles Restricting Automatic Backup and Configuring Backup Timers Configuring the DBM Interface to Send SNMP Traps Assigning DLCIs to a Backup Group m PVC Backup Over the Network Interface 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 1 Configuration 3 2 Setting Up Back to Back Operation Changing Operating Mode Configuration Option Tables Configuring the Overall System Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System Configuring Service Level Verification Options Configuring General System Options Configuring Physical Interfaces Configuring the Network Interface Configuring a User Data Port Configuring the DSX 1 Interface Configur
60. 23 32 NETWORK PVC TESTS DLCI Number 550 Test Non Disruptive Command Status Result PVC Loopback Start Inactive Send Pattern Start Inactive Monitor Pattern Start Inactive Connectivity Inactive Test Call Active 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 Sequence Errors 99999 Data Errors 99999 RndTrip Time ms 99999 Frame Relay Link Up Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit If the unit does not have the ISDN DBM feature or if the ISDN Link Profile s Link Status is disabled Test Call does not appear An Outbound Phone Number must be configured for Test Call to appear NOTE Errors encountered during these tests may be caused by mismatched CIRs in the two FrameSaver units If errors are detected verify the CIR configuration and retest November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 PVC Loopback 9128 A2 GB20 40 Troubleshooting The PVC Loopback loops frames back to the selected interface on a per PVC basis This test logically not physically loops back frames received from another FrameSaver device through the selected frame relay PVC to the same device Main Menu gt Test Network PVC Test Network PVC Loopback DTE gt _ _ PVC x_ eee a Lee gt Network PVC x 98 16186 Main Menu gt Test Data Port PVC Tests Port PVC Loopback Network 98 16187 Main Menu gt Test ISDN Call PVC T
61. 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 IFN DLCI to 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 101015001 301 The only valid interface number for a FrameSaver 9126 or 9128 is 101015001 4 Edit the new file as needed Refer to Creating UDH Files and Using Custom History in the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional information See Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults for OID information for an interface 8 14 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Installing the User Defined History Files 9128 A2 GB20 40 Once the user defined history files have been created the files need to be installed History files are installed from the command line prompt in NetScout Manager Plus Should the FrameSaver unit be reset these files will need to be reinstalled The command used to install a new user history table is located in NSHOME bin CAUTION Do not use user_history_table_1 or 2 UserHistory1 and UserHistory2 are the default user history files used to keep SLV data for reports Editing either of these files will destroy SLV reporting capability B gt Procedure 1 Type dvuhist f agentname user_history_table_number config number_of_buckets interval download_file udh to load user defined history files for the frame relay link Example dvuhist f Dallas51 3 config 30 60 Dallas51lk udh The interval must be entered in seconds Type dvuhist f agentname DLCI_number us
62. 3 80 4 11 OpenLane management system SNMP security options Node IP configuration option tables IP Address Subnet 5370 NSP Number of Managers 3 80 4 11 Trap Managers O odd parity OID object identification user history file cross reference numeric order B 27 B 32 OK LED OOF at DSX 1 or Network 5 22 6 10 at ISDN PRI LED 5 7 15 9 linkDown trap OpenLane copying directory SLM support operating mode changing 3 23 operation 2 1 5 1 organization ai this document ix Out of Frame linkDown tap Out of Sync message 6 16 6 24 Outbound Management Priority 3 65 Phone Number alternate November 2000 IN 7 Index P packet capture uploading data 5 73 utility 6 5 packets Parity PassThru modem feature 1 4 5 63 Password patents A pattern send monitor interior tests 6 34 Payload Loopback PC COM port cable peer to peer calling performance statistics 5 47 6 2 clearing Phone ee ee physical data port options 3 37 DSX 1 ISDN options tests pin assignments COM port to LAN cable to PC or terminal printer cable COM port to router 1 slot NAM C 6 Ethernet port ISDN DBM connector modem connector Port 1 V 35 connector T1 cable C 12 T1 line interface cable V 35 crossover cable Ping test 6 35 placing a test call
63. 3 of 6 Cause Message No What It Indicates What To Do Invalid Info Element 100 Device sending this cause Contact your service Contents has received and implemented an information element but one or more fields in the element cannot be processed representative Invalid Message 95 No other cause in the Contact your service Unspecified invalid message class representative applies for this invalid message event Invalid Number 28 Call cannot be completed Check your ISDN link Format because the phone number profile and correct the Incomplete Address is incorrect or incomplete number Invalid Transit 91 Incorrect format of transit Contact your service Network Selection network identification representative Mandatory 96 Required data is missing Contact your service Information Element from a mandatory representative Missing information element Message Not 101 Device sending this cause Contact your service Compatible with has received a message representative Call State that is not permissible while in the call state Msg Nonexistent 98 An unexpected message Retry the call was received in a state other than Null Msg Type 97 Device sending this cause Contact your service Nonexistent or has received a nonexistent representative Unimplemented or not implemented message type while in the call state Device sending this cause has received a status message that indic
64. 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 1 D DLCI Inactive Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciStsInactiveSecs 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number B 32 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 15 Alarm OID Cross Reference 2 of 3 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1 D Average Latency MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 7 1 D Current Latency MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyLatest 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 2 1 N Frame Size Upper Limits 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtFrameSzUpLimit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 3 I N Frame Size Count 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtFrameSzCount 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 6 1 Rx Short Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxShort 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 7 1 Rx Long Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxLong 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 11 1 LMI Sequence Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkSegErr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 14 1 Tx Discards MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTxDiscards 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 15 1 Rx Discards MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxDiscards
65. Both 45000 i E SLV Frames Snt Rising Thresh Falling Threshold Reached public a 0 4 Edit any trap defaults that may be required See Step 4 of Adding SLV Alarms Manually for field settings you may want to change 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to apply your changes The window closes and the Configuration Manager main window reappears 6 Select the Install button down the center of the Configuration Manager main window to apply your changes Refer to Editing Alarms in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide to change alarm thresholds 8 10 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Adding SLV Alarms Manually 9128 A2 GB20 40 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Once DLCls have been discovered SLV alarms should be defined and assigned to each DLCI When configuring alarms manually every alarm must be configured for each DLC that is if there are eight alarms and 20 DLCls 160 trap configurations must be created 8 x 20 For this reason it is recommended that the OpenLane defaults be used Follow the procedure below to configure alarms manually To load OpenLane default settings for alarms see Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template gt Procedure 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to ope
66. C 8 November 2000 98 16214 9128 A2 GB20 40 DTE Port Connector 9128 A2 GB20 40 The following table provides the pin assignments for the 34 position V 35 connector to the DTE Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments 34 Pin Signal ITU CT Direction Socket Shield 101 A Signal Ground Common SG 102 B Request to Send RTS 105 To DSU In C Clear to Send CTS 106 From DSU Out D Data Set Ready DSR 107 From DSU Out E Receive Line Signal Detector 109 From DSU Out F RLSD or LSD Data Terminal Ready DTR 108 1 2 To DSU In H Local Loopback LL 141 To DSU In L Transmit Data TXD 103 To DSU In P A S B Receive Data RXD 104 From DSU Out R A T B Transmit Signal Element Timing 113 To DSU In U A DTE Source XTXC or TT W B Receive Signal Element Timing 115 From DSU Out V A DCE Source RXC X B Transmit Signal Element Timing 114 From DSU Out Y A DCE Source TXC AA B Test Mode Indicator TM 142 From DSU Out NN November 2000 C 9 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Standard V 35 Straight through Cable A standard V 35 straight through cable can be used to connect a DTE port toa DTE where a 34 pin plug type connector is needed for the data port and a 34 position socket type connector is needed for the DTE No special order cables are required Standard V 35 Crossover Cable
67. Configuration gt ISDN gt Physical Inactive The ISDN line is disconnected or an ISDN network alarm condition exists Invalid SPID The switch has rejected one Invalid Local Number Call Rejected Invalid ID Caller ID Call Rejected No Far End ID Call Rejected ISDN Link Name Busy of the configured SPIDs ISDN BRI DBM only The phone number configured for a B channel is an invalid local number The incoming call was rejected because the Caller ID or local phone number received from the switch did not match any configured Link Profiles If provided by the switch the rejected Caller ID is displayed after the status Otherwise Invalid Call ID is displayed The incoming call was rejected because no Caller ID was received from the switch COM port s Port Use option is set to Caller ID No local phone number was received from the far end device during the call validation process COM port s Port Use option is set to Proprietary The incoming call was rejected because the enabled ISDN Link Name associated with the incoming Caller1 ID or local phone number was busy The ISDN Link Name associated with the incoming call is displayed 5 36 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Table 5 11 DBM Interface Status 2 of 3 Operation and Maintenance Field Status What It Indicates Line Status cont d Call Rejected ISDN Link
68. Configuring Node IP Information in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about these configuration options November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Security and Logins Controlling SNMP Access The FrameSaver unit supports SNMP Version 1 which provides limited security through the use of community names There are three methods for limiting SNMP access Disabling SNMP access Assigning SNMP community names and the access type Assigning IP addresses of those NMSs that can access the unit Disabling SNMP Access 9128 A2 GB20 40 When the SNMP access is disabled the FrameSaver unit will not respond to SNMP messages B gt Procedure To disable SNMP access 1 Select the General SNMP Management options Main Menu gt Configuration gt Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management 2 Disable the SNMP Management option 3 Save your change See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about General SNMP Management configuration options November 2000 4 9 Security and Logins Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels The FrameSaver unit supports the SNMP protocol and can be managed by an SNMP manager SNMP manager access can be limited by Assigning the SNMP community names that are allowed to access the FrameSaver units Management Information Base MIB m Specifying the type of access allowed for each SNMP community name Whene
69. DCLB to verify the integrity of the frame relay circuit lt lt Other j T1 All Interface 1s The T1 DCLB Interface 98 16223 CAUTION V 54 and FT1 Loopbacks may affect operation of frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected port While in loopback the frame relay link will be down so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Troubleshooting Send Remote Line Loopback 9128 A2 GB20 40 The remote Line Loopback LLB up and down codes are in band codes that allow control of a remote device The LLB Up code invokes a line loopback in the remote unit while the LLB Down code terminates the remote line loopback Network loopbacks are defined in AT amp T TR 62411 A remote LLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active m Any Loopback on the same interface Send Pattern Test on this network interface or any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous assigned to this interface m Send V 54 or FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous and assigned to this network interface Data Channel Loopback on the frame relay link on this network interface B gt Procedure To start and stop a Remote Line Loopback 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Test Network Physical Tests PRI Physical Tests 2 Select the desired network interface shown in the screen title
70. ESF AMI B8ZS 5 selectable ranges from 0 to 655 feet 0 196 5 meters Selectable November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Technical Specifications Table D 1 NAM Technical Specifications 3 of 3 Specification Criteria Data Port 34 position V 35 connector Standard V 35 ITU ISO 2593 Data rates Variations for T1 rates automatically set to the network rate Modem MDM Interface Data rates Link Protocol 6 position unkeyed modular USOC RJ11C jack Up to 14 4 kbps PPP SLIP ISDN PRI DBM Interface Service supported Data rates Framing format Coding format Line Build Out LBO ANSI PRM 8 position unkeyed modular USOC RJ48C jack PRI NI 1 or NI 2 1 536 kbps D4 ESF B8ZS 0 0 dB 7 5 dB 15 dB 22 5 dB Selectable Ethernet Port Standard Data rates 8 position modular unkeyed jack ANSI IEEE Standard 802 3 Ethernet Version 2 10 100 BaseT auto sensing 10 and 100 Mbps Ethernet rates Table D 2 1 Slot FrameSaver Unit Technical Specifications 1 of 3 Specification Criteria Approvals FCC Part 15 Class A digital device FCC Part 68 Refer to the equipment s label for the Industry Canada Safety Registration Number Refer to the equipments label for the Certification Number Refer to the equipments label for safety information Physical Environment Operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity S
71. EVENT LOG Total Trap Events 535 Time Elapsed Since Event Event Od 23 59 59 Change in Frames Discarded due to Inbound Resource Errors on Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link Port 1 exceeded threshold of 1 by 105 Change in Total LMI Errors on Network T1 frame relay link Net1 FR1 exceeded threshold of 1 by 59 DLCI 101 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link Port 1 up DLCI 101 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link Port 1 down Primary clock failed Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay link Port 1 LMI down Network T1 frame relay link Net1 FR1 LMI down Network T1 down Unit reset ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh PgUp PgDn Up to 12 trap events can be displayed on a screen the most current first Page down PgDn to view less current trap events When no trap events have been logged No Events in Log appears in the Event column ASCII trap strings used to describe trap events are provided in the tables contained in Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps see Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance Modem Operation This section includes the following Activating the Modem PassThru Feature Canceling Modem PassThru Operation Manually Disconnecting the Modem m Verifying Modem Operation See Seiting Up the Modem in Chapter 3 Configuration for additional information Activating the Modem Pass
72. Frame Relay Link Up The call was successful Frame Relay Link Down The call was not successful Verify the configuration and Link Status in the ISDN Link Profile Select Stop to end the Test Call Use this procedure to test the ISDN path to each remote site This procedure will not put the unit into backup 5 66 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Verifying ISDN Lines Operation and Maintenance Use either of the following methods to verify operation of the ISDN lines Check the status of the DBM interface Main Menu gt Status gt DBM Interface Status Line Status should display Active If an invalid Inv status appears e g Inv SPID for an ISDN BRI DBM in the Line Status field verify that you entered ISDN physical options correctly Check the status of the unit Main Menu gt Status gt System and Test Status gt Health and Status column System Operational should appear If ISDN Network Failed appears check that both ends of the ISDN cable are seated properly for a good physical connection If that does not clear the message verify that you entered ISDN physical option information correctly then contact the network service provider See DBM Interface Status and Table 5 7 Health and Status Messages for additional status information Verifying That Backup Can Take Place As each remote site is installed verify its backup operation by unplugging the network cable so the system is
73. Health User Guide The sections that follow address only the minimal procedural steps needed once you have access to the applications See the Network Health User and Reports Guides for additional startup information and a full discussion of the application s features and how to use them 9 2 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Discovering FrameSaver Elements Once licenses are entered and you have access to the applications the Discover dialog box opens Use this dialog box to search for SLV units in your network and discover their DLCls Saving the results of the search creates definitions in the Poller Configuration which are used to poll the units IP addresses and the Community String for the FrameSaver units must be entered for Network Health to find the SLV units on the network and discover their elements These elements are resources that can be polled e g LAN WAN interfaces frame relay circuits routers and servers The two types of elements that can be polled are Statistics elements Provide counters and other gauges for information gathered about your network for statistical and trend analysis Conversation elements Provide RMON2 and similar data for information gathered about network traffic between nodes gt Procedure To find SLV device elements in your network 1 Select the LAN WAN radio button to specify the element type to be found Network Health
74. N14 N15 N16 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 N17 N118 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Slot 1 Tl FR NAM Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 5 33 Operation and Maintenance The following information is available for network interface time slots NO1 N24 The Cross Connect Status Field bottom Indicates Unassgn The time slot is unassigned FrameRly1 The time slot is assigned to the network frame relay link Port 2 The synchronous data port Port 2 is assigned to the network interface time slot 01 to 24 Ds p tt The DSX 1 time slot tt is assigned to the network interface time slot 01 to 24 Ds p ttr The DSX 1 time slot tt is assigned to the network interface time slot 01 to 24 using Robbed Bit Signaling r Displaying DSX 1 Time Slot Assignments Use the DSX 1 Timeslot Assignments Status screen to display all of the DSO assignments for each DSO on the DSX 1 interface Main Menu gt Status gt Timeslot Assignment Status gt DSX 1 The DSX 1 Timeslot Assignment Status screen displays 24 two field entries in three rows Together each two field entry defines the assignment for one DSX 1 interface time slot The top field represents the time slot of the DSX 1 Interface The bottom field
75. Performance Statistics Service Level Verification e DLCI Frame Relay ESF Line DBM Call Ethernet e Clear All Statistics IP Routing Table Destination Mask Gateway e Hop Type Interface TTL MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control Easy Install Management and Communication Auto Backup Criteria ISDN Physical Link Profiles e DLC Records Network and Data Ports Physical Frame Relay e DLCI Records Time Slot Assignment Frame Relay Network Assignments e DSX 1 to Network Assignments Sync Data Port Assignments Management and Communication Options Node IP Management PVCs e General SNMP Management Telnet and FTP Session SNMP NMS Security SNMP Traps Ethernet Port Communication Port Modem Port Clear Assignments November 2000 New or Modify PVC Connection Table Source Link DLCI EDLC e Primary Destination Link DLCI EDLC Alternate Destination Link DLCI EDLC Management PVC Entry New or Modify PVC Connection Entry 00 16756a 9128 A2 GB20 40 MAIN MENU Status Test Auto Configuration Frame Relay Discovery Mode Control Automatic Circuit Removal Automatic Backup Configuration Configuration Auto Configuration Easy Install Menu Hierarchy MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control Control Modem Cal
76. Specifies the line coding format for the network interface AMI Uses Alternate Mark Inversion AMI line coding format B8ZS Uses Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS line coding format 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 33 Configuration Table 3 4 Network Physical Interface Options 2 of 4 Line Build Out LBO Possible Settings 0 0 7 5 15 22 5 Default Setting 0 0 Specifies the line build out for the signal transmitted to the network 0 0 7 5 15 22 5 Specifies line build out in dB Bit Stuffing Possible Settings 62411 Disable Default Setting 62411 Determines the type of bit insertion to provide ones density requirements for data transmitted to the network Display Conditions This option does not appear when Line Coding Format is set to B8ZS 62411 Inserts a one in the data after 15 consecutive zeros are received or the density of ones falls below 12 5 This setting complies with AT amp T TR 62411 but is not recommended for frame relay data because it inserts errors in the data traffic Disable Disables bit stuffing Ones density is not enforced on data sent to the network Transmit Timing Possible Settings System Interface Default Setting System Allows transmit timing to be selected from either the system master clock source or from the currently selected interface System Transmit timing is derived from the current system clock source
77. Timeout Suboptimal Maximum Link Rate Cannot be Achieved Two Level 1 Users Accessing Device Yellow Alarm Signal on the Network DSX 1 or PRI interface Enable Activates alarm conditions on the system alarm relay when an alarm condition occurs Disable Does not activate the system alarm relay when an alarm condition occurs 3 32 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Configuring Physical Interfaces Characteristics for the following physical interfaces can be configured Network Interface m User Data Port s m DSX 1 Interface m ISDN Configuring the Network Interface When configuring the physical characteristics for the network interface select Physical from the Network menu see Table 3 4 Main Menu gt Configuration Network Physical Table 3 4 Network Physical Interface Options 1 of 4 Line Framing Format Possible Settings D4 ESF Default Setting ESF Specifies the framing format for transmitted and received signals on the T1 network interface D4 Uses D4 framing format NOTE This setting is not recommended by network carriers False yellow alarms may occur after traffic has been running and the channel returns to idle or when there is light traffic when other settings are selected ESF format does not create this problem ESF Uses Extended Superframe framing format Line Coding Format Possible Settings AMI B8ZS Default Setting B8ZS
78. Timeout is disabled 1 60 Up to an hour can be set FTP Session Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the system responds as a server when an FTP file transfer protocol client on an interconnected IP network requests an FTP session This option must be enabled when downloading files Enable Allows an FTP session between the system and an FTP client Disable Does not allow FTP sessions FTP Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether a login ID and password are required for an FTP session If required the login used is the same login used for a menu driven user interface session This option does not affect the TS Access Management Link Enable User is prompted for a login ID and password Disable No login is required for an FTP session FTP Max Transfer Rate kbps Possible Settings 1 1536 Default Setting 1536 Sets the maximum receive or send rate of file transfer to the system via management PVCs This option allows new software and configuration files to be downloaded using selected bandwidth without interfering with normal operation Using this option new software and configuration files can be downloaded quickly using the default settings or at a slower rate over an extended period of time by selecting a slower speed Based upon TCP flow control the FTP server in
79. Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Paradyne Frame Saver SLV Plus At a Glance Report WAN Element Largo RedBank dici 10 895 Bytes in bytes sec Latency Maximum Average msec tem lene Burst Out Distribution bytes sec 18x 12 aK 0 orror ey rA E Burst Range 1 E Buret Range 2 E Burst Range 3 E Burst Range 4 E Burst Range 5 Network Frame Drops sec Frames Out frames sec HB lt 0100 bytes E lt 0200 bytes E lt 0800 bytes DLCI Up Time E lt 1000 bytes E lt 4000 bytes Link Up Time s E Auta Range Custom Created 1029 1998 D4 10 07 PM From 10 27 1988 00 10 PM To 10 27 1998 03 39 PM Trend Reports Perform trend analysis on up to ten specified variables for DLCls Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a trend report e g burst octets but a bandwidth trend report should be generated when investigating problems that appear on Exceptions Reports Supplemental Reports and Health reports Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCls having a high Health Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem leading to a DLCl s poor Health Index rating See the Network Health Reports Guide for more information about these reports 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 9 9 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices 9 10 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Menu Hierarchy Menus The following is a graphical representations o
80. and network performance indicators onto a single page Up to ten DLCls can be included in an At a Glance Report Using the FrameSaver SLV report on page 9 9 you can compare a DLCI s volume with the network s performance over a specified period of time Ranges for service level goals can be set for up to five variables availability bandwidth bytes health exceptions and latency These ranges need to be set before reports are scheduled In addition all the enhanced network statistics that only an SLV device can accurately collect is provided so you can truly monitor the health of the frame relay network and see the effects of the customer s utilization on network efficiency 9 6 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 About Trend Reports Printed Reports Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices By specifying specific variables like bandwidth trend analysis can be performed and shown on Trend Reports Up to ten variables for a DLCI or ten DLCls on one variable can be generated on a single trend report Information can be presented in a line graph pie chart bar chart or table format Any amount of time can be specified for the reporting period These reports can help identify the reasons a DLCI has acquired a poor Health Index rating See the Exceptions Report for information about Health Index ratings All of the charts and tables seen online can also be provided on printed reports Reports Applicable to SLV Devices 912
81. are active see Starting and Stopping a Test p gt Procedure To abort all tests on all interfaces 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Test 2 Select Abort All Tests and press Enter Command Complete appears when all tests on all interfaces have been stopped NOTE Abort All Tests does not interrupt DTE initiated loopbacks November 2000 6 21 Troubleshooting PVC Tests 6 22 PVC tests can be run on a requested DLCI for a selected interface m When PVC tests are on a multiplexed DLCI between FrameSaver devices they are nondisruptive to data so user data can continue to be sent during a test m f the device at one end of the circuit is not a FrameSaver device PVC tests are on a standard DLCI and are disruptive to data Also the Connectivity test would not appear Loopback and send monitor pattern tests are available for each interface on the selected DLCI FrameSaver devices should be at each end of the circuit If a PVC Loopback is started at one end of the circuit the other end can send and monitor pattern tests The example below shows a PVC Test screen for a FrameSaver unit with ISDN backup capability with the multiplexed DLCI 550 selected If a standard DLCI was selected Disruptive rather than Non Disruptive would be displayed after Test Also the Connectivity test would not appear PVC Tests Screen Example main test network_pvc Device Name Node A 9128 II 5 26 2000
82. are currently running PLB Active Interface A Payload Loopback PLB is active on the specified network DSX 1 or ISDN PRI interface PVC Loopback Active DLCI nnnn frame_relay_link 1 8 A PVC Loopback is active on the specified DLCI for the frame relay link RLB Active Interface A network Repeater Loopback RLB is active on the specified network or DSX 1 interface 1 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n for a 1 slot unit or SsPort n for a NAM in a multislot housing the frame relay link associated with the specified user data port in the specified slot ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface 2 Interface is one of the following Network 1 DSX 1 Port n ISDN BRI or PRI 3 nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 8 Test Status Messages 2 of 2 Message What It Indicates Send Pttn Active Interface 2 A Send Pattern test is active on the specified interface This test cannot be activated on user data ports that have Port Use set to Frame Relay Monitor Pttn Active Interface A Monitor Pattern test is active on the specified interface This test cannot be activated on user data ports that have Port Use set to Frame Relay Network Initiated ISDN BRI Test An ISDN
83. assignments for the connectors interfaces and cables Standard interfaces are used on the unit so most cables do not have to be specially ordered they can be purchased anywhere NOTE In the pin assignment tables of this appendix if the pin number is not shown it is not being used The following illustration shows the FrameSaver SLV 9126 unit s rear panel TETE PORT 1 DSX NET MOM DBM 98 16154 The following illustration shows the 1 slot FrameSaver SLV 9128 without an Ethernet port unit s rear panel TEG MODEM NET DBM 98 16157 November 2000 C 1 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments C 2 The following illustration shows the 1 slot FrameSaver SLV 9128 II units rear panel This model has an Ethernet port for management MODEM DBM NET ENET 00 16840 The following illustration shows the carrier mounted single T1 dual port FrameSaver SLV 9128 and 9128 II rear panels O O SINGLE SINGLE T1 NAM T1 NAM N N E E T T D D B B M M M M D D M M D S D X E T OQO OOO 823 9 p 5238 O O O O 0 O O O O AORAR 0696 O O O O T 5 O O ag o 98 OO OO OQO OQO DBD p 0398 Caen o CEAO O Q O s R O O O O oc e oi ef ee 32328 28 98 OOO fe 0 M M O O 99 16161 01 00 16850 Model 9128 Mo
84. at the bottom of the screen if auto backup is enabled First disable Auto Backup and then change LMI Behavior Independent Handles the LMI state of each interface separately so that the LMI state of one interface has no effect on the LMI state of another interface Provides LMI Spoofing This is the recommended setting when backup is configured and for Network Service Providers NSPs Net1 FR1_Follows_Port 1 Brings LMI down on the network interface when LMI on Port 1 goes down disabling the network interface and deasserting its control leads When LMI on Port 1 comes back up the network interface is reenabled The LMI state on the network interface has no effect on the LMI state on Port 1 That is the network interface s LMI follows Port 1 s LMI Used at central sites this setting is useful when the remote site router on the other end of the PVC connection can initiate recovery via a redundant central site when there is a catastrophic central site LAN or router failure Not recommended for NSPs Net1 FR1_Follows_Port 2 Reacts like the Net1 FR1_Follows_Port 1 selection but for Port 2 instead 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 25 Configuration 3 26 Table 3 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options 2 of 3 LMI Behavior Cont d Port 1_Follows_Net1 FR1 Brings LMI down on Port 1 when LMI on the network interface goes down disabling Port 1 and deasserting its control leads When LMI on the network
85. being aged out Type The method used to add the route to the table RIP The route was discovered through Routing Information Protocol The route remains until its TTL Time to Live expires a better route is provided via RIP or there is a power reset Loc The route was added due to the FrameSaver unit s local configuration a Default IP Address or an SNMP Manager Initial Route Destination have been configured The route remains until the unit s configuration changes NMS The route was added by a Network Management System using SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol The route remains until there is a power reset of the unit ICMP The route was added because an ICMP Internet Control Management Protocol redirect message was received from a router indicating a better route to the destination That is a datagram was sent to a router and the router is informing the datagram source through an ICMP redirect message of a better route Tmp The route was added as a temporary route in order to respond to an IP packet that was received The route remains until its TTL expires or there is a power reset Interface Specifies the interface to be used to reach the destination COM Communications port a PVCname Name of the management PVC e g PVCMgmt1001 Internal The interface to be used for software loopbacks or internal device functions in order to reach the destination TTL The Time to L
86. create this problem ESF Uses Extended Superframe framing format 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 45 Configuration 3 46 Table 3 8 ISDN PRI DBM Physical Interface Options 2 of 3 Line Build Out LBO Possible Settings 0 0 7 5 15 22 5 Default Setting 0 0 Specifies the line build out for the signal transmitted to the ISDN 0 0 7 5 15 22 5 Specifies line build out in dB Network Initiated LLB Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Allows the initiation and termination of the line loopback LLB to be controlled by the receipt of LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands from the ISDN Enable LLB is controlled by LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands Receiving a LLB Actuate command causes the system to enter a line loopback provided an LLB can be performed in the system s current state Receiving an LLB Release command terminates the LLB Disable The system ignores the LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands NOTE When disabled the system is not in compliance with ANSI T1 403 or AT amp T TR 62411 Network Initiated PLB Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Allows the initiation and termination of the payload loopback PLB to be controlled by the receipt of PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands from the ISDN Display Conditions This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF Enable
87. dB 15 dB 22 5 dB ANSI PRM Selectable D 8 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Equipment List Equipment 9128 A2 GB20 40 See page E 4 for cables you can order Description Model Feature Number FrameSaver SLV Units FrameSaver SLV 9126 T1 remote site unit with integral modem but without ISDN BRI DBM for up to 16 PVCs Includes 1 Slot Housing Universal 100 240 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9126 A1 201 FrameSaver SLV 9126 T1 remote site unit with integral modem and ISDN BRI DBM for up to 16 PVCs Includes 1 Slot Housing Universal 100 240 VAC Power Supply Network Cable RJ49C BRI ISDN U Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9126 A1 202 FrameSaver SLV 9128 T1 central site 1 slot unit with integral modem and ISDN PRI DBM for up to 120 PVCs Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable RJ48C PRI ISDN Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9128 A1 202 FrameSaver SLV 9128 T1 central site 1 slot unit with integral modem but without ISDN PRI DBM for up to 120 PVCs Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9128 A1 204 FrameSaver SLV 9128 T1 central site 1 slot unit with integral modem for up to 120 PVCs and an ISDN BRI DBM Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable ISDN BRI DBM RJ49C BRI I
88. depending upon your browser or NMS application software Refer to your browser or NMS manual for additional download information B 2 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults System Group mib 2 This section provides the system object identifier and system description for the System Group for the FrameSaver 9126 or 9128 unit which is an SNMPv1 MIB FrameSaver Unit s sysDescr system 1 The following is the system description sysDescr system 1 for the NMS subsystem in the FrameSaver unit PARADYNE T1 FrameSaver SLV Model 9126 9128 S W Release MM mm bb Major minor build format NAM CCA number hardware version in hhhh hhh format Serial number sssssss FrameSaver Unit s sysObjectID system 2 The following is the system object identifier sysObjectID system 2 or OID for the NMS subsystem in the FrameSaver units FrameSaver SLV 9126 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 4 7 FrameSaver SLV 9128 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 4 8 FrameSaver SLV 9128 II 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 1 14 2 4 4 13 Interfaces Group mib 2 Clarification for objects in the Interfaces Group as defined in RFC 1573 and RFC 1213 which is an SNMPv1 MIB is provided in this section Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable The following table provides the ifName for each interface type the ifDescr and the iflndex that Paradyne has assigned to each Table B 1 Paradyne Interface Objects Information 1 of 3
89. distribution statistics on the table or graph will be zero When a DLC is selected the first and last size distribution statistics are ignored for FrameSaver units and the statistics for those buckets appear in the next valid bucket i e bucket size lt 64 and 64 statistics appear in the 65 127 bucket and gt 1518 statistics appear in the 1024 1518 bucket Conversations and Long Term and Short Term Histories are not supported in this release As a result no data will appear on windows that include these panes November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices FrameSaver units are compatible with Concord Communication s Network Health software In addition Network Health has released the first in a series of software modules that integrate FrameSaver SLV enhanced performance statistics into its reporting package see the FrameSaver SLV report example on page 9 9 To get this report you need Network Health R4 01 or higher This chapter includes Network Health information as it relates to FrameSaver SLV devices It includes the following 9128 A2 GB20 40 Installation and Setup of Network Health and reports Discovering FrameSaver Elements Configuring the Discovered Elements Grouping Elements for Reports Generating Reports for a Group About Service Level Reports About At a Glance Reports About Trend Reports Printed Reports Reports Applicable to SLV Devices N
90. following shows the pin assignments from the COM port to the DTE interface COM Port Non Keyed 8 Position DTE Modular Plug DB9 Socket No Connection Rx Data 2 2 Rx Data Signal Ground 3 5 Signal Ground Tx Data 4 3 Tx Data DTR 5 4 DTR CD 6 1 CD RTS 7 8 CTS No 8 Connection 6 DSR 7 RTS 98 16166 COM Port to Terminal Printer Cable Feature No 3100 F2 540 Order this cable when connecting the 8 position COM port to a terminal or printer rather than to a PC The following shows the pin assignments from the COM port to the DTE interface COM Port Non Keyed 8 Position DTE Modular Plug DB25 Plug Not Used 1 Rx Data 2 Rx Data Signal Ground 3 Signal Ground Tx Data 4 Tx Data DTR 5 DTR CD 6 cD RTS 7 CTS Not Used 8 DSR RTS 98 16167 C 4 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 COM Port to Router Cables Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments The following tables provide the pin assignments for connecting the 1 slot FrameSaver unit s 25 position communication port to various router auxiliary AUX or console ports using standard cables Cisco 2500 Series Router RJ45 Jack COM Port AUX Port Signal DB25 Pin Direction RJ45Pin Signal DCE Transmit Data DTE Transmit Data TXD 2 To DTE 3 TXD DCE Recei
91. for these statistics to appear The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were above the committed information rate and were dropped in transit The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were within the committed information rate but were dropped in transit The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate and were dropped in transit The number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were above the excess information rate and were dropped in transit 1 Only appears for FrameSaver units when the SLV Delivery Ratio option is enabled 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 5 49 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 14 Service Level Verification Performance Statistics 2 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates Inbound Dropped Total number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that Characters 1 were dropped in transit The counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached 232 2 then the count starts over The SLV Delivery Ratio option see Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options must be enabled for these statistics to appear NA appears instead of a statistical count if FDR DDR Frame Delivery Ratio Data Delivery Ratio information is not being received from the far end device Above CIR 1 The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were abov
92. if the DBM is installed and enabled 3 30 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 3 General System Options 2 of 3 Secondary Clock Source Possible Settings Net1 DSX Internal DBM Default Setting Internal Provides a secondary clock source when the primary clock source fails The source selected for this configuration option provides all of the timing within the unit and the clocks for all of the external interfaces The clock source will switch back to primary when the primary clock source returns and is stable for 10 seconds If the secondary clock source fails the clock source will switch to internal The clock source will switch back to primary when the primary clock source returns and is stable for 10 seconds NOTE For the Primary and Secondary Clock Source options only Internal can be selected for both options All other selections must have different settings e g if Primary Clock Source is set to Net1 Secondary Clock Source cannot be set to Net1 Net1 The secondary clock is derived from the Network1 T1 interface DSX The secondary clock for the unit is derived from the DSX 1 interface This setting only appears if the DSX 1 interface is enabled Internal The secondary clock is the internal clock DBM The secondary clock is derived from the DBM This selection only appears if the DBM is installed and enabled November 2000 3 31 Co
93. index used by tables like frame or burst size B 28 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 14 History OID Cross Reference 3 of 5 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 41 1 D Network Frames Dropped In CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciDropOffFrinCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 43 1 D Network Frames Offered Above CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDliciRmtOffFrOutCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 45 1 D Network Frames Lost Above CIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRmtDropFrOutCir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 55 1 D Network Frames Offered Above CIR Within EIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciDropFrCirToEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 57 1 D Network Frames Dropped Above CIR Within EIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRxFrNetDrop CirToEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 59 1 D Network Frames Offered Above EIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciOfferedFrOverEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 61 1 D Network Frames Dropped Above EIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciRxFrNetDrop OverEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 63 1 D DLCI EIR MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDiciEir 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 1 D DLCI Inactive Second
94. multiplexing of multiple connections into a single DLCI Allows a single PVC through the frame relay network to carry multiple DLCls as long as these connections are between the same two endpoints proprietary Do not select Multiplexed unless there are FrameSaver units at both ends of the connection November 2000 3 63 Configuration Table 3 12 DLCI Record Options 2 of 3 CIR bps Possible Settings 0 1536000 Default Setting 64000 Determines the data rate for the DLCI that the network commits to accept and carry without discarding frames the CIR in bits per second Entry of an invalid rate causes the error message Value Out of Range 0 x where x the maximum line rate available on the port 0 1536000 Specifies the network committed data rate Te Possible Settings 1 65535 Default Setting Read Only Displays the DLCI s calculated value of its committed rate measurement interval Tc in milliseconds This value is calculated based upon the settings for the Committed Burst Size Bc Bits and CIR bps options Committed Burst Size Bc Bits Possible Settings CIR Other Default Setting CIR Specifies whether the DLCI s committed burst size will follow the CIR or whether it will be entered independently This value is the maximum amount of data that the service provider has agreed to accept during the committed rate measurement interval Tc CIR Uses the val
95. of all scheduled maintenance periods past present and future November 2000 7 1 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices Easy firmware downloads to an entire network or parts of the network HP OpenView adapters for integrating OpenLane with the OpenView Web interface Setting Up the OpenLane SLM System 7 2 Instructions for installing Paradyne s OpenLane Service Level Management SLM System can be found in the following documents OpenLane 5 x Service Level Management for UNIX Quick Start Installation Instructions OpenLane 5 x Service Level Management for Windows NT Quick Start Installation Instructions See Product Related Documents in About This Guide for document numbers Select the appropriate document In addition to installation instructions these documents include instructions for Starting and stopping the OpenLane Web and database services Accessing the OpenLane application Adding a FrameSaver device m Adding a Customer ID The OpenLane SLM System has an extensive Help system For additional information refer to the following sources For UNIX users Refer to the readme txt file for distributed infrastructure details and the online Help for operational details For Windows NT users Refer to the online Help November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices Setting Up FrameSaver SLV Support 9128 A2 GB20 40 With the OpenLane SLM system
96. on the specified frame relay link LMI Down frame relay link 2 The Local Management Interface s has been declared down for the specified frame relay link For an individual ISDN link the message appears when LMI has been declared down on the link For a multilink aggregate link the message appears when LMI has been declared down on all constituent links of the frame relay multilink LOS at DSX 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the DSX 1 interface Clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal to 12 5 Possible reasons include DSX 1 cable problem No signal being transmitted from the DTE 2 frame relay link is one of the following Neti FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with the user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface November 2000 5 21 Operation and Maintenance 5 22 Table 5 7 Health and Status Messages 4 of 7 Message What It Indicates LOS at ISDN PRI Active Idle ISDN PRI DBM only A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the ISDN PRI interface Clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal to 12 5 Active Backup call was in progress Idle DBM was in Idle mode Only appears when a dial backup module DBM is installed Possible reasons include
97. on this network interface or any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous assigned to this interface m Send V 54 or FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous and assigned to this network interface Data Channel Loopback on the frame relay link on this network interface B gt Procedure To start and stop a Line Loopback 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Test Network Physical Tests 2 Select the Up code in the Send Line Loopback row to put a remote device in loopback 3 To start the test highlight Send under Command in the Send Line Loopback row and press Enter The code is sent for up to 10 seconds or until an acknowledgement is received from the remote end The length of time that the test has been running is shown in the Results column 4 To stop the test send the Down code to take the remote device out of loopback November 2000 6 31 Troubleshooting Data Channel Loopbacks on a Frame Relay Link 6 32 A network initiated Data Channel Loopback DCLB loops data over the frame relay link DSOs received on the network interface through the FrameSaver unit s framing circuitry and back to the same interface A DCLB can be controlled over the frame relay link using one of the following in band methods m V 54 Loopback ANSI T1 403 Annex B Fractional T1 FT1 Channel Loopback The frame relay service provider can use
98. or when testing the backup path whenever data needs to be forced from the primary destination interface to the alternate destination typically from the T1 network to the ISDN B gt Procedure 1 Make sure the ISDN Link Profiles are set up correctly Auto Backup is enabled and the ISDN interface is enabled see Setting Up Dial Backup in Chapter 3 Configuration Have someone at the far end disconnect the network cable to initiate backup Verify that backup is taking place See Verifying That Backup Can Take Place NOTE When an alarm requiring backup is received backup can be manually controlled by enabling or disabling the Auto Backup option see Step 2 Have the far end network cable reconnected to return to standard operation November 2000 5 65 Operation and Maintenance Placing a Test Call Nondisruptive Use this procedure to test the ISDN path to each remote site This procedure will not put the system into backup gt Procedure 1 Make sure the ISDN Link Profiles and DLCls are set up correctly for the DBMs at each end see Setting Up ISDN Link Profiles in Chapter 3 Configuration Main Menu gt Configuration gt ISDN gt Link Profiles Main Menu gt Configuration ISDN DLC Records 2 Place a Test Call from one of the devices Main Menu gt Test 3 ISDN Call PVC Tests Select the link to be tested Start a Test Call The Status should be Active If the Result is Then
99. procedure Retry the call Expired has been initiated as a result of the expiration of a timer Requested Channel 44 Circuit or channel Allow the DBM to Not Available requested cannot be automatically call using the provided by the other side alternate link if Auto of the interface Backup is enabled or manually select an alternate path for the call Requested Facility 69 Supplemental service No action is needed Not Implemented requested is not supported by this device Requested Facility 50 The supplementary service Arrange for the desired Not Subscribed requested cannot be capability provided by the network until user completes arrangement with its supporting networks Resource 47 No other cause in the No action is needed Unavailable resource unavailable class Unspecified applies for this resource unavailable event November 2000 5 43 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 12 Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages 6 of 6 Cause Message No What It Indicates What To Do Response to 30 Status enquiry message No action is needed STATus ENQuiry received generating this message Service Option Not 79 No other cause in the No action is needed Implemented service or option not available class applies for this not implemented event Service Option 63 No other cause in the Wait and try again Unavailable service or option not Unspecified available class applies for this not a
100. properties Verify and correct domains and groups Monitor the agent and DLCls Refer to the NetScout documentation for additional information about accessing and managing the FrameSaver SLV unit through NetScout Manager Plus refer to the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide to help you install the application monitor traffic and diagnose emerging problems on network segments NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide to help you configure agents remote servers and report templates using the various NetScout products NetScout Probe User Guide to help you install the NetScout Probe between the FrameSaver unit and its router and configure the probe on network segments you want to monitor November 2000 8 3 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus Network B gt Procedure A 2 Bring up the NetScout Manager Plus main window Select the FrameRelay radio button from the agent type selection bar on the left side of the window File v Agent w AgentGroup w Switch FrameRelay A list of configured frame relay agents appear in the list box below the Name and IP Address headings If this is a new NetScout Manager Plus installation the list box below the selection bar is blank since no agents are configured yet Select the Admin radio button from the application selection bar to the far right of the screen Applicable configurat
101. resetting statistics the unit unit default configuration options restoring communication with a misconfigured unit retrieving statistics Return Enter key revision software and hardware 5 4 RFC 1213 and 1573 RFC 1315 RFC 1406 RFC 1604 RFC 1659 RFC 1757 RFC 2021 RFC 2128 right arrow key RIP 1 2 8 9 3 91 5 46 RJ11 modem connector RJ48C network cable RLB RMON alarm and event defaults Specific Traps Traps user history collection router assist feature 1 4 3 11 5 63 independence 1 2 3 25 setting up to receive RIP Routing Information Protocol RIP 3 91 IP table table RTS control lead running reports RXD control lead 9128 A2 GB20 40 S Sampling SLV Inband and Interval saving configuration options screen area 2 5 function keys area how to navigate scrolling through valid selections Secondary Clock SNMP NMS options selecting a field from a menu Self Test Results messages Send All Ones on DSX 1 Failure and monitor test pattern Pattern serial number NAM Service A Profile ID SPID 3 44 D 7 service level management management SLM reports verification configuring statistics verifier SLV Session Access Level 3 78 4 6 4 8 ending starting Set DE setting Date amp Time system clock 3 9 setting up auto configuration DB
102. see Table 3 3 General System Options Interface Transmit timing is derived from this interface NOTE When Interface is configured the clock must be synchronized to the system clock source Network Initiated LLB Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Allows the initiation and termination of the line loopback LLB to be controlled by the receipt of LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands from the network Enable LLB is controlled by LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands Receiving a LLB Actuate command causes the FrameSaver unit to enter a line loopback provided an LLB can be performed in the FrameSaver unit s current state Receiving an LLB Release command terminates the LLB Disable The FrameSaver unit ignores the LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands NOTE When disabled the system is not in compliance with ANSI T1 403 or AT amp T TR 62411 3 34 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 4 Network Physical Interface Options 3 of 4 Network Initiated PLB Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Allows the initiation and termination of the payload loopback PLB to be controlled by the receipt of PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands from the network Display Conditions This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF Enable PLB is controlled by PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands Receiving a PLB Actuat
103. specific use to the modem port NOTE Ifthe Default IP Destination is set to Modem see Table 3 14 Node IP Options and you change Port Use to Terminal the Default IP Destination is forced to None Terminal The modem port is used for the asynchronous terminal connection Net Link The modem port is a network communications link to the IP network You cannot change Port Use to Net Link when the Modem PassThru feature is enabled When you try the Cannot change Port Use Modem PassThru is enabled message is displayed See Modem Operation in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance for more information about Modem PassThru operation Dial In Access Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Controls whether external devices can dial in to the system through the internal modem This allows dial in access by a remote terminal when Port Use is set to Terminal When Port Use is set to Net Link Dial ln Access must be set to Enable to allow an external NMS to dial in to the device Enable Dial in access is allowed Incoming calls are answered Disable Dial in access is not allowed Incoming calls are not answered You cannot disable Dial In Access when the Modem PassThru feature is enabled When you try the Cannot change Dial In Access when Modem PassThru is enabled message is displayed See Modem Operation in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance for more information about Modem PassThru operation
104. the DBM takes advantage of ISDN services for network backup and Calling Number Identification Service CNIS to provide backup security ISDN assures the integrity of calling party identifiers The DBM uses the calling party identifier to identify the calling unit and switches PVC connections as specified by the user No additional security is required When the ISDN DBM interface is enabled and Caller Identification Method is set to Proprietary the DBM queries the originating unit for its Local Phone Number to identify the calling unit If the returned number is in one of the unit s Inbound Calling IDs the call is accepted If not or if the queried unit does not respond within five seconds the unit drops the call See Caller Identification Method in Table 3 9 ISDN Link Profile Options for additional information Disabling ISDN Access B gt Procedure 9128 A2 GB20 40 To disable ISDN access 1 Select the ISDN Physical options Main Menu gt Configuration gt ISDN Physical 2 Set Interface Status to Disable 3 Save your change See Configuring the ISDN DBM Interface in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about ISDN BRI or PRI DBM configuration options November 2000 4 5 Security and Logins Controlling Telnet or FTP Access The FrameSaver unit provides several methods for limiting access via a Telnet or FTP session Telnet or FTP access can be on a standard management link or on a service provide
105. the Main Menu then select System and Test Status To provide a check point that coincides with the menu path shown at the top of the screen Always shown within parentheses so you can verify that you are referencing the correct table e g Path main config alarm To indicate multiple selection choices when more than one selection is available e g Performance Statistics Status Network Port 1 To indicate a hyperlink to additional information when viewing this manual online Click on the highlighted text 9128 A2 GB20 40 About the FrameSaver SLV This chapter includes the following m System Overview m FrameSaver SLV Features Additional FrameSaver SLV 9128 Features FrameSaver SLV 9128 II Only Features OpenLane SLM System m NetScout Manager Plus and NetScout Probes System Overview Our system solution consists of m FrameSaver SLV Service Level Verifier units m OpenLane SLM Service Level Management system NetScout Manager Plus application m Standalone NetScout Probes if needed This solution provides increased manageability monitoring and diagnostics so customers can identify problems more efficiently troubleshoot those problems faster and maximize their network to control costs It is also compatible with Concord Communication s Network Health software FrameSaver SLV 9126 9128 and 9128 II units operate with other FrameSaver devices and when teamed with internationally based
106. the default destination is connected to the modem port Only appears when the modem port Use option is set to Net Link COM Specifies that the default destination is connected to the COM port Only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link see Table 3 21 Communication Port Options Ethernet For the FrameSaver SLV 9128 II only specifies that the default destination is connected to the Ethernet port Only appears when the Ethernet port s Interface Status option is enabled When selected the Default Gateway Address must also be configured see Table 3 20 Ethernet Port Options PVCname Specifies a name for the management PVC Only appears when a management PVC name is defined for the node For example when the network is connected to a remote device located in the London office London can be specified as the PVC name which is the link between the local FrameSaver unit and the one located in London London would appear as one of the available selections TS Access Management Link Available Settings None PVCname Default Setting None Specifies a troubleshooting management link for the special needs of network service providers If the setting is changed from the management PVC name to None the Delete the Management PVC PVCname and the associated DLCI Record prompt appears If you select No The link designation is removed and the option is set to None Yes The link designation is removed and the opt
107. the put command file with the put command was entered User attempted to Enter the put command upload a program file instead of a get command from the unit you can only transfer files to the unit not from it See Upgrading System Software Please Wait Command takes longer Wait until message clears than 5 seconds Port Inactive The port is disabled or it No action is needed h FrameSaver SLV supports synchronous data 9128 II only when a DTE Loopback was started Resetting Device Please Wait Yes or y was entered in the Reset COM Port usage field of the System Paused menu No action needed Save Cancelled FrameSaver SLV 9128 II only Changes were made on the Easy Install screen but when it came to saving the changes the Esc key was pressed or No was entered in response to the Save Changes prompt No action is needed Test Active No higher priority System and Test Status messages exist and a test is running Contact service provider if test initiated by the network Wait until the test ends and message clears Cancel all tests from the Test screen Path main test Stop the test from the same screen the test was started from November 2000 5 15 Operation and Maintenance 5 16 Table 5 5 Device Messages 6 of 6 Message What It Indicates What To Do User Interface Already in Use Two Telnet sessions are already in
108. time slots on the selected interface appears Move the cursor to the next time slot that can be edited underlined Use the spacebar or type in the desired time slot to display its time slot assignment Repeat Step 3 until the synchronous data port is assigned to all desired time slots Save the configuration Clearing assignments sets all time slots to Unassgn unassigned Main Menu gt Configuration gt Time Slot Assignment Clear Assignments November 2000 3 59 Configuration Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface 3 60 Select Frame Relay from the interface s menu to display or change the Frame Relay options for an individual interface see Table 3 11 Main Menu gt Configuration Network Data Ports Frame Relay See Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System for additional information Table 3 11 Interface Frame Relay Options 1 of 3 LMI Protocol Possible Settings Initialize_From_Net1FR1 Initialize_From_Interface Auto_On_LMI_Fail Standard Annex A Annex D Default Setting For a user data port link Initialize_From_Interface For a network link Auto_On_LMI_Fail Specifies either the LMI protocol supported on the frame relay interface or the discovery source for the LMI protocol Initialize_From_Net1FR1 The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI protocol initially discovered on the primary Network frame relay link Neti1
109. treats frame relay element discovery as a WAN element type 2 Enter the IP Addresses of the SLV units to be located and the Community String Community Name in the FrameSaver unit The Community String is case sensitive 3 Select the Discover button The Discover dialog box closes and the Discovering dialog box opens showing the results of the discovery process A message indicates the number of elements discovered and the number of existing elements updated when the discovery process is complete Depending upon the number of units entered and the size of your network it could take anywhere from a few minutes to an hour or longer to discover all elements in the network See Discovering Elements in the Network Health User Guide for additional information and to learn how to schedule automatic element discovery updates to the database 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 9 3 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Configuring the Discovered Elements Network Health sets the speed for discovered elements when it polls the unit for the first time For a FrameSaver SLV unit the speed set would be the unit s CIR No additional configuration should be required However you should verify that all appropriate information has been retrieved NOTE If an SLV unit does not have CIR configured or if it is not configured correctly Network Health sets the unit s CIR to 0 kbps For this reason you should reconfigure the units C
110. unit Source destination is frame relay link 1 on Network 1 User data port Port 1 or Port 2 if a FrameSaver SLV 9128 9128 II a Virtual circuit is a management link that terminates in the unit where Name is the link name DLCI 16 to 1007 For standard DLCls Identifies an individual link connection embedded within a DLCI EDLCI 0 to 62 For multiplexed DLCls only Identifies an individual link connection embedded within a DLCI November 2000 5 31 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 10 PVC Connection Status 2 of 2 Field Status What It Indicates Status Identifies whether the physical interfaces LMls and DLCls are all enabled and active for this PVC connection Active 1 The PVC is currently active Inactive The PVC is inactive because Alarm conditions and network and SLV communication status indicate that data cannot be successfully passed The unit has disabled the interface or frame relay link due to internal operating conventions Activation of an alternate virtual circuit is not warranted that is no alarm condition on the primary destination link has been detected Disabled The PVC cannot be activated and is essentially disabled as a result of how the unit was configured Possible causes The physical interface at one or both ends of the PVC is are disabled The frame relay link on one or both ends of the PV
111. units at each end are mismatched If the message persists it means that 5 packets out of 25 are missing or are out of sequence Verify that the unit at the other end is configured to Send Pattern Correct unit configurations Correct the CIR setting so both units are configured the same Check the line s error rate the physical line quality Contact the service provider 6 16 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 ISDN DBM Problems Table 6 4 ISDN DBM Problems Troubleshooting Symptom Possible Cause Solutions Cannot connect to the remote unit Misconfiguration Verify that the link profiles are correct in both units both the area codes and phone or ID numbers see Setting Up ISDN Link Profiles in Chapter 3 Configuration For a BRI DBM verify that the SPIDs and local area codes and phone numbers are correct see Configuring the ISDN DBM Interface in Chapter 3 Configuration Verify that the unit at one end is configured to originate and the unit at the other end is configured to answer a call Verify that the ISDN interface is enabled Verify that Auto Backup is enabled and no time restrictions apply DBM LMI comes up but no data is transferred Misconfiguration Check that the DLCI numbers are correct and are the same at both ends See Table 5 12 Most Recent and Previous Last Cause Value Messages in Chapter 5 Operation and Maint
112. your network cable is securely attached at both ends Contact your network provider November 2000 6 13 Troubleshooting Viewing the Trap Event Log The Trap Event Log displays all traps stored in the SNMP trap event log ASCII trap strings used to describe trap events are provided in the tables contained in Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps see Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults See Trap Event Log in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance for a screen example and additional information Troubleshooting Tables The unit is designed to provide many years of trouble free service However if a problem occurs refer to the appropriate table in the following sections for possible solutions Device Problems Table 6 2 Device Problems 1 of 2 Symptom Possible Cause Solutions No power or the LEDs The power cord is not Check that the power cord is are not lit securely plugged into the securely attached at both ends wall receptacle to rear panel connection The wall receptacle has no Check the wall receptacle power power by plugging in some equipment that is known to be working Check the circuit breaker Verify that your site is not on an energy management program Power On Self Test The unit has detected an fails Only Alarm LED internal hardware failure is on after power on Reset the unit and try again Contact your service representative Return t
113. 0 5 63 Operation and Maintenance Manually Disconnecting the Modem If Trap Disconnect is disabled a modem connection remains until it is manually disconnected Select Disconnect Modem from the Control menu Main Menu gt Control Disconnect Modem Respond yes to the Are you sure prompt Verifying Modem Operation B gt Procedure If Port Use is set to Terminal dial in access 1 Dial the modem s phone number using a remote VT100 compatible asynchronous terminal or PC 2 Verify that the Main Menu appears B gt Procedure If Port Use is set to Net Link SNMP Telnet FTP and trap dial out 1 Dial the modem s phone number using a PC running PPP or SLIP link protocol 2 From the PC run an IP Ping test to the modem interface If your results using either method are unsuccessful make sure both ends of the modem cable are properly seated and secured Then verify that the modem was configured correctly see Setting Up the Modem in Chapter 3 Configuration 5 64 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance ISDN DBM Operation The following sections only apply to units with an ISDN DBM They include the following Forcing Backup Disruptive Placing a Call Nondisruptive Verifying ISDN Lines Verifying That Backup Can Take Place Forcing Backup Disruptive 9128 A2 GB20 40 Use this procedure to force backup when network maintenance is planned when equipment problems are reported
114. 0 compliant Change the DLCI Type for each network DLCI from Multiplexed to Standard turning off multiplexing November 2000 6 15 Troubleshooting Frame Relay PVC Problems Table 6 3 Frame Relay PVC Problems Symptom Possible Cause Solutions No receipt or transmission of data Cross Connection of the DLCls are configured incorrectly Verify the PVC connections and DLCls by checking the network discovered DLCls on the LMI Reported DLCls screen DLCI is inactive on the frame relay network m Verify that the DLCI s is active on the LMI Reported DLCls screen If the DLCI s is not active contact the service provider Verify the LMI Reported DLCI field on the Interface Status screen DTE is configured incorrectly Check the DTE s configuration LMI is not configured properly for the DTE or network Configure LMI characteristics to match those of the DTE or network LMI link is inactive Verify that the LMI link is active on the network the Status Msg Received counter on the Network Frame Relay Performance Statistics screen increments Losing Data Frame relay network is experiencing problems Run PVC Loopback and Pattern tests to isolate the problem then contact the service provider Out of Sync If Monitor Pattern was selected it means the test pattern generator and receiver have not yet synchronized CIR settings for the
115. 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the port which can be viewed or edited Clear Fills the IP address with zeros Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask associated with the IP address that is needed to access the Ethernet port 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Set the Ethernet port s subnet mask The range for each byte is 000 to 255 Clear Fills the subnet mask associated with the IP address with zeros November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 20 Ethernet Port Options 2 of 2 Default Gateway Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address for the port s default gateway It is used for packets that do not have a route 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the port which can be viewed or edited i e a router on the LAN Clear Fills the default gateway s IP address with zeros Proxy ARP Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the FrameSaver unit will use the Proxy ARP Address Resolution Protocol technique acting as the gateway to other FrameSaver devices in its management network when there is an ARP request for a device not on the Ethernet Enable Proxy ARP is ena
116. 02 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Menu Hierarchy MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Auto Configuration Frame Relay Discovery Mode Automatic Circuit Removal Control Automatic Backup Easy Install Configuration MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control Control Modem Call Directories Easy Install System Information Device Name System Name Location Contact Date Time System Information Administer Logins Change Operating Mode Select Software Release LMI Packet Capture Utility Enable Disable Modem PassThru to COM Disconnect Modem Reset Device Select Software Release LMI Packet Capture Utility e Current Release e Capture Interface Alternate Release Packet Capture Start Stop Switch amp Reset Status Packets in Buffer Display LMI Trace Log LMI Trace Log Administer Logins Login ID Password Access Level New MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control Easy Install lt Easy Install e Node IP Address and Subnet Mask e TS Access Create Dedicated Network Management Link Time Slot Assignment Screen Selected Network Physical Interface Options 00 16212b 02 November 2000 A 3 Menu Hierarchy FrameSaver SLV 9128 and 9128 Il Menu Hierarchy Status System and Test Status Self Test Result
117. 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 Click to Zoom Out 8 Click anywhere on this window to return to the previous window view see Step 7 of this procedure Refer to Launching User History and Understanding Custom History Display in Using Custom History of the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional information See Object ID Cross References Numeric Order in Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults to identify OID information being shown Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus Once the FrameSaver SLV agent has been added to NetScout Manager Plus select either the Traffic or Protocol radio button to monitor the newly added agent or one of its DLCls NOTE Only the Traffic and Protocol radio buttons on the application selection bar are supported for FrameSaver SLV agents The procedure below describes how to monitor an agent s traffic The procedure is the same for protocol monitoring but you may be prompted to select a Domain Group as well as an agent or DLCI 8 18 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices gt Procedure 1 Select the Traffic radio button to monitor the newly added agent or one of its DLCls 2 Highlight an agent in the agent list box so that its DLCls appear in the DLCI list box under the agent list box 3 If you want to monitor one of the agent s DLCls highlight the
118. 1 2 1 10 18 9 1 5 1 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults These alarms apply to the FrameSaver unit s frame relay link interfaces They are created during RMON initialization Table B 10 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults 1 of 2 Tag devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 20 1 Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Invalid Frames D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxllFrames 15 mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 18 1 Short Frames D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxShort 1S mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 6 1 Long Frames D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxLong T5imins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 7 1 Rx Discards D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxDiscards T5 mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 15 1 Tx Discards D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkTxDiscards ele mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2
119. 100 F 1 510 The T1 line interface cable is used in Canada as an interface between the FrameSaver unit s network connector and the T1 network interface The following shows pin assignments and the purpose of each RJ48C DA15P Plug Plug Unkeyed Receive Ring 1 Receive Ring Receive Tip 2 3 Receive Ti eceive Tip White Blue White Blue eceive Tip 3 Transmit Ring 4 Orange Orange 9 Transmit Ring Transmit Tip 5 AN Transmit Ti p White Orange White Orange e 6 7 98 16215 Ethernet Port Connector The following table provides the pin assignments for the FrameSaver unit s Ethernet port 8 position unkeyed modular jack Signal Direction Pin 10 100 BaseT Transmit Data TD To LAN Interface Out 1 10 100 BaseT Transmit Data TD To LAN Interface Out 2 10 100 BaseT Receive Data RD From LAN Interface In 3 10 100 BaseT Receive Data RD From LAN Interface In 6 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 C 13 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Modem Connector The dial modem interface connector that is integrated into the FrameSaver unit is an RJ11 6 position 4 contact unkeyed modular jack The following table shows pin assignments and the purpose of each Function Circuit Direction Pin Number Ring R To Local Loop 2 Tip T To Local Loop 3 ISDN DBM Connector The backup connection is through the DBM interface connector which is an
120. 13 aps RMON Speci c2 2 2 dapecreneeiadegsrenehecenraeeens B 16 Map daCi e idiy caneed e209 199400444 005 224 94 100 HOA B 17 RMON Alarm and Event Defaults 0060 rieniras B 18 Physical Interface Alarm Defaults 0000 e eee eens B 19 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults 000 00 eee eeee B 20 DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area 0202 0 cece eee B 22 DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area 0 0000c eee eee B 23 Object ID Cross References Numeric Order 0 00000 B 26 November 2000 Vii Contents C Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments E Heal Panels csccace dencasatedeeaes odasg adedse m COM Port Connector 00 0c cece eee COM Port to PC Cable Feature No 3100 F2 550 COM Port to Terminal Printer Cable Feature No 3100 F2 540 C 4 COM Port to Router Cables 0 000 c cece eee eee ee C 5 Gender Adapter Changer 0 0 ce eee eee eee eee eee C 8 LAN Adapter Converter and Cable 000 cee eee eee C 8 E DIE Pott Connector x siccicsscndiagndstiehs bane diadinw bd nae babar C 9 Standard V 35 Straight through Cable 200020e eae C 10 Standard V 35 Crossover Cable 00 cece eee C 10 MY TAS T CONECO eaer cae dope arses cnsn iv ied Reparation ev E meee es C 11 DSX 1 Adapter Feature No 9008 F1 560 C 11 T1 Network Cable Feature No 3100 F1 500 0005 C 12 T1 Mass Termi
121. 2 1 6 1 D Frames Dropped by D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 60 secs Rising 1 1 menor Tag devFrExtDiciNetDropFr emin OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 20 1 D 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number B 22 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 11 DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area 2 of 2 Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Maximum Latency A MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 60 secs Rising 0 0 1 min FrameSaver 9128 with SLV OS R1 3 Tag devFrExtLatencyMax OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 1 D 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area These alarms can be created during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is created They are put into the NetScout alarm area Table B 11 identifies alarm defaults that do not change and Table B 12 identifies alarm de
122. 20 0 2 ccccncredencacaceebeaced 9 5 e Generating Reports fora Group 0000 e cece eee eee eee 9 6 About Service Level Reports 200 0 ee eeeee eee eee 9 6 About At a Glance Reports 0000 e cece eee eee eens 9 6 About Trend Repons rsiscisisinsirinnirissiriinikrensiksiniad 9 7 Printed Repons 5 chine ed peda niea Shaka Seana Dacha oon DES 9 7 m Reports Applicable to SLV Devices 0 0 cece eee eee 9 7 vi November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Contents A Menu Hierarchy Ms MENUS aanak aaa ohana a Aea athe aed A 1 B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults 9128 A2 GB20 40 MIB SUPPO ireira dose iaa a a E a a iea eea e B 2 Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps ssssssaasuaaaaaan eea B 2 System GROUP MID 2 rareo 4 ahranbacnd tue d n aai B 3 FrameSaver Unit s sysDescr system 1 usuauuaneuaa aaa B 3 FrameSaver Unit s sysObjectID system 2 00005 B 3 Interfaces Group MID 2 vccctwanctagGdecindaiestebiudateshodiedad B 3 Paradyne Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable B 3 NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable B 6 Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps 00200eeee eee B 8 Trap WanmStatt 2 23 40 stccietrtesdaiemieinegeienioived e i B 9 Trap authenticationFailure 2 0 20 0 ccc eens B 9 Traps linkUp ancdsinkKDOwi 5occac acca saseud dioisaseadianadacs B 10 Traps GHterprise SpeCinG ncosieussacarhsiahwseebasieaasedanade B
123. 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 14 1 Rx Total Errors D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 15 mins in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained B 20 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 10 Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults 2 of 2 Tag devFrExtLinkTotal LMIErrs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Tx Total Errors D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs Le mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 19 1 Rx Overruns D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxOverruns 1Smins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 28 1 Tx Underruns D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 15 mins Tag devFrExtLinkTx Underruns OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 29 1 Rx Non octet Aligns D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRx 13mins NonOctet OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 Rx CRC Errors D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 Tag devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr S mins OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 Total LMI Errors D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs R
124. 28 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 EASY INSTALL Node IP Address 000 000 000 000 Clear Node Subnet Mask 000 000 000 000 Clear TS Access DLCI 980 Create a Dedicated Network Management Link Ethernet Port Options Screen Time Slot Assignment Screen Network 1 Line Framing Format Network 1 Line Build Out LBO Network 1 Line Coding Format Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save The Ethernet Port Options Screen only applies to the Model 9128 II For the Model 9126 or 9128 DSO Base Rate Kbps appears after the Network 1 Line Coding Format option Once the unit is installed and minimal configuration is completed using the Easy Install feature the NOC can complete configuration of the unit and verify the setup To remotely access the FrameSaver unit use the Dedicated Network Management Link that was created during installation using the Node IP Address that was entered for the unit See the FrameSaver SLV 9126 1 Slot Unit Installation Instructions the FrameSaver SLV 9128 9128 I 1 Slot Unit Installation Instructions or the FrameSaver SLV 9128 9128 II Network Access Module NAM Installation Instructions for additional information and installation procedures See Product Related Documents in About This Guide for the document number 3 8 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP Using the system s standard Routing Information Proto
125. 3 Configuration NOTE Use your NMS application to FTP and view transferred statistics and packet data the data files are not in user readable format LMI packet capture data can also be viewed via the LMI Trace Log see Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface in Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for additional information B gt Procedure To retrieve data 1 Initiate an FTP session to the device from which SLV statistics or packet data will be retrieved Type bin to enter binary transfer mode Type hash to enter hash mode if you want to monitor the progress of the upgrade provided this function is supported by your equipment Type cd data to change to the data directory If retrieving Then SLV statistics Perform a get of the uhbcfull dat file File Transfer Complete Transfer was successful m File Transfer Failed Transfer was not successful Try again or end the session LMI packet capture data 1 Stop the LMI Packet Capture Utility Main Menu gt Control gt LMI Packet Capture Utility LMI packet capture data is not available readable when the LMI Packet Capture Utility is Active 2 Perform a get of the Imitrace syc file One of the following will display for the file File Transfer Complete File Transfer Failed Permission Denied The LMI Packet Capture Utility was not readable Stop the LMI Packet Capture Utility and try again 3 Clo
126. 3 26 3 61 frame relay statistics Heartbeat T1 3 27 3 62 Inbound Heartbeat T2 3 27 3 62 N4 Measurement Period T3 3 27 3 62 OK control lead packet utility Parameters pass through Protocol Status eer 13 27 3 61 trace log 6 6 uploading packet capture data local external DTE loopback locked out 4 3 4 12 6 4 LOF LED 5 9 Log LMI Trace 6 6 Trap Event logging in logging out Login creating modifying and deleting Required 3 78 B 89 B 93 H 3 4 6 4 7 logins IN 6 November 2000 Loopback Data Channel linkDown trap Loss of Signal linkDown trap M MAC address Main Menu screen maintenance making input selections Management and Communication options General SNMP options OpenLane OpenLane system PVCs 3 72 total number dedicated SNMP 3 76 troubleshooting link 3 70 6 5 mass termination cable Max Port Rate Maximum Link Rate MDM connector menu branches Configuration main path selecting from structure messages Cause Values Device 5 11 Health and Status Self Test Results system System and Test Status Test Status DBM 9128 A2 GB20 40 MFR MIB access support Mode changing Operating 3 23 Operating 6 37 a Test 5 8 model aea modem connector C 14 Health and S
127. 8 A2 GB20 40 The following frame relay reports support FrameSaver SLV units Exception Reports Provide summary and detail information that identifies DLCls with the highest incidence of errors high bandwidth utilization and trends These reports identify those DLCls that have exceeded a specified number of accumulated exception points It is a good idea to run this report daily so that DLCls having the most problems can be attended to first DLCls contained on this report need immediate attention If a DLCI suddenly shows up on these reports check whether any new equipment has been added to the network and whether it is properly configured If its configuration is correct the equipment could be faulty Summary Reports Provide summary information for the network volume and error leaders and DLCI traffic Network Summary Report Provides an overall view of the network Use this report for planning and to predict when a DLCI might run into problems Leaders Summary Report Identifies DLCls having the highest volume and errors High traffic volume may be increasing latency and the high Health Index rating indicates problems It is a good idea to run these reports daily so a norm can be established The same DLCls should appear Use this chart and table to alert you to possible problems Problems to look for include a normally high volume DLCI is dropped from the list a new DLCI appears on the list check Eleme
128. 82 Node 3 70 IP addressing limiting SNMP access 4 11 9128 A2 GB20 40 Index ISDN Active troubleshooting problems 6 17 controlling access DBM connector DBM operation Link Profile Invalid 5 21 6 8 Network Failed 5 21 6 8 physical options PRI DBM setting up link profiles updating software verifying line K keyboard keys keys keyboard screen function 2 5 2 7 L Lamp Test LAN adapter and cable last reset latency round trip setting threshold LEDs 6 2 6 14 ee 5 5 9126 faceplate and screen 9128 faceplate and screen and control leads displaying descriptions limiting async terminal access dial in access FTP access SNMP access through IP addresses Telnet access Line Build Out LBO 3 34 3 46 13 33 3 42 Status Line Loopback 6 31 6 33 November 2000 IN 5 Index Link Destination 3 67 3 68 frame relay statistics maximum ISDN rate Name Operating Mode 5 21 6 8 Profile Disabled Protocol 3 92 3 94 setting up ISDN profiles 3 48 T raps 3 Traps Interfaces troubleshooting management TS Management 377 linkUp and linkDown events traps 6 27 6 31 6 33 and PVC availability Behavior 3 25 3 26 Clearing Event N3 3 27 3 61 configuring frame relay and Down 5 21 6 9 Error Event N2
129. Available Available Available Available Available Available Available N09 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 Available Available FrameRlyl FrameRly1 FrameRlyl FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 N17 N18 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save PgDn PgUp ClearAll DSXAssign Value Meaning Time Slot Specifies whether the time slots used for frame relay traffic should Discovery be discovered from the network interface upon detection of an LMI failure This option allows additional time slots to be added without manually reconfiguring the device Ntt This field represents time slot tt of the selected network interface Assigned The time slot is already assigned to something other than frame relay so it is unavailable Assigned time slots cannot be modified from this screen Available The time slot is currently unassigned FrameRly1 The time slot is assigned to frame relay service link 1 For easy movement between screens select the DSXAssign function key to go directly to the DSX 1 to Network Assignments screen 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 51 Configuration Time Slot Assignment Rule Valid network time slots are either Available or contain a Frame Relay Link 1 assignment gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configur
130. Available generating the cause but it is not available at this time Call Awarded and 7 An incoming call is being No action is needed Being Delivered in connected to an already Est Chnl 7 established channel that is used for similar calls Call Rejected 21 Equipment sending the No action is needed cause does not want to receive the call at this time Call Terminated by 130 Remote DBM rejected or 1 Retry the call Remote End terminated the call 2 Verify that the remote DBM s link profile is correct Call With 86 Network has received a call No action is needed Requested Call ID resume request but the call Has Been Cleared had been cleared after it was suspended Channel Type Not 66 Device sending this cause Arrange for the desired Implemented does not support the capability requested channel type Channel 6 Channel identified for the Arrange for the desired Unacceptable call is not acceptable to the capability receiving device November 2000 5 39 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 12 Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages 2 of 6 Cause Message No What It Indicates What To Do Destination Out of 27 Destination interface Verify that the remote Order specified is not functioning correctly so the signalling message could not be delivered e g physical or data link layer failure at the remote end user equipment is offline DBM s link profile is correct Faci
131. Avg RdTrip Latency but storing the maximum value of latency over the previous 15 minute interval Unknown appears if communication with the far end device over the last 15 minutes has not been successful 1 Only appears for FrameSaver units when the SLV Delivery Ratio option is enabled 5 50 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance The statistics collected by the unit depend upon the device at the far end of the connection If the far end device is a FrameSaver SLV unit frame relay latency and FDR DDR performance statistics are collected The Frame Relay Delivery Ratio is the number of delivered frames offered frames the Data Delivery Ratio is the number of delivered octets offered octets If the far end device is a non FrameSaver device or a FrameSaver 9120 or 9620 only frame relay statistics are collected DLCI Performance Statistics 9128 A2 GB20 40 These statistics appear when DLCI is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics gt DLCI Table 5 15 DLCI Performance Statistics 1 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates DLCI Up Since 1 Date and time that the DLCI was last declared Active after a period of inactivity Down is displayed if the DLCI is inactive If the DLCI was Down this is the time that the DLCI recovered If the DLCI was never Down this is the first time the unit discovered that the DLCI was active i
132. Base Rate Mode LED 5 8 statistics troubleshooting PVC problems frames FTP 1 5 5 68 file transfers initiating a session limiting access 4 6 4 7 Login Required Max Transfer Rate kbps Session function keys 2 7 G Gateway 5 45 Gateway Address Default gender adapter changer General options 3 30 SNMP management options 3 76 Traps 3 82 generating reports glossary grouping elements for reports 9128 A2 GB20 40 H hardware revision DBM NAM HDLC errors frame relay statistics Health and Status messages history adding files installing files monitoring DLCI hyperlink to more information highlighted text Hop 5 46 I ICMP IP routing table type Identity displaying 5 3 Ignore Control Leads Inactivity Timeout 3 79 B 90 3 93 Inbound Calling ID Initial Route Destination installation installation and setup Network Health installing Network Health user history files interface DBM status 5 35 status user Interface Status Ethernet Network Internal Transmit Clock Inv SPID Local Number Call ID Inverse ARP Invert Transmit and Received Data Invert Transmit Clock IP Address 3 95 default destination 3 71 node information Ping test Routing Table 1 6 5 45 Validation NMS IP Address 3 73 8 91 3 94 Ethernet port NMS number 3 80 3
133. C 10 A standard V 35 crossover cable with a 34 pin plug type connector on each end of the cable can be used to connect the FrameSaver unit s DTE port to another DCE The following illustration provides the pin assignments for the V 35 crossover cable O at fo w an it 3 6 Uv 5 a TXDA P2 Pin TXD B RXD A X Xx RXD B TXC A TXC B gt RXC A RXC B ETXC A ETXC B FRM GND SIG GND RTS CD DTR DSR H mzrngowreEcxKx lt enexiawvonv LL November 2000 gt rFrmonwr lt xcs lt PNvMH 98 16165a 9128 A2 GB20 40 DSX 1 Connector Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments The following table shows the signals and pin assignments for the 8 position modular DSX 1 interface on the FrameSaver unit The DSX 1 Adapter is required for this interface Function Circuit Direction Pin Number Receive Ring R1 From DTE 1 Receive Tip Ti From DTE 2 Shield 3 Transmit Ring R To DTE 4 Transmit Tip T To DTE 5 Shield 6 DSX 1 Adapter Feature No 9008 F 1 560 The DSX 1 adapter cable is used as an interface between the FrameSaver unit s DSX 1 connector and the DTE s DB15 interface The following shows pin assignments and the purpose of each 8 Position
134. C is are disabled Invalid Some portion of the PVC connection is not fully configured 1 For the circuit to be active both Source and Destination Statuses must be Active 5 32 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance Time Slot Assignment Status Time slot assignments are made using the Time Slot Assignment configuration option See Assigning Time Slots Cross Connections in Chapter 3 Configuration for making time slot assignments Use the Timeslot Assignment Status screen to display time slot assignments for the network channels and the DSX 1 channels Displaying Network Time Slot Assignments Use the Network Timeslot Assignment Status screen to display DSO assignments for each DSO on the network interface Main Menu gt Status gt Timeslot Assignment Status gt Network The Network Timeslot Assignment Status screen displays 24 two field entries in three rows Together each two field entry defines the assignment for one network interface time slot The top field represents the timeslot of the network interface The bottom field represents the cross connect status of the associated top field network time slot Network Timeslot Assignment Status Screen Example main status timeslot net_display 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 NETWORK 1 TIMESLOT ASSIGNMENT STATUS N01 N02 N03 N04 NOS NO6 NO7 NO8 D5 1 01r D5 1 02r D5 1 03r s1P01 S1P01 S1P01 S1P01 S1P01 N09 N10 N11 N12 N13
135. Clear Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface to use for this management PVC The interface selected must have at least one DLCI or DLC with EDLCI defined which is not part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC Net1 FR1 Specifies the network interface as the source link for the connection Port n Specifies the frame relay link on the user data port as the destination link for the connection ISDN Link Name For units with ISDN backup capability specifies the ISDN link on the DBM to be used in the connection This can be any nonnull link name configured on an ISDN frame relay link on an installed DBM Clear Clears the link and the DLCI field and suppresses the EDLCI field if the DLCI was multiplexed Primary DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the DLCI number used for the management PVC after the frame relay interface is selected The DLCI must be defined for the link i e has a DLCI record and it must not be part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconfigured for the DLCI NOTES DLCI cannot be entered if the Link field is blank Clearing the Link also clears the DLCI When an ISDN DBM is installed and the DLCI assigned to the PVC is in a Backup Group see Table 3 12 DLCI Record Options
136. Control Leads Screen for a FrameSaver SLV 9126 main status leds 9126 Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 DISPLAY LEDS amp Control Leads T1 FR NAM NETWORK 1 DSxX 1 Sig Sig OOF OOF Alm Alm LMI OK ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh Refresh the screen to view control lead transitions LED and control lead descriptions are in the sections that follow November 2000 5 5 Operation and Maintenance FrameSaver SLV 9128 9128 II LEDs and Control Leads The FrameSaver SLV 9128 faceplate includes 12 LEDs light emitting diodes that provide status on the FrameSaver unit its network interface DSX PRI and DTE interface The faceplate below is for the Model 9128 without an Ethernet port 9128 SELLESSE GF SPL FrameSaver SLV CEE 01010 OOO O O NETWORK DSX PRI PORT 00 16180 01 The FrameSaver SLV 9128 II with an Ethernet port faceplate is shown below 9128 FrameSaver SLV CEE O 00 16833 To access the Display LEDs and Control Leads screen Main Menu gt Status gt Display LEDs and Control Leads The following example shows the screen for a FrameSaver SLV 9128 II with an ISDN PRI DBM installed FR Mode only appears for a FrameSaver SLV 9128 II Display LEDs amp Control Leads Screen for a FrameSaver SLV 9128 Il main status leds 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 DISPLAY LEDS amp Control Leads T1 FR NAM NETWORK 1 DSx 1 Sig Sig OOF OOF Alm Alm LMI OK ISDN PR
137. DLCI the PVC connection and a management PVC which is multiplexed with user data DLCls LMI Protocol Discovery For automatic configuration of the protocol being used by the network DLCI Deletion For automatic removal of configuration of unused DLCls from the unit s configuration and statistical databases CIR Determination For automatic recalculation of the committed rate measurement interval Tc and excess burst size Be when a DLCl s CIR changes Excess burst size Be and committed burst size Bc are recalculated when Committed Burst Size Bc Bits is set to CIR The committed rate measurement interval Tc is recalculated when Committed Burst Size Bc Bits is set to Other Maximum Number of PVCs and Management PVCs Supported FrameSaver FrameSaver SLV Feature SLV 9126 9128 9128 II Through Connections PVCs 16 120 Dedicated Management PVCs 2 2 Multiplexed Management PVCs Provides a method of multiplexing management data with customer data transparently over a single PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit when FrameSaver devices are at each end of the circuit This feature also makes it possible to run nondisruptive PVC tests Multiplexed Customer PVCs Provides a method of multiplexing customer management data and user data with network management data transparently over a single PVC when FrameSaver devices are at each end of the circuit Extensive Testing Capability Pro
138. DLCI to be monitored 4 Click on an applicable icon The selected graphical report should open Traffic icons that would be of particular interest are Traffic Monitor and Domain History In the example below the Domain History icon was selected which is actually a real time report NetScout RMON History Grenada43 File View Format Refresh Applications NetScout RMON History Grenada43 Utilizati 11 17 02 11 28 06 11 34 15 11 40 24 Mon Sep 14 NOTE If Size Distribution is the selected View and distribution size has been changed via OpenLane the values shown for the distribution will not be accurate Only default size distributions are tracked 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 8 19 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Statistical Windows Supported 8 20 Not all icons that appear on the NetScout Manager Plus main window are supported for FrameSaver units For example All Convs conversations and TopNConv icons appear when the Protocol radio button is selected but conversations are not supported Of the icons that appear on the NetScout Manager Plus main window the following are supported Traffic Statistics Protocol Statistics Traffic Monitor Protocol Monitor Segment Zoom Protocol Zoom Segment Details 1 TopNTalkers Domain History All Talkers 1 Size distribution statistics are provided for a DLCI only not a link If a link is selected all size
139. DSX 1 Other IP Ping Lamp Test Abort All Tests Physical Tests Local Loopbacks Remote Loopbacks Send Monitor Patterm Tests Performance Statistics e Service Level Verification e DLCI Frame Relay ESF Line e DBM Call e Clear All Statistics IP Routing Table Destination Mask e Gateway Hop Type e Interface e TTL MAIN MENU Status Configuration Load Test Configuration Configuration Edit Display from System Frame Relay and LMI Service Level Verification General A 2 System Network DSX 1 Data Ports ISDN Time Slot Assignment PVC Connections Auto Configuration Control Easy Install Management and Communication Auto Backup Criteria ISDN Physical Link Profiles DLCI Records Network and Data Ports Physical Frame Relay e DLC Records Time Slot Assignment Frame Relay Network Assignments e DSX 1 to Network Assignments Management and Communication Options Node IP Management PVCs General SNMP Management Telnet and FTP Session Clear Assignments SNMP NMS Security SNMP Traps e Communication Port Modem Port November 2000 Management PVC Entry PVC Connection Table Source Link DLCI EDLCI Primary Destination Link DLCI EDLC Alternate Destination Link DLCI EDLC New or Modify New or Modify PVC Connection Entry 00 16212a
140. DSX 1 interfaces Ports Generates these trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on a user data port only DBM For units with an ISDN DBM installed generates these trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on the DBM only All Generates these trap messages for linkUp and enterpriseSpecific events on all interfaces except for the COM port or modem port that are applicable to the FrameSaver model November 2000 3 83 Configuration Table 3 19 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 4 of 5 DLCI Traps on Interfaces Possible Settings Network Ports DBM All None Default Setting All Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp and linkDown trap messages for individual DLCls These traps are only supported on the frame relay interfaces Network Generates these trap messages on DLCls for the network interface only Ports Generates these trap messages for DLCls on a user data port only DBM For units with an ISDN DBM installed generates trap messages on DLCls for the DBM only All Generates these trap messages on all frame relay interfaces None No DLCI trap messages are generated RMON Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether remote monitoring traps are sent to the currently configured trap manager s RMON traps are typically sent as a result of the Alarms and Events Groups of RM
141. DiciTxFrOutCIR 1 min configured OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 1 D Tx CIR Utilization D MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs None Must be 0 RFC 2115 1 min configured Tag frCircuitSentOctets OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained in the MIB A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number B 24 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 13 Dynamic DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area Tag frCircuitSentOctets OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1D Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Rx DLCI Link D MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs Rising 70 of link 65 of link Utilization RFC 2115 1 min capability capability Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Tx DLCI Link D MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs Rising 70 of link 65 of link Utilization RFC 2115 1 min capability capability in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number A Absolute Indicates that the exact value for the item is contained in the MIB 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previou
142. E DTE calculated l l value 1 November 2000 B 7 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps This section describes the FrameSaver unit s compliance with SNMP format standards and with its special operational trap features All traps have an associated string to help you decipher the meaning of the trap Strings associated with an interface with a substring containing ifString have the following format DLCI diciNumber circuitld of ifName frame relay link linkName dlciNumber is the DLCI number DLCI dlciNumber circuitld only appears when a DLCI is associated with the trap circuitld is the name given to the circuit It can be an empty string or a 1 64 byte string within quotes e g Chicago to New York and only appears when a DLCI with circuitID is associated with the trap linkName is the name given to the link Frame relay linkName only appears when a frame relay link has been named and is associated with the trap ifName is the string returned for the SNMP ifName variable Examples DLCI 100 Chicago to New York of Network T1 frame relay link In this example a DLCI and a frame relay link are associated with the trap Typically the circuitld is a coded string encoded by the network service provider The following shows an example DLCI 100 cc0402 dec0704 RG21 of Network T1 frame relay link T
143. EER if more than 1 535 CRC6 errors are detected in a 10 second period Clears when fewer than 1 536 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 5 Declares an EER if more than 921 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 922 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 6 Declares an EER if more than 92 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 1075 or 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 93 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 7 Declares an EER if more than 9 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 1076 or 1075 or 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 10 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 8 Declares an EER if more than 41 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals or a 1077 1076 1075 10 4 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 42 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 9 Declares an EER if more than 4 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals or a 1078 10 7 10 76 10 5 or 10 4 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 5 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period Circuit Identifier Possible Settings ASCII Text Entry Clear Default Setting blank Identifies the transmission vendor s circuit information to facilitate troubleshooting ASCII Text Entry Assigns a name to i
144. Enable Determines whether the data port is being used and can be configured Enable The port is active and can be used to transmit and receive data Disable The port is not active When the port is disabled the following will occur No alarms or traps configured for the port will be generated LED for the port will be held in an Off state No The operation is cancelled Pressing either the Esc or Ctrl a key also acts as a No Yes Port status is disabled Port Use Possible Settings Frame Relay Synchronous Data Default Setting Frame Relay when the port supports frame relay Synchronous Data when the port only supports synchronous data Determines how the data port will be used Display Conditions This option only appears for user data on Port 2 Frame Relay The port is configured for frame relay traffic Frame relay links DLCis and PVC connections can be configured on this port Synchronous Data The port is configured for standard TDM data and can be cross connected to a time slot on a T1 interface No alarms or traps configured for the port will be generated The LED for the port will be held in an Off state Existing cross connect assignments associated with the port are cleared November 2000 3 37 Configuration Table 3 5 Data Port Physical Interface Options 2 of 5 Max Port Rate Kbps Possible Settings 1536 2048 Default Setting 1536
145. FR1 LMI Protocol is set to None internally but once a protocol has become active or is set on the primary Network link the protocol will be set to the same value on this link Standard Annex A or Annex D The protocol will not be updated based on changes to Net1FR1 after being set initially Display Conditions This option value only appears for a user data port Initialize_From_Interface The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached Network line or DTE device Once a protocol has become active the protocol will be set to the protocol discovered Standard Annex A or Annex D on the frame relay link The protocol will not be updated after being initially discovered Frame relay links on user data ports discover the LMI protocol from an attached device via LMI status polls Frame relay links on the network interface discover LMI protocol by sending polls to an attached Network line and listening for correct poll response messages Auto_On_LMI_Fail The LMI type supported on this frame relay link will be configured to match the LMI protocol discovered from the attached Network line or the DTE device whenever an LMI Link Down failure occurs This option is available for frame relay links on the Port and network interfaces Frame relay links on user data ports discover the LMI protocol from LMI status polls by attached DTE devices Frame relay links on the ne
146. File Transfer Failed The file is not valid for this FrameSaver unit Invalid file A different Rxxxxxx ocd file will need to be downloaded Repeat the step or end the FTP session NOTE During the download a series of hash marks appear When the hash marks stop appearing there is a pause of about 30 seconds before the nam ocd File Transfer Complete message appears Please be patient Do not exit from FTP at this time See Changing Software to activate the newly downloaded software 5 70 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance Upgrading ISDN BRI DBM Software 9128 A2 GB20 40 A separate download to update PRI DBM functionality is not necessary a PRI upgrade is incorporated in the unit s program code However if the FrameSaver unit has a BRI DBM the program code must be upgraded separately To upgrade a FrameSaver unit s BRI DBM program code you must transfer the dbmprog ocd file in the Dial Backup Module directory using the put command gt Procedure To perform a BRI DBM upgrade 1 2 3 Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are upgrading Type bin to enter binary transfer mode Type cd dbm to change to the Dial Backup Module directory NOTE If the FrameSaver unit is not equipped with a DBM or the DBM does not contain any downloadable software the message dbm no such file or directory appears Perform a put of Rxxxxxx ocd xxxxxx being the software relea
147. FrameSaver devices in multinational applications provide a complete global frame relay management solution 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 1 1 About the FrameSaver SLV FrameSaver SLV Features FrameSaver SLV units provide the following features Easy Installation Provides a straight forward installation menu that requires minimal configuration to get the unit up and running quickly and to set up remote configuration and management via Telnet access from the NOC Network Operations Center For a FrameSaver SLV 9128 Il see Easy Installation in FrameSaver SLV 9128 I Only Features for additional information Frame Relay Aware Management Supports diagnostic and network management features over the frame relay network using the Annex A Annex D and Standard UNI User Network Interface LMI management protocol The unit s frame relay capability also supports Inband management channels over the frame relay network using dedicated PVCs Unique nondisruptive diagnostics CIR monitoring on a PVC basis Multiple PVCs on an interface Multiplexing management PVCs with user data PVCs Multiplexing multiple PVCs going to the same location onto a single network PVC TruePut Technology Using Frame Delivery Ratios FDR and Data Delivery Ratios DDR throughput within and above CIR as well as between CIR and EIR and above EIR can be measured precisely eliminating inaccuracies due to averaging
148. Health for FrameSaver Devices Grouping Elements for Reports 9128 A2 GB20 40 Once the discovery process is completed and required changes are made the newly discovered elements DLCls should be organized into a group for Health reporting Grouping makes for easier monitoring and management of similar node types e g all SLV elements Once grouped you can then run reports on all DLCls in the network as well as reports on individual DLCls B gt Procedure To group elements 1 From the console select Edit Groups from the Reports menu The Add Groups dialog box opens Enter a name in the Group Name field Up to 64 characters can be entered A through Z a through z 0 through 9 dashes periods and underscores _ can be used No spaces can be included and the word All cannot be used Select the WAN radio button above the Available Elements list Highlight all the DLCls listed on the Available Elements list or select specific DLCls then select the left arrow button The highlighted DLCls move from the Available Elements list to the Group Members list Select the OK button when all appropriate DLCIs have been moved to the Group Members list The Add Groups dialog box closes and the newly created group appears on the Groups dialog box See Managing Groups and Group Lists in the Network Health Reports Guide for additional information That chapter also tells you how to customize reports November 2000 9 5
149. I Use 0 to identify the primary EDLCI Use 1 62 to identify secondary EDLCls Use the primary EDLCI for customer data which has a higher utilization rate than management data with slightly less line overhead Display Conditions This option does not appear unless ISDN backup is available and the DLCI field does not reference a multiplexed DLCI NOTE Clearing the DLCI or changing it to a standard DLCI suppresses the EDLC field 0 62 Specifies the EDLC number inclusive Configuring General SNMP Management Select General SNMP Management to add change or delete the information needed to allow the FrameSaver unit to be managed as an SNMP agent by the NMS supporting the SNMP protocols see Table 3 16 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management You must have Level 1 access to display or configure these options Table 3 16 General SNMP Management Options 1 of 2 SNMP Management Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the FrameSaver unit can be managed as an SNMP agent by an SNMP compatible NMS Enable Can be managed as an SNMP agent Disable Cannot be managed as an SNMP agent The FrameSaver unit will not respond to SNMP messages nor send SNMP traps Community Name 1 Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Public in ASCII text field Specifies the first of two names
150. I Sig OOF ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh Refresh the screen to view control lead transitions LED and control lead descriptions are in the sections that follow 5 6 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 LED Descriptions 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 1 identifies the alarms that cause the Alarm LED to light See Table 5 2 for network DSX 1 or PRI interface LED and Table 5 3 for user data port interface LED information Table 5 1 General Status LEDs 1 of 2 Label Indication Color What It Means OK 1 Power and Green ON FrameSaver unit has power and it is Operational operational Status OFF FrameSaver unit is in a power on self test or there is a failure ALM Operational Red ON FrameSaver unit has just been reset Alarm Fail or an error or fault has been detected Error fault alarm conditions Alarm Indication Signal AIS CTS Down DBM BRI Card Failure DBM Download Failed DLCI Down DTR Down Ethernet Link Down Exceeded Error Rate EER Internal Modem Failed ISDN Network Failed LMI Down Loss of Signal LOS Network Communication Link Down Out of Frame OOF Power Supply Fan Failure Primary or Secondary Clock Failed Self Test Failed SLV Latency Exceeded SLV Timeout Suboptimal Link Rate Two Level 1 Users Accessing Device Yellow Alarm Signal 1 When an ISDN BRI DBM is installed if the OK LED comes on then goes off during
151. II 5 26 2000 23 32 DBM INTERFACE STATUS Line Status Call Rejected HQ Site Disabled Link Colorado Multilink Constituent Link Colorado 1 Link Operating Mode Active Call Status Connected Most Recent Cause Value Call Awarded and Being Delivered In Est Chnl 7 Previous Cause Value 1 None 2 None 3 None 4 None Maximum Link Rate Kbps 64K Negotiated Rate Kbps 64K ISDN Channel Bl Configured Remote Call ID 8135302000 Ctrl a to access these functions Refresh ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit NextLink PrevLink ConstLinkStatus Select the NextLink and PrevLink function keys to move forward or backward through the frame relay links that can be selected If the selected frame relay link is a multilink aggregate link select the ConstLinkStatus function key to see the status for selected constituent links For a multilink aggregate link Multilink Constituent Link appears under Link so a specific constituent link can be selected Otherwise the line is blank In addition the Most Recent Cause Value Previous Cause Values and Remote Call ID do not appear for a multilink aggregate frame relay link November 2000 5 35 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 11 DBM Interface Status 1 of 3 Field Status What It Indicates Line Status The overall status of the ISDN line Active The ISDN line is active and no error conditions exist Disabled The ISDN interface has been disabled Main Menu gt
152. IR before Network Health polls it If 0 kbps is the speed setting you will need to edit the unit s CIR from Network Health Additional information can be edited as well See Discovering Elements in the Network Health User Guide for additional information gt Procedure To change the CIR for FrameSaver SLV unit elements from Network Health 1 Select the Edit Before Saving button at the bottom of the Discovering dialog box once the discovery process is completed The Poller Configuration window opens Double click on the first element discovered The Modify Element dialog box opens In the Speed box select the Override radio button and enter the CIR for the unit in the text box Letters k and m can be used as shortcuts e g enter 56 k for 56 kilobits per second or 16 m for 16 Mbits per second Apply your changes Select the Apply Next button to save your change and bring up the next element to be edited Continue until all newly discovered frame relay elements have been modified before selecting the OK button Select the the OK button The Modify Element dialog box closes Select the OK button at the bottom of the Poller Configuration window The modified elements are saved to the database and the units are polled Allow Network Health to continue polling for about a half an hour to allow time for data to be gathered before running any reports 9 4 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Setting Up Network
153. LCI in the group is operational Backup is terminated as soon as one DLCI in the group becomes operational See Table 3 12 DLC Record Options for configuration information 3 22 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration PVC Backup Over the Network Interface Generally backup can be performed on the network interface s frame relay link using a backup PVC as well on an ISDN link the unit does not have to have the ISDN DBM feature In this case create a DLCI Record on the network interface that will be used for backup then modify the PVC Connections or Management PVCs to add the alternate destination Setting Up Back to Back Operation Using this special feature you can set up two FrameSaver units that are connected back to back without frame relay switches between them as ina test bench setup using a crossover cable Changing Operating Mode When setting up back to back operation One unit must be configured for Standard operation which is the setting for normal operation The other unit must be configured for Back to Back operation so it presents the network side of the UNI user network interface Only one of the units will have its operating mode changed B gt Procedure To set up back to back operation 1 On the unit to be configured for Back to Back operation manually configure DLCls DLCls should be configured before connecting the two units 2 Access the Change Operating Mode screen Main
154. LMI is declared down and no further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface Enable Interchange circuit CA ITU 105 RTS is monitored to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE Disable RTS is not monitored RTS is assumed to be asserted and data is being transmitted regardless of the state of the lead Monitor DTR Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the state of the DTE Ready DTR circuit on the user data port will be used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE When this condition is detected an alarm is generated LMI is declared down and no further transfer of frame relay data can occur on this interface Enable Interchange circuit CD ITU 108 1 2 DTR is monitored to determine whether data should be transmitted to the DTE Disable DTR is not monitored DTR is assumed to be asserted and data is being transmitted regardless of the state of the lead November 2000 3 39 Configuration Table 3 5 Data Port Physical Interface Options 4 of 5 Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks Possible Settings When Port 1 or Port Use is set to Frame Relay Disable Local When Port 2 or Port Use is set to Synchronous Data Disable DTPLB DCLB Both Default Setting Disable Possible Settings Local Disable Default Setting Disable When Port 1 or Port Use is set to Frame Rel
155. M Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the DCE side RMON IN OUT Network T1 of FR SERVICE T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame Relay 3 Frame relay logical For the user side 3 Sync Data link on Synchronous RMON IN OUT Synchronous Port 1 Data Port 1 Data Port of FR DTE Slot s Port 1 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh For the network side RMON IN OUT Synchronous Data Port of FR SERVICE Slot s Port 1 T1 FR NAM Hardware Version hhhh hhh Frame Relay 4 Frame relay logical For the user side 4 B 6 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 2 NetScout Interface Objects Information 2 of 2 ifName Description ifDescr ifEntry 2 ifIndex RMON Logical Layer RMON Frame These values are IN RMON IN fName of the 17 48 Relay Logical calculated interface Interfaces For the DTE Forthe DCE DTE _ fName of the interface calculated value 1 RMON Virtual These values are ALL VIRTUAL PVC 65 512 Interfaces calculated based on interface number the probe s internal DLCI number ALL circuit index circuit index 65 RMON Virtual These values are IN VIRTUAL PVC 513 1023 Logical calculated interface number Interfaces For the DTE DLCI number DTE virtual interface iflndex 65 2 513 OUT VIRTUAL PVC For the DCE interface number 7 DLCI number DC
156. M 3 16 ISDN link profiles modem SNMP trap managers so router can receive RIP 3 9 November 2000 Index IN 9 Index Status Call 5 37 DBM interface 5 35 DLCI 5 28 service level management 1 1 Enquiry LMI 3 27 3 61_ OpenLane Health and SLV information service level verifier 1 1 LED configuring Line Delivery Ratio menu branch DLC Down on Timeout PVC connection 5 30 5 32 Packet Size test messages performance statistics timeslot assignment Round Trip Latency Stop Bits Clearing Event Threshold stopping a test Error Threshold 3 29 Subnet Mask 3 73 B 86 B 91 3 94 3 95 Sample Interval secs Node Synchronization Role suggestions user documentation A Timeout Error Event Threshold 3 28 3 29 summary network report SNMP Switch Type assigning community names access levels switching limiting access 4 9 4 11 Management 3 76 4 9 NMS security options Number of Managers setting up Trap Managers trap event log 5 62 6 14 between screen areas to new software System Alarm Relay turning off and test status messages Traps 3 81 configuring options downloading displaying information setting up DBM to send 3 22 entering information standards Frame Relay and LMI options 3 25 supported General options software last res
157. Menu gt Control gt Change Operating Mode 3 Select Back to Back Operation and respond Yes to the Are you sure prompt 4 Save the change gt Procedure To return the unit to normal operation 1 Return to the Change Operating Mode screen and switch back to Standard Operation 2 Respond Yes to the prompt and save the change The units can be reconnected to a standard frame relay network 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 23 Configuration Configuration Option Tables Configuration option descriptions contained in this chapter are in menu order even though this may not be the order in which you access each when configuring the unit The following configuration option tables are included 3 24 Table 3 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options Table 3 3 General System Options Table 3 4 Network Physical Interface Options Table 3 5 Data Port Physical Interface Options Table 3 6 DSX 1 Physical Interface Options Table 3 7 ISDN BRI DBM Physical Interface Options Table 3 8 ISDN PRI DBM Physical Interface Options Table 3 9 ISDN Link Profile Options Table 3 10 Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values when Assigning DSX 1 to Network Time Slots Cross Connections Table 3 11 Interface Frame Relay Options Table 3 12 DLCI Record Options Table 3 13 PVC Connection Options Table 3 14 Node IP Options Table 3 15 Management PVC Options Table 3 16 General SNMP Managemen
158. Modular Plug Unkeyed Receive Ring DB15 Socket Receive Tip Receive Tip Shield Transmit Ring Transmit Tip Shield Shield Transmit Ring Transmit Tip Shield 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 99 16216a Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments T1 Network Cable Feature No 3100 F 1 500 Network access is via a 20 foot cable with an RJ48C unkeyed plug type connector on each end The following table shows pin assignments and the purpose of each Function Circuit Direction Pin Number Receive Ring R1 From Network 1 Receive Tip T1 From Network 2 Transmit Ring R To Network 4 Transmit Tip T To Network 5 T1 Mass Termination Cable Feature No 9007 F1 500 The following pin assignments are for the T1 Mass Termination cable that connects multiple carrier mounted FrameSaver units to an M66 block It has a 50 pin RJ48H plug at one end and seven RJ48C plugs at the other end Function Circuit Line Pin Function Circuit Line Pin Receive ring R1 1 1 Transmit ring to R 1 14 from the the network network 2 2 2 15 3 3 3 16 4 4 4 17 5 5 5 18 6 6 6 19 7 7 7 20 Receive tip T1 1 26 Transmit tip to T 1 39 from the the network network 2 27 2 40 3 28 3 41 4 29 4 42 5 30 5 43 6 31 6 44 7 32 7 45 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Canadian T1 Line Interface Cable Feature No 3
159. N Burst Upper Limit 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtBurstUpLimit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 3 1 D N Burst Octets 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtBurstOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 4 1 D N Burst Frames 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtBurstFrames 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 2 1 LMI Unavailable Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkNoLMISecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 6 1 Rx Short Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxShort 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 7 1 Rx Long Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxLong 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 11 1 LMI Sequence Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkSeqErr 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 15 1 Rx Discards MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxDiscards 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 17 1 Total Rx CRC Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxCrcErr 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size B 30 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 14 History OID Cross Reference 5 of 5 Object ID OID Item MIB Ta
160. Name Disabled The incoming call was rejected because the enabled ISDN Link Name associated with the incoming Caller1 ID or local phone number was disabled The ISDN Link Name associated with the incoming call is displayed Link ISDN Link Name The selected ISDN backup link for which status will be displayed Multilink Constituent Link 1 ISDN Link Name The selected multilink constituent link for which status will be displayed Link Operating Mode Disabled 2 Idle 2 Active The status of the ISDN DBM The ISDN Link Profile is disabled m An ISDN link is not currently needed so there is no ISDN connection The ISDN link is required for frame relay traffic and needs an active ISDN connection Call Status Not Connected Invalid Link Profile Not Connected Connected Connected Incoming Call The overall status of the ISDN frame relay link No calls are currently connected on the selected link because the ISDN Link Profile is incomplete No calls are currently connected on the selected link At least one call is actively connected and available for data transfer on the selected ISDN frame relay link when the Most Recent Cause Value is Call Awarded and Being Delivered In Est Chnl 7 An incoming call has been answered and is actively connected and available for data transfer on the selected multilink constituent link when the Most Recent C
161. No Destination Link DLCls Available New was selected from the PVC Connection Table but even though DLCls are available to form a connection no DLCls are available on the network link which is a suitable PVC Destination Configure additional DLCls for the network link and try again No DLCls available for connection New was selected from the PVC Connection Table but all configured DLCls have been connected No action needed or configure more DLCls and try again November 2000 5 13 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 5 Device Messages 4 of 6 Message What It Indicates What To Do No DLCls available for connection New was selected from the Management PVCs option screen but all Link DLCI pairs have been connected Configure more network and or Port 1 Links DLCls pairs and try again No DLCls Available for Mgmt PVC New was selected from the Management PVCs option screen but all configured DLCls have been connected Configure more network and or Port 1 DLCls and try again No DLCls Defined DLCI Records was selected from an interface s Configuration Edit Display menu and no DLCl Records have been created for this interface Select New and create a DLCI record No more DLCls allowed New or CopyFrom was selected from an interface s DLCI Records configuration screen and the maximum number of DLC Records had already been reached Del
162. ON1 when a selected variable s configured threshold is exceeded Enable Sends trap messages when set thresholds are exceeded Disable Does not send trap messages when set thresholds are exceeded ISDN Dial Control Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Controls whether dialCtIPeerCallSetup and dialCtIPeerCalllnformation events send trap messages to the currently configured SNMP trap manager s Use this feature when peer to peer nearest neighbor calling is desired Display Conditions This option only appears when an ISDN DBM is installed Enable Sends trap messages Disable Does not send trap messages Trap Dial Out Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Controls whether SNMP trap messages initiate a call automatically If the call cannot be completed and the Call Retry option is set to Enable the SNMP trap message is held queued until the call completes to either the Alarm or alternate directory NOTE When the modem port is configured as a network communication link up to 10 SNMP trap messages are held at the port Enable Automatically calls the phone number contained in the Control menu s Modem Call Directories Directory Number A Alarm Disable Automatic calls will not be initiated Traps sent to the modem are held until a dial in connection is established 3 84 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40
163. OpenLane 5 x Service Level Management for UNIX Quick Start Installation Instructions 7800 A2 GZ42 OpenLane 5 x Service Level Management for Windows NT Quick Start Installation Instructions NetScout Documentation 2930 170 NetScout Probe User Guide 2930 610 NetScout Manager Plus User Guide 2930 620 NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide 2930 788 NetScout Manager Plus Set Up amp Installation Guide Concord Communications Documentation 09 10010 005 Network Health User Guide 09 10020 005 Network Health Installation Guide 09 10050 002 Network Health Traffic Accountant Reports Guide 09 10070 001 Network Health Reports Guide 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 xi About This Guide Complete Paradyne documentation for this product is available at www paradyne com Select Library Technical Manuals To order a paper copy of this manual m Within the U S A call 1 800 PARADYNE 1 800 727 2396 Outside the U S A call 1 727 530 8623 Conventions Used Convention Used Italic Menu sequence Path Brackets Text highlighted in red xii November 2000 When Used To indicate variable information e g DLCI nnnn To provide an abbreviated method for indicating the selections to be made from a menu or selections from within a menu before performing a procedural step For example Main Menu gt Status System and Test Status indicates that you should select Status from
164. Pattern on this network interface Repeater Loopback on any other T1 interface with DSOs assigned to this network interface Send Pattern Test on this network interface or any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous assigned to this interface Send V 54 or FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous assigned to this network interface November 2000 6 27 Troubleshooting Payload Loopback 6 28 The Payload Loopback PLB loops the information received on the selected interface back to the network after it has passed through the receive and transmit framing section of the device Use the PLB to determine whether the problem is with the T1 facility or in the circuitry of the remote device Main Menu gt Test Network Physical Tests Oth Framer er lt lt t lt i a ae vol PCB interac l Interface 1S 97 15337 CAUTION This test may affect operation of frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected interface While in loopback the frame relay link will be down so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted A PLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active Line Loopback Repeater Loopback Send Remote Line Loopback or an active Monitor Pattern on this network interface Payload or Repeater Loopback on any other T1 interface with DSOs assigned to this network interface Send Pattern Test on this n
165. Phone Number is Not Unique message appears and you must enter another phone number NOTE For every originating outbound phone number entered an answering inbound phone number must be entered at the far end and vice versa Currently active calls are not effected when this number is changed Inbound Calling ID 1 or 2 Possible Settings 0 9 Default Setting none Specifies the local phone number of a remote device from which that the unit will accept calls the ISDN Calling Party Identifier Up to 18 digits can be entered Each Inbound Calling ID must be unique If not the Inbound Calling ID n is Not Unique message appears and you must enter another phone number For remote devices with a PRI DBM only one Inbound Calling ID is required Inbound Calling ID 2 is provided to identify incoming calls from a second phone number assigned to a remote device with a BRI DBM NOTES Inbound Calling ID 2 is only useful when multiple local phone numbers are programmed at the originating site e g a 2B D BRI location For every originating outbound phone number entered an answering inbound phone number must be entered at the far end and vice versa Currently active calls are not effected when this number is changed 0 9 Specifies the numbers in the remote device s local phone number Maximum Link Rate Kbps Possible Settings For a BRI DBM 64 128 For a PRI DBM 64 1472 Default Setting 64
166. Relay LMI and Frame Relay HDLC Errors are not collected these statistics are available for multilink constituent links only Table 5 16 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 1 of 4 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay Link Frames Sent The number of frames sent over the interface Frames Received The number of frames received over the interface Characters Sent The number of data octets bytes sent over the interface Characters Received The number of data octets bytes received over the interface FECNs Received The number of forward explicit congestion notifications received over the interface The network sends FECNs to notify users of data traffic congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the FECN indicator BECNs Received The number of backward explicit congestion notifications received over the interface The network sends BECNs to notify users of data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator November 2000 5 53 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 16 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 2 of 4 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay Errors Total Errors The number of total frame relay errors excluding LMI errors Short frames long frames invalid DLCls unknown DLCls and unknown errors are included in this total Indicates that there may be a non frame relay device on the other end of the link or the
167. SDN Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 1 Slot 9128 only 9128 A1 204 and 9098 F 1 870 November 2000 E 1 Equipment List E 2 Model Feature Description Number FrameSaver SLV Units FrameSaver SLV 9128 T1 central site carrier NAM with integral 9128 B1 212 modem but without ISDN PRI DBM for up to 120 PVCs Includes Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference FrameSaver SLV 9128 T1 central site 1 slot unit with integral 9128 A2 202 modem and ISDN PRI DBM for up to 120 PVCs and Ethernet port for management Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable RJ48C PRI ISDN Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference FrameSaver SLV 9128 T1 central site 1 slot unit with integral modem for up to 120 PVCs ISDN BRI DBM and Ethernet port for management Includes 1 Slot Housing 120 VAC Power Supply Network Cable ISDN BRI DBM RJ49C BRI ISDN Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 1 Slot 9128 only 9128 A2 204 and 9098 F 1 870 FrameSaver SLV 9128 T1 central site carrier NAM with integral modem but without ISDN PRI DBM for up to 120 PVCs and Ethernet port for management Includes Network Cable Installation Instructions and Quick Reference 9128 B2 212 User Manual FrameSaver SLV 9126 9128 User s Guide Paper Manual 9128 A2 GB20 NMS Products OpenLane Enterpr
168. SDN frame relay link is in or out of service Auto The link is configured to be in service when needed Packets will be transmitted and received on the interface and the LMI for a PVC connection will become active when the link is required If this profile is configured as the alternate link and the primary link or DLCI fails the unit dials the Outbound Phone Number or the Alternate Outbound Phone Number if the first call was unsuccessful The unit also answers calls from Inbound Call IDs associated with this link This link profile becomes active when This profile is configured as the alternate link and there is a failure of a primary link or DLCI Source or Primary Destination DLCls are configured on this link When the primary link recovers the call is automatically disconnected Disable The frame relay link is out of service No data will be transmitted or received on the interface If there is are any active calls when disabled the calls are ended and no calls will be answered or originated using this profile November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 9 ISDN Link Profile Options 2 of 3 Outbound Phone Number Possible Settings 0 9 space _ or Default Setting none Specifies the primary phone number to call the ISDN Called Party Identifier for the Link Profile Up to 18 valid characters can be entered Each Outbound Phone Number must be unique If not the Outbound
169. Send Pttn Active Interface A Send Pattern test is active on the specified interface using a selected test pattern This test cannot be activated on user data ports that have Port Use set to Frame Relay SLV Latency Exceeded DLCI nnnn frame relay link 1 2 3 The measured latency of SLV communication responses from the remote unit on this DLCI is excessive so the DLCI has been declared unsuitable for normal multiplexed PVC operation DLCI Type is set to Multiplexed SLV Timeout DLC nnnn frame relay link 1 2 3 An excessive number of SLV communication responses from the remote FrameSaver SLV unit have been missed on the specified multiplexed DLCI the DLCI is not suitable for user data When a hardware bypass capable device has been detected at the other end of the PVC and this condition occurs only user data for EDLCI 0 will be transmitted while this condition exists When an ISDN DBM is present this message only appears for individual and aggregate multilink frame relay links not constituent links of a frame relay multilink Suboptimal Link Rate frame relay link ISDN DBM only The specified frame relay multilink has failed to achieve the configured Maximum Link Rate for the link This message appears for multilink aggregate frame relay links if LMI is down on any of its constituent links 1 nnn indicates a DLC number of 16 through 1007 2 frame relay link is one of the following
170. Statistics Service Level Verification They only appear for the network interface and only if DLCls are multiplexed Table 5 14 Service Level Verification Performance Statistics 1 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates Far End Circuit Number of the multiplexed DLCI or VPI VCI Virtual Path Identifier Virtual Channel Identifier at the other end of the connection If the far end circuit is a DLCI the DLCI number 16 1007 appears If a VPI VCI the number is displayed as xx yyy xx being the VPI number 0 15 and yyy being the VCI number 32 2047 None appears if the unit has not communicated with the other end Far End IP Addr IP Address of the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI connection None appears if the FrameSaver unit has not communicated with the other end or if the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI does not have an IP Address configured Dropped SLV Responses The number of SLV inband sample messages sent for which a response from the far end device has not been received Inbound Dropped Frames 1 Above CIR 1 Within CIR 1 Between CIR amp EIR 1 Above EIR 1 Total number of frames transmitted by the far end device that were dropped in transit The counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached 232 2 then the count starts over The SLV Delivery Ratio option see Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options must be enabled
171. Thru Feature Access to the router s VT100 compatible user interface is provided through the FrameSaver unit s Modem PassThru feature also known as Router Assist A dial up connection to the FrameSaver unit is used to access the router when the unit is set up for this use See Setting Up to Use the Modem PassThru Feature in Chapter 3 Configuration to configure the unit for Modem PassThru operation Once the unit is set up to use this feature each time access to the router is needed the feature is activated from the Control menu Main Menu Control Enable Modem PassThru to COM When this feature is active a logical connection between the unit s modem and COM ports is made and data received over the modem port is transmitted out the COM port to the router s AUX or console port and data received from the router on the COM port is transmitted out the modem port While Modem PassThru is active normal access to the FrameSaver unit through either its modem or COM port is suspended When an escape sequence minus minus minus with a minimum of 50 ms between each is detected the FrameSaver unit switches back to normal user interface operation Canceling Modem PassThru Operation 9128 A2 GB20 40 When Modem PassThru is active but access to the FrameSaver unit s menu driven user interface is needed Modem PassThru can be cancelled from the Control menu Main Menu Control Disable Modem PassThru to COM November 200
172. To change configuration option settings 1 From the Configuration Edit Display menu select a set of configuration options and press Enter For example Configuration PVC Connections 2 Select the configuration options that are applicable to your network and make appropriate changes to the setting s See Chapter 2 User Interface and Basic Operation for additional information When creating new PVC connections or management PVCs some configuration options will be blank For a valid setting to appear Tab to the configuration option and press the spacebar 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until all changes are complete NOTE Only Security Access Level 1 users can change configuration options Security Access Level 2 users can only view configuration options and run tests Security Access Level 3 users can only view configuration options they cannot change configuration options or run tests 3 6 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Saving Configuration Options When changes to the configuration options are complete use the Save function key to save your changes to either the Current Customer 1 or Customer 2 configuration areas NOTE When changing settings you must Save for changes to take effect B gt Procedure To save the configuration option changes 1 Press Ctrl a to switch to the function key area at the bottom of the screen 2 Type sor S to select the Save function and press Enter The Sa
173. VC CONNECTION STATUS Primary Destination DLCI EDLCI Link DLCI Status 9128 II 5 26 2000 23 32 Page 1 of 2 Alternate Destination Link DLCI EDLCI Status Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 Mgmt PVC Tampa Port 2 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Port 1 Refresh 201 202 100 204 206 207 208 209 210 PgUp Net1 FR1 Net1 FR1 Net1 FR1 Net1 FR1 Net1 FR1 Net1 FR1 Net1 FR1 Net1 FR1 Net1 FR1 Net1 FR1 Net1 FR1 PgDn 300 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 502A 504A 505 ESC for previous menu Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Inactive Inactive Active Colorado 400 Inactive Colorado 302 Active Tampa 304 MainMenu Exit For units with ISDN backup capability the DBM provides backup support through the units ISDN DBM interface For units without ISDN backup capability an alternate network DLCI can be used to backup user data For additional information about the Alternate Destination fields see Configuring PVC Connections in Chapter 3 Configuration Ifthe No PVC Connections message appears instead of a list of PVC connections no PVC connections have been configured yet 5 30 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Table 5 10 PVC Connection Status 1 of 2 Operation and Maintenance Field Status What It Indicates Link Net1 FR1 Port 1 or Port 2 Mgmt PVC Name Identifies the cross connection of DLCls configured for the
174. VC selected is defined as a trap Initial Route Destination a Default IP Destination or a TS Access Management Link an Are You Sure prompt appears to warn you November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 15 Management PVC Options 1 of 4 Name Possible Settings ASCII Text Entry Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies a unique name for the management PVC as referenced on screens e g Tampa for Tampa Florida ASCII Text Entry Enter a unique name for the management PVC maximum length 8 characters Intf IP Address Possible Settings Node IP Address Special nnn nnn nnn nnn Default Setting Node IP Address Specifies the IP address needed to access the unit via this management PVC providing connectivity to an external IP network through the frame relay network Node IP Address Uses the IP address contained in the Node IP Address see Table 3 14 Node IP Options Special 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Allows you to display edit an IP address for the unit s management PVC when the IP address for this interface is different from the node s IP address Intf Subnet Mask Possible Settings Node Subnet Mask Calculate Special nn nnn nnn nnn Default Setting Node Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit when the management PVC is providing connectivity to an external IP network through frame relay that requires a
175. able Default Setting Disable Specifies whether a user ID and password referred to as the login are required to access the menu driven user interface via a Telnet session If required the login used is the same login used for an menu driven user interface session This option does not affect the TS Access Management Link Enable Requires a login to access a Telnet session Disable Does not require a login Session Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies the highest security level allowed when accessing the menu driven user interface via a Telnet session If a login is required for the session the effective access level is also determined by the user s access level When a login is not required the effective access level is determined by this option This option does not affect the TS Access Management Link NOTE The effective access level is always the lowest one assigned to either the session or the user For example if the assigned Session Access Level is Level 2 but the User Access Level is Level 3 then only level 3 access is allowed for the session Level 1 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information change configuration options and run tests This is the highest access level allowed CAUTION Before changing the session access level to Level 2 or 3 make sure that t
176. ace used to get to the destination and how long the route has been in existence Trap Event Log Displays the SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol trap event log for the FrameSaver unit from the menu driven user interface with the most recent events first Keeping a running total for all trap events stored the amount of time since the event was logged plus a description of the trap Troubleshooting PVC Provides a dedicated troubleshooting management link that helps service providers isolate problems within their network ATM VPI VCI and DLCI Correlation For networks with both ATM and frame relay access endpoints allows the FrameSaver unit to report the originating Virtual Path and Channel Identifier VPI VCl in the far end ATM access endpoint where the local DLCI is mapped so they can be correlated for OpenLane SLV reports Dual Flash Memory Allows software upgrades while the unit is up and running Two software loads can be stored and implemented at the user s discretion DSX 1 Drop Insert Port Allows DTEs PBXs that support the DS1 signal format to share the T1 network with other high speed equipment so that voice traffic can share the same local access circuit as the frame relay data Back to Back Operation Allows two FrameSaver devices to be connected via a leased line network or simulation so a point to point configuration can be implemented Additional FrameSaver SLV 9128 Features The following feat
177. after the timeout expires terminating the test Disable Loopback and pattern tests must be manually terminated Test Duration min Possible Settings 1 120 Default Setting 10 Specifies the maximum duration of the tests Display Conditions This option only appears when Test Timeout is set to Enable 1 120 Sets the Test Timeout period in minutes inclusive Primary Clock Source Possible Settings Net1 DSX Internal DBM Default Setting Net1 Allows you to select the primary clock source for the unit The source selected provides all of the timing within the FrameSaver unit and the clocks for all of the external interfaces Failure of the clock specified by this configuration option results in automatic fallback to the Secondary Clock Source configuration option setting NOTE For the Primary and Secondary Clock Source options only Internal can be selected for both options All other selections must have different settings e g if Primary Clock Source is set to Net1 Secondary Clock Source cannot be set to Net1 Net1 The primary clock is derived from the Network1 T1 interface DSX The primary clock for the unit is derived from the DSX 1 interface This setting only appears if the DSX 1 interface is enabled see Configuring the DSX 1 Interface Internal The primary clock is the internal clock DBM The primary clock is derived from the DBM This selection only appears
178. al Ground DTE Signal Ground SG 3 5 SG DCE Transmit Data DTE Transmit Data TXD 4 To DTE 3 TXD DCE Data Terminal DTE Data Terminal Ready DTR 5 To DTE 4 Ready DTR DCE Carrier Detect DTE Carrier Detect CD 6 To DTE 1 CD DCE Request to DTE Request to Send RTS 7 To DTE 7 Send RTS November 2000 C 7 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Gender Adapter Changer When connecting the COM port to a router or Frame Relay Assembler Disassembler FRAD a gender adapter is required to convert the COM Port to Terminal Printer cable s plug type interface to a socket type interface for the router s or FRAD s AUX port LAN Adapter Converter and Cable ALAN adapter converter and cable is not needed for the FrameSaver SLV 9128 carrier mounted unit since its COM port is an 8 position modular jack The following shows the pin assignments for the DB25 plug to modular jack converter between the COM port and the 8 conductor LAN Adapter cable Feature No 3100 F2 920 Custom 8 conductor cable with modular plugs on both ends between the converter and the LAN Adapter Feature No 3100 F2 910 Plug to Modular Jack Converter Cable Com Port 8 Position Plug to Plug to DB25 Plug Modular Jack Modular Jack LAN Adapter Tx Clock Rx Data Signal Ground Tx Data DTR CD RTS Rx Clock Unused DTR Tx Data Signal Ground Rx Data CTS Frame Ground Unused
179. alarms exist on the link e g Sync Data Port SO1P1 frame relay link Port 1 LMI down ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp LMI is up or Frame Relay link is enabled String ifString up T1 Network BRI PRI Synchronous Data Port DTE Side of the Frame Relay UNI Supported by the media specific Frame Relay DTE s MIB iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib linkDown LMI is down for the LMI Protocol configured 3 or Frame Relay link is disabled Strings ifString LMI down ifString administratively shutdown Due to an intentional shutdown linkUp LMI is up or Frame Relay link is enabled String ifString up 3 If the LMI Protocol is not configured a linkUp linkDown trap is based solely upon whether the interface is enabled or disabled November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Traps enterprise Specific 9128 A2 GB20 40 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults These traps indicate that an enterprise specific event has occurred Supported enterprise specific traps are listed below Table B 7 enterprise Specific Traps and Variable Bindings 1 of 3 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause enterpriseCIR devFrExtDicilflndex CIR has changed due to the LMI
180. amount of data dropped by the network Disable Extra byte is not included DLCI Down on SLV Timeout Available Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether missed SLV packets will be monitored along with the LMI status to determine the status of PVC connections to remote FrameSaver units NOTE This option does not apply to multiplexed DLCls connected to a far end unit with hardware bypass capability Enable After the configured threshold for missed SLV packets has been exceeded causing the DLCl s status to turn Inactive an alarm and SNMP trap are generated and a Health and Status message created Disable Missed SLV packets are monitored but the DLCI is not declared down SLV Timeout Error Event Threshold Available Settings 1 2 3 4 20 Default Setting 3 Specifies the number of consecutive missed SLV communications that must be detected before a DLCI Inactive status is declared 1 20 Sets the limit for these error events 3 28 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options 2 of 2 SLV Timeout Clearing Event Threshold Available Settings 1 2 3 4 20 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of consecutive SLV messages that must be received before the DLCI Inactive status is cleared 1 20 Sets the limit for the clearing event SLV Round Trip Latency Error Threshold ms
181. ark Inversion AMI line coding format B8ZS Uses Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS line coding format 3 42 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 6 DSX 1 Physical Interface Options 2 of 2 Line Equalization Possible Settings 0 133 133 266 266 399 399 533 533 655 Default Setting 0 133 Permits a standard DSX signal to be delivered over a distance of up to 655 feet 0 133 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 133 feet of cable between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE 133 266 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 266 feet of cable between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE 266 399 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 399 feet of cable between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE 399 533 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 533 feet of cable between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE 533 655 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 655 feet of cable between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE Send All Ones on DSX 1 Failure Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether action is taken when a valid signal cannot be recovered for the DSX 1 LOS continuous OOF or AIS Enable Sends all ones on the DSO channels allocated to the DSX 1 interface in the event of an LOS AIS or continuous OOS condition on the DSX 1 interface Disable No action is taken when a signal fails on th
182. ates an incompatible call state Network Out of 38 Network is not functioning Contact your service Order correctly and the condition representative is expected to continue No Call Suspended 85 A call resume has been No action is needed issued but no calls have been suspended 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 5 41 Operation and Maintenance 5 42 Table 5 12 Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages 4 of 6 Cause Message No What It Indicates What To Do No Circuit Channel 34 No circuit channel is Wait and try again Available currently available to handle the call No Destination 3 Network through which call Contact your service Route has been routed does not representative serve the destination area or device None No causes have been No action is needed generated Non selected User 26 User has not been awarded No action is needed Clearing the incoming call No Route to Specify 2 The device sending or 1 Verify that the network Transit Network receiving this cause does exists not recognize the transit network that the call is 2 Verify a he network being has been routed Seley te CSVICE through sending the cause Normal Call 16 Call is being cleared No action is needed Clearing because either the caller or receiver has requested that it be cleared Normal Unspecified 31 Remote user has sent a No action is needed release messag
183. ating a Login A login is required if security is enabled Security is enabled by the configuration options Login Required for the communication port modem port and Telnet Login Required or FTP Login Required for a Telnet or FTP Session Up to six login ID password combinations can be created using ASCII text and each login must have a specified access level Logins must be unique and they are case sensitive B gt Procedure To create a login record 1 Select Administer Logins Main Menu gt Control gt Administer Logins 2 Select New and set the following configuration options as appropriate In the field Enter the Login ID ID of 1 to 10 characters Password Password from 1 to 10 characters Re enter password Password again to verify that you entered the correct password into the device Access Level Access level 1 2 or 3 Level 1 User can add change and display configuration options save and perform device testing Level 2 User can monitor and perform diagnostics display status and configuration option information Level 3 User can only monitor and display status and configuration screens CAUTION Make sure at least one login is set up for Level 1 access or you may be inadvertently locked out NOTE See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication in Chapter 6 Troubleshooting should you be locked out inadvertently 3 Save your changes Wh
184. ation Time Slot Assignment gt Frame Relay Network Assignments The Frame Relay Network Assignments screen appears This screen contains a matrix of the current assignment status of all time slots on the network interface 2 Enable or disable Time Slot Discovery When enabled the unit examines all time slots not cross connected to other ports to determine which time slots are being used by the network for frame relay traffic These time slots are set to FrameRly1 This is the factory default When disabled time slot assignments must be manually configured 3 If Time Slot Discovery is disabled assign network time slots for use by frame relay service link 1 by typing FrameRly1 in the selected Network field 4 Repeat Step 3 until all desired time slots are assigned 5 Save the configuration Assigning DSX 1 Time Slots to the Network Interface DSX 1 time slots are assigned by channel allocation where you specify individual time slots The DSX 1 interface must be enabled to assign DSX 1 time slots to the network interface see Table 3 6 DSX 1 Physical Interface Options Value Meaning Nit It represents time slot tt of the selected network interface Assigned The time slot is already assigned to something other than a DSX 1 time slot so it is unavailable Assigned time slots cannot be modified from this screen Available The time slot is currently unassigned DSX 1 tt Slot tt of the DSX 1 inte
185. ause Value is Call Awarded and Being Delivered In Est Chnl 7 1 Only appears for a constituent frame relay link 2 If Link Operating Mode is Disabled or Idle the Remote Call ID ISDN Channel and Negotiated Rate fields will not appear November 2000 5 37 Operation and Maintenance 5 38 Table 5 11 DBM Interface Status 3 of 3 Field Status What It Indicates Call Status Connected Outbound An outbound call has been Call 1 placed and is actively connected i and available for data transfer on cont d the selected multilink constituent link when the Most Recent Cause Value is Call Awarded and Being Delivered In Est Chnl 7 Most Recent Cause Various ITU cause Refer to Table 5 12 Most Recent Value 3 messages and Previous Cause Value Messages for additional Previous Cause information Values 3 Maximum Link Rate BRI DBM The maximum link rate that was Kbps 64K 128K configured for the selected link This PRI DBM is the maximum rate the link will 64K 128K 1472 attempt to achieve when activated Negotiated Rate Kbps 64K per B channel 56K per B channel The negotiated rate of the connection link For a multilink aggregate frame relay link the negotiated rate will be the sum of the negotiated rates on all connected constituent links ISDN Channel BRI DBM The ISDN B channel being used for B1 B2 the call on this link PRI DBM B1 B2 B23 Rem
186. ay Allows a local external DTE Loopback to be started or stopped via the data terminal equipment attached to the port s interchange lead LL ITU 141 as specified by V 54 Disable The DTE attached to the port cannot control the local external DTE Loopback Local The DTE attached to the port controls the local external DTE Loopback When Port 2 or Port Use is set to Synchronous Data Allows local Data Terminal Loopbacks DTPLBs and remote Data Channel Loopbacks DCLBs to be controlled by the DTE connected to this port Display Conditions This option does not appear when Port Type is set to X 21 Disable The DTE attached to the port cannot control Local Data Terminal Loopbacks DTPLBs and remote Data Channel Loopbacks DCLBs DTPLB The DTE attached to the port controls DTPLBs via circuit LL CCITT 141 as specified by V 54 The port remains in loopback as long as the circuit stays on DCLB The DTE attached to the port controls DCLBs via circuit RL CCITT 140 as specified by V 54 The far end equipment must support inband V 54 loopbacks Both The DTE attached to the port controls both local DTPLBs and remote DCLBs Invert Transmit and Receive Data Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether transmitted and received data for the synchronous data port is logically inverted before being transmitted or after being received from the network Use this confi
187. ble Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address that identifies the SNMP manager s to receive SNMP traps Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Adds to or changes the IP address for the trap manager Clear Fills the NMS IP address with zeros Initial Route Destination Possible Settings AutoRoute Modem COM Ethernet PVCname Default Setting AutoRoute Specifies the initial route used to reach the specified Trap Manager When proprietary RIP is active only one unit in the network needs to specify an interface or management link as the initial destination All other units can use the default setting Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option AutoRoute Uses proprietary RIP from other FrameSaver devices to learn the route for sending traps to the specified Trap Manager or the Default IP Destination when no route is available in the routing table see Table 3 14 Node IP Options Modem Uses the Modem port This selection only appears if the Modem Port Use configuration option is set to Net Link see Table 3 22 Modem Port Options COM Uses the COM port This selection is only available when Port Use is set to Net Link
188. bled on the port so the FrameSaver unit will act as an agent for or gateway to other units in its management network Using this technique the FrameSaver unit returns its own MAC Media Access Control address in response to ARP requests when it recognizes that the destination IP address is in its subnet but the device sending the ARP request is in another network Packets sent to the FrameSaver unit s gateway address are forwarded to the appropriate device Disable The Proxy ARP technique will not be used by the unit it will not act as an agent for other devices in its network 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 87 Configuration Configuring the Communication Port Select Communication Port from the Management and Communication menu to display or change the communication port configuration options see Table 3 21 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Communication Port Table 3 21 Communication Port Options 1 of 5 Port Use Possible Settings Terminal Net Link Modem PassThru Default Setting Terminal Assigns a specific use to the COM port NOTE Ifthe Default IP Destination is set to COM see Table 3 14 Node IP Options and you change Port Use to Terminal the Default IP Destination is forced to None Terminal The COM port is used for the asynchronous terminal connection Net Link The COM port is the network communications link to the IP network or IP device p
189. bort all active tests on all interfaces see Aborting All Tests When the status of a testis The only command available is Inactive Start Active Stop Start or stop an individual test using the same procedure B gt Procedure To start and stop a loopback or a send pattern test 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Test 2 Select an interface and test e g Network Data Port or ISDN PVC Tests and press Enter The selected test screen appears Start appears in the Command column Inactive appears in the Status column 3 Select the Port number and press Enter 4 Select the DLC number and press Enter if a PVC test has been selected The cursor is positioned at Start in the Command column of the first available test and is highlighted 5 To start the test highlight Start under Command for the test you want to run and press Enter Stop now appears and is highlighted and the status of the test changes to Active The length of time that the test has been running is shown in the Result column 6 To stop the test press Enter to send the Stop command Start reappears and the status of the test changes back to Inactive 6 20 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Troubleshooting Aborting All Tests 9128 A2 GB20 40 Use the Abort All Tests selection from the Test menu to abort all tests running on all interfaces with exception to DTE initiated loopbacks To abort individual tests that
190. call attempts made by the DBM Total Calls Originated Number of successful calls made by the DBM Total Calls Answered Number of successful calls answered by the DBM Total Calls Rejected Security Number of calls rejected by the DBM due to security Total Calls Rejected Other Number of calls rejected by the DBM due to reasons other than security like incoming voice call requests Average Call Duration mins Average amount of time in minutes that successful calls take Longest Call Duration mins Amount of time spent in minutes during the longest successful call Total Call Duration mins Sum of all successful calls in minutes November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance Ethernet Performance Statistics 9128 A2 GB20 40 The following statistics appear when Ethernet is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Ethernet Statistic What It Indicates Port Rate Mbps The operating rate as detected on the Ethernet port One of the following may appear for this statistic Disconnected The line is not connected 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps The Ethernet port is operating at this rate Disabled The Ethernet port has been disabled Duplex The duplex mode detected on the Ethernet port One of the following may appear for this statistic Disconnected The line is not connected Full
191. cates that the error is not one that the unit can recognize 5 54 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 16 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 3 of 4 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay LMI LMI Protocol The LMI protocol configured for the frame relay link Normal condition Status Msg Received The number of LMI status messages received over the interface Normal condition Total LMI Errors The number of LMI errors Reliability errors protocol errors unknown report types unknown information elements and sequence errors are included in this total Network problems Number of Inactives The number of times the LMI has declared the frame relay link Inactive Network problems November 2000 5 55 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 16 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 4 of 4 Statistic What It Indicates Frame Relay HDLC Errors Rx Total Errors The number of receiver errors on the interface The following are included in this count Receive invalid frames short frames long frames invalid DLCls unknown DLCls and unknown errors Rx Total Discards m Receive errors non octet aligned frames frames with CRC errors and Rx Overruns Rx Total Discards The number of receiver discards on the interface The following are included in this count Resource errors Rx Overruns Frames receive
192. ce Move cursor one position to the left or to the last character of the previous field Spacebar Select the next valid value for the field Delete Del Delete character that the cursor is on Up Arrow or Ctrl u Move cursor up one field within a column on the same screen Down Arrow or Ctrl d Move cursor down one field within a column on the same screen Right Arrow or Ctrl f Move cursor one character to the right if in edit mode Left Arrow or Ctrl b Move cursor one character to the left if in edit mode Ctrl l Redraw the screen display clearing information typed in but not yet entered Enter Return Accept entry or when pressed before entering data or after entering invalid data display valid options on the last row of the screen 2 6 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Function Keys 9128 A2 GB20 40 User Interface and Basic Operation All function keys located in the lower part of the screen see the example in Screen Work Areas on page 2 5 operate the same way throughout the screens They are not case sensitive so upper or lowercase letters can be used interchangeably These keys use the following conventions For the screen Select function And press Enter to Morm MainMenu Return to the Main Menu screen Eore Exit Terminate the asynchronous terminal session Norn New Enter new data Ooro Modify Modify existing data Lorl Delete Delete data Sors Save Save informat
193. ch DLCI whether the DLCI is configured or not LMI Reported DLCls Status Screen Example main status lmi_dlcis Device Name Node A STATUS Active Inactive Deleted Inactive Inactive Inactive Active Inactive Active 520 Active DLCI is configured on the Frame Relay Link Refresh PgUp PgDn frame relay link LMI REPORTED DLCIs CIR bps 16000 256000 64000 STATUS Active Active Deleted Active Active Active ESC for previous menu PrevLink 9128 II 5 26 2000 23 32 Page 1 of 2 CIR bps 32000 32000 32000 32000 32000 MainMenu Exit An asterisk next to the DLCI indicates that the DLCI has been configured for the link DLCls without an asterisk have not been configured in the unit These DLCIs pass through the unit transparently without being monitored and with no demultiplexing multiplexing of management diagnostics or user data being performed Only DLCls on the Net1 FR1 and Port 1 frame relay links appear on this screen nonconfigured DLCls on other links are discarded November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 9 Network LMI Reported DLCIs Status Field Status What It Indicates DLCI 16 through 1007 Identifies the Local Management Interface reported DLCI numbers assigned to the selected interface the identifying number assigned to the path between two frame relay FrameSaver units ports DLCI statuses are li
194. col RIP feature routing information is passed to the router over the management PVC so the router can learn routes to FrameSaver SLV and FLEX devices Node IP information should be set up see Configuring Node IP Information B gt Procedure 1 Configure the router to receive RIP For example if using a Cisco router configure config t router RIP int serialx IP RIP Receive version 1 then ctl z WR 2 Create a Standard DLCI for the user data port Configuration Data Ports DLCI Records 3 Create a Management PVC using the user data port DLCI just configured Configuration Management and Communication Management PVCs 4 Set Primary Link RIP to Standard_Out and Save the configuration Refer to Table 3 12 DLCI Record Options and Table 3 15 Management PVC Options for configuration information Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock Select System Information to set up or display the general SNMP name for the unit its location and a contact for the unit as well as to set the system clock Main Menu gt Control gt System Information The following information is available for viewing Save any entries or changes If the selectionis Enter the Device Name Unique name for device identification of up to 20 characters System Name SNMP system name can be up to 255 characters System Location System s physical location can be up to 255 characters
195. d the Saving will cause Auto Configuration to update and Restart Are you sure prompt appears No is the default for this prompt If Yes y is entered the Delete All DLCIs and PVC Connections prompt appears No is the default for this prompt If Yes is entered all multiplexed DLCls and PVC Connections are deleted except for Management PVCs with the user data port as the primary destination and the Management PVC that is designated as TS Management Link If No is entered previously discovered and auto configured option settings will not be removed but configuration updates due to LMI response messages are performed according to the just saved mode setting If No n is entered or if you exit the screen without responding to the prompt no Auto Configuration updates are performed and updates due to LMI response messages are performed according to the previously saved setting Automatically Removing a Circuit 9128 A2 GB20 40 Using the automatic circuit removal feature which comes enabled network DLCls and PVCs can be automatically removed from the unit s configuration when the the network service provider no longer supports them Automatic deletion is based upon information from a LMI full status response on an active frame relay link When this feature is set to Enable The following will be automatically removed from the unit s configuration Unsupported network DLCls and PVC connections that include
196. d which can be performed from the menu driven user interface or through SNMP commands Multiple Last Cause Values are also provided to assist in troubleshooting ISDN problems FrameSaver SLV 9126 units can be equipped with a BRI DBM which supports up to two B channels which may have a different destination FrameSaver SLV 9128 and 9128 II 1 slot units can be equipped with a PRI DBM which supports up to 23 B channels or a BRI DBM Carrier mounted FrameSaver SLV 9128 and 9128 II NAMs support a PRI DBM only Configurable FTP Transfer Rate Allows you to control the transmit rate when downloading firmware into the FrameSaver unit and uploading user history statistics to an NMS Network Management System via the COM port connection or a management PVC so the data can be transferred as a background task using the standard File Transfer Protocol FTP over extended periods of time using low bandwidth FTP User History Poller Provides a bulk collector using FTP through the OpenLane system that generates a file for data at the time that data is uploaded using FTP Network User History Synchronization Allows correlation of RMON2 User History statistics among all SLV devices in a network Using a central clock called the network reference time all SLV device user history statistics are synchronized across the network further enhancing the accuracy of OpenLane SLV reports RMON Based User History Statistics Gathering Provides everything n
197. d Maintenance 9128 II 5 26 2000 23 32 Page 1 of 2 Interface 135 001 001 135 001 002 135 001 220 135 001 221 135 001 220 135 001 222 135 001 222 135 001 002 135 001 002 000 111 000 000 000 111 113 111 111 Refresh PgDn 026 026 042 042 042 026 026 026 026 ESC for previous menu 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 PRPRPPPPRPRPRPRB PVCMgmt 1001 PVCMgmt 1002 Ethernet Modem COM Modem PVCMgmt 1003 PVCMgmt 1004 PVCMgmt 1005 PVCMgmt 1006 MainMenu Exit The table is sorted by the Destination IP address from the lowest number to the highest If no routes exist the No Routes message appears instead of routing information Table 5 13 IP Routing Table Values 1 of 2 Column What It Indicates Destination The Destination IP Address for the route 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Mask The Destination Subnet Mask for the route 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 for network routes FFF FFF FFF FFF for host routes m 127 may appear as well It is a reserved number Gateway The Gateway IP Address for the route 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 5 45 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 13 IP Routing Table Values 2 of 2 Column What It Indicates Hop The number of hops in the route to the destination 1 15 If 16 appears the route is in the process of
198. d that are not part of a PVC connection or management link For example if Port 1 has no DLCls defined Port 1 would not appear as a valid setting Net1 FR1 Specifies that the network interface be used in the connection ISDN Link Name For units with ISDN backup capability specifies the ISDN link of the DBM as the source link This can be any nonnull link name configured on an ISDN frame relay link Port n Specifies that the frame relay link on the user data port be used in the connection Clear All Clears all Link and DLCI settings and suppresses EDLCls Source DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the source DLCI for a frame relay interface The DLCI must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection NOTE Source DLCI has no value if Source Link contains no value 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number Source EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the source Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI for a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection Display Conditions This option only appears when Source DLCI contains a multiplexed DLCI record number 0 62 Specifies the EDLC number
199. d when the link was down a Inactive and disconnected DLCls Inactive destination DLCls m Unknown EDLCls Rx Overruns The number of receiver overruns too many bits on the interface Rx Non Octet Frames The number of non octet frames received on the interface Rx CRC Errors The number of received CRC cycle redundancy check errors Tx Total Errors The total number of transmit errors on the interface including transmits discards and transmit overruns Tx Total Discards The total number of transmit discards on the interface including underrun flushes Tx Underruns The number of transmitter underruns too few bits on the interface 5 56 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance ESF Line Performance Statistics These statistics appear when ESF Line is selected from the Performance Statistics menu for the network interface Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics ESF Line Only seven T1 network statistical intervals appear on the screen at any one time You can choose which intervals to display on your screen by entering Interval Number 01 96 Time Hours and Minutes NOTES Interval 01 is the interval occurring just prior to the current one Interval 02 is 2 intervals prior to the current one etc Selecting a specific time is useful when the approximate time at which a specific event occurred is known Edit any of the interval or time fields on
200. daas 3 66 Setting Up Management and Communication Options 3 69 Configuring Node IP Information 00ce eee eee eee 3 70 Configuring Management PVCs 0 000 cee eee eee eee 3 72 Configuring General SNMP Management 005 3 76 Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support 3 77 Configuring SNMP NMS Security 00 cece eee eae 3 80 Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out 3 81 Configuring the Ethernet Port 0 00 00 cee ee eee eens 3 86 Configuring the Communication Port 0000ee ee eee 3 88 Configuring the Modem Port cesses cecee cone aee re eeneeaes 3 92 Configuring the Criteria for Automatic Backup 2 0005 3 96 4 Security and Logins 9128 A2 GB20 40 CMJ ACCESS a nici twp idea Pdi cbc Soc badd Sadie Sadie Sec 4 2 Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access 0 0 cece eens 4 2 Limiting Dial In Access via the Modem Port 00000ee0es 4 4 Controlling ISPN ACCGSS c csicciatcee ates diets acabeseess aeatsans 4 5 ISDN Call SGCumiy arse steacctee seas adeas aieeaa 4 5 DisablingiSDNACCeSS ss ic chickdss dan inn naa 4 5 Controlling Telnet or FTP ACCESS 000 e cece eee eee eens 4 6 Limiting Tenet ACCESS i cscccs0ntedieeaiawieiawecdanbeaaeees 4 6 Limiting PREV ACCE S s ccccidtacmeneeaeearaenettadcmesatetatad 4 7 Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Access Manhagementi
201. del 9128 II without Ethernet with Ethernet November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments The sections that follow provide pin assignments for each interface COM Port Connector The following table provides the pin assignments for the 1 slot FrameSaver SLV 9128 and 9126 unit s 25 position EIA 232C communication port connector Signal Direction Pin Shield GND 1 DCE Transmit Data TXD From DTE In 2 DCE Receive Data RXD To DTE Out 3 DCE Request to Send RTS From DTE In 4 DCE Clear to Send CTS To DTE Out 5 DCE Data Set Ready DSR From DTE In 6 Signal Ground SG 7 DCE Carrier Detect CD To DTE Out 8 DCE Data Terminal Ready DTR From DTE In 20 Pins 5 6 and 8 are tied together The following table shows the signals and pin assignments for the carrier mounted FrameSaver SLV 9128 NAM s 8 position communication port interface connector Signal Direction Pin DCE Received Data RXD From DCE Out 2 Signal Ground SG To From DCE 3 DCE Transmit Data TXD To DCE In 4 DCE Data Terminal Ready DTR To DCE In 5 DCE Carrier Detect CD From DCE Out 6 DCE Request to Send RTS To DCE In 7 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 C 3 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments COM Port to PC Cable Feature No 3100 F2 550 Order this cable when connecting the 8 position COM port to a PC The
202. deleted Response to the Remove Alternate Destinations from PVCs and delete unused DLCI Records prompt was Yes and Automatic Backup Configuration was set to Single_Site_Backup or Multi_Site_ Backup Add Alternate Destinations to Current PVC Connections No No previously configured PVC Connections are removed or changed but updates due to LMI responses will be performed using the new setting Yes Alternate Destination information is configured for current DLCls ISDN Link Profiles PVC Connections and Management PVCs on the ISDN DBM interface except for the Management PVC designated as the TS Access Management Link NOTE When DLCls PVC connections and management PVCs for the first ISDN Link Profile have been configured manually it is recommended that specific discovered DLCls PVC connections and management PVCs be deleted manually via the Configuration menus Otherwise the manual configurations will be deleted along with the automatically configured ones To specify when automatic backup is allowed or can occur see Setting the Criteria for Automatic Backup 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 19 Configuration Modifying ISDN Link Profiles Once an ISDN Link Profile is configured using the Automatic Backup Configuration feature phone numbers and Calling IDs need to be entered FrameSaver units with ISDN backup capability can originate or answer calls as needed so b
203. dentify the circuit maximum 255 characters Clear Removes the circuit identifier information November 2000 3 47 Configuration Setting Up ISDN Link Profiles 3 48 For models with ISDN backup capability select ISDN Link Profiles from the ISDN menu to set up the ISDN Link Profiles see Table 3 9 Main Menu gt Configuration gt ISDN gt ISDN Link Profiles Table 3 9 ISDN Link Profile Options 1 of 3 Link Name Possible Settings ASCII Text Entry HQ_Site Default Setting HQ_Site for first link blank for all others Assigns the name to the ISDN link profile It is generally the backup destination for a frame relay link Each profile must have a unique link name If the link name field is blank the link profile will be deleted Use ASCII text 8 characters maximum ASCII Text Entry Assigns a name to identify the ISDN link maximum 255 characters NOTE To prevent confusion do not use the following link names Network Net1 FR1 Port 1 or Port 2 These names will be treated as nonunique and the Link Name Not Unique message appears and you must enter another name HQ_Site The link name configured in the remote site unit originating a backup call for the central site unit answering a backup call One link has a default value of HQ_Site to allow for Automatic Backup Configuration Link Status Possible Settings Auto Disable Default Setting Auto Determines whether the I
204. e Ignore Control Leads November 2000 IN 3 Index E Easy Install feature EDLCI 3 74 3 76 Destination 3 67 3 68 Source EER at ISDN PRI at Network 5 20 6 8 LED linkDown trap EIA 232C COM Port connector EIR enforcement statistics elements DLCls Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI 3 66 3 67 3 68 3 74 3 76 ending a session Enter Return key entering ISDN call profiles entering system information Enterprise Specific Traps enterprise specific traps equipment list Error Event LMI 3 26 3 61 Errors frame relay statistics Esc key ESF Line statistics 5 57 Ethernet Initial Route Destination 3 82 Link Down 5 20 performance statistics port MAC address Ethernet port 3 71 connector pin assign a e default gateway address options even parity Event Log Trap 5 62 6 14 exception points Excess Burst Size Bits 3 64 Excessive Error Rate linkDown trap Error Rate Threshold 3 36 3 47 External Transmit Clock IN 4 November 2000 F faceplate faceplates features field is blank empty file transfer FTP file transfer protocol Session FR Mode LED Frame Delivery Ratio FDR 1 2 Frame Relay assigning time slots configuring interface configuring system Discovery 3 13 3 saving a mode change 3 15 DSOs
205. e TS Management Link If an alternate destination has been configured on a retained Management PVC the alternate destination will be deleted but the primary destination will be retained Response to the Delete All DLCIs and PVC Connections prompt was No and Automatic Backup Configuration was set to Single_Site_Backup or Multi_Site_ Backup Add Alternate Destinations to Current PVC Connections Yes DLCI records are configured on the ISDN link s and Alternate Destination information is added to current PVC connections and management PVCs No No previously configured PVC connections are changed and newly discovered DLCls will be configured according to the new discovery mode and automatic backup setting November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration When the The following prompt appears If you select Response to the Remove Alternate Destinations from PVCs and delete unused DLCI Records prompt was Yes and Automatic Backup Configuration was disabled No No previously configured DLCls ISDN Link Profiles or PVC Connections are removed or changed but updates due to LMI responses will be performed using the new setting Yes All Alternate Destination information will be removed from PVC Connections and Management PVCs and all DLCls and ISDN Link Profiles except for the first one used exclusively as Alternate Destinations are
206. e Packets in Buffer indicates the number of packets that have been captured Up to 8000 packets can be held When the buffer is full the oldest packets will be overwritten 4 To stop the utility press Enter The field toggles back to Start 5 Upload the data file holding the collected packets to a diskette so the information can be transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for debugging decoding See Transferring Collected Data in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance for additional information about this feature 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 6 5 Troubleshooting Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface The twelve most recent LMI events are stored in the trace log Once the capture buffer or trace log is full the oldest packets are overwritten To view the most recently captured packets using the menu driven user interface LMI Packet Capture Utility gt Display LMI Trace Log LMI Trace Log Example main control lmi_capture display_log 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 LMI TRACE LOG Page 1 of 3 Packets Transmitted to Net1 FR Packets Received from Net1 FR1 LMI Record 1 at 0 s Status Enquiry Message 13 bytes LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023 Sequence Number Exchange Send Seq 181 Rcv Seq 177 LMI Record 2 at 0 s Status Enquiry Message 13 bytes LMI Type is Standard on DLCI 1023 Sequence Number Exchange Send Seq 181 Rev Seq 177 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC f
207. e 6 1 Alarm Conditions 6 of 7 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do Self Test Failure The unit did not pass its basic verification tests when it was powered on or reset Reset the unit Contact your service representative SLV Latency Exceeded DLCI nnnn frame relay link 1 2 3 The measured latency of SLV communication responses from the remote unit on this DLCI is excessive so the DLCI has been declared unsuitable for normal multiplexed PVC operation DLCI Type is set to Multiplexed Wait until the DLCI is declared operational again If the unit has ISDN backup capability this condition will initiate backup SLV Timeout DLCI nnnn frame relay link 1 2 3 An excessive number of SLV communication responses from the remote system have been missed on the specified multiplexed DLCI and link If the frame relay link is Net1 FR1 the timeout is on the network FrameRly1 timeslot assignment When a hardware bypass capable device has been detected at the other end of the PVC and this condition occurs only user data for EDLCI 0 will be transmitted as long as the condition exists Verify that the network LMI is up If it is contact your network service provider f a DBM is present and Auto Backup is enabled backup is initiated automatically Suboptimal Link Rate frame relay link The specified frame relay multilink has failed to achieve the co
208. e DSX 1 interface The data received is passed through the network interface channels unchanged November 2000 3 43 Configuration Configuring the ISDN DBM Interface 3 44 For models with ISDN backup capability select Physical from the ISDN menu to configure the physical characteristics for DBM Interface Main Menu gt Configuration gt ISDN Physical When configuring a BR DBM refer to Table 3 7 When configuring a PR DBM refer to Table 3 8 Table 3 7 ISDN BRI DBM Physical Interface Options Interface Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the ISDN interface is available for use Enable The ISDN interface is enabled Disable The ISDN interface cannot be configured nor can it transmit or receive data No PVC connections or frame relay DLCls will be deleted Disabling the ISDN interface results in the following All currently connected ISDN calls are terminated Alarms or traps associated with this interface are not generated or displayed Service Profile ID SPID 1 or 2 Possible Settings 3 20 digits Default Setting Clear Specifies the SPID number assigned by the ISDN service provider for Bearer channel 1 B1 and Bearer channel 2 B2 SPID numbers are used by the switch to identify which ISDN services the DBM can access All blanks is a valid setting 3 20 digits You can enter a SPID number or you can leave bla
209. e command causes the system to enter a payload loopback provided a PLB can be performed in the unit s current state Receiving a PLB Release command terminates the PLB Disable The FrameSaver unit ignores the PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands NOTE When disabled the unit is not in compliance with ANSI T1 403 or AT amp T TR 54016 Network Initiated DCLB Possible Settings Disable V 54_ amp ANSI Default Setting V 54_ amp ANSI Allows the initiation and termination of the Data Channel Loopback DCLB V 54 Loop 2 to be controlled by the receipt of a DCLB actuate or DCLB release sequence either V 54 or FT1 ANSI compliant from the network on the DSOs used for the network frame relay link When enabled and a DCLB activate sequence is received the unit initiates a DCLB on the network interface When a DCLB release sequence is received the DCLB is stopped Disable DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences are ignored V 54_ amp ANSI DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences that comply with either V 54 or ANSI T1 403 Annex B standard will be recognized and will control initiation and termination of a DCLB for the network frame relay link The actuate and release sequences do not need to match for example a DCLB started with a V 54 actuate sequence can be stopped with an FT1 release sequence ANSI Performance Report Messages Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies wh
210. e is only provided if it is known November 2000 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 9 dialControl Traps 2 of 2 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause Dial Control Extension MIB dialCtlIPeerCall Rejected callHistoryPeerld RFC 2128 callHistoryPeerlflndex RFC 2128 callHistoryLogicallflndex RFC 2128 callHistoryPeerAddress RFC 2128 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib A peer to peer call was not successful the call was rejected by the far end ISDN Call Profile has been disabled This units phone number was not in the far end device s ISDN Call Profile String Call on ifString using B Chnl channel rejected by remote RMON Alarm and Event Defaults B 18 The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event information Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor When the threshold set for the monitored variable is exceeded an SNMP trap or a log event is sent Event Defaults Since all events sent are under the control of the FrameSaver unit there is no need to define multiple events for each alarm type so only the following two events need to be generated eventIndex eventDescription eventType eventCommunity 65533 Default SLV Rising Event log and trap 4 0 65534 Default SLV Falling Event log and trap 4 0 The alarm default tables starting on the next
211. e the committed information rate and were dropped in transit Within CIR 1 The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were within within the committed information rate but were dropped in transit Between CIR amp EIR 1 The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate and were dropped in transit Above EIR 1 The number of bytes transmitted by the far end device that were above the excess information rate and were dropped in transit Latest RdTrip Latency Current round trip latency measured in milliseconds between the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI connection Unknown appears if communication with the far end device is not successful Avg RdTrip Latency Average round trip latency measured in milliseconds between the FrameSaver unit and the device at the other end of the multiplexed DLCI connection Average round trip latency is measured every SLV sampling interval and the average is computed using packets with the configured SLV Packet Size bytes Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options over the previous 15 minute period If SLV Packet Size is changed a new average is not available until a new sample has been received Unknown appears if communication with the far end device over the last 15 minutes has not been successful Max RdTrip Latency Same as average
212. e the pin assignments for connecting the FrameSaver SLV 9128 or 9128 II NAM s 8 position communication port to various router auxiliary AUX or console ports using standard cables Cisco 2500 Series Router RJ45 Jack COM Port AUX Port Signal RJ45 Pin Direction RJ45Pin Signal DCE Receive Data DTE Receive Data RXD 2 From DTE 6 RXD DCE Signal Ground DTE Signal Ground SG 4 5 SG DCE Transmit Data DTE Transmit Data TXD To DTE 3 TXD DCE Data Terminal DTE Data Terminal Ready DTR 5 To DTE 2 Ready DTR DCE Request to DTE Request to Send RTS 7 To DTE 1 Send RTS November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Cisco 7000 Series Router DB25 Plug COM Port AUX Port Signal RJ45 Pin Direction DB25Pin Signal DCE Receive Data DTE Receive Data RXD 2 From DTE 3 RXD DCE Signal Ground DTE Signal Ground SG 3 7 SG DCE Transmit Data DTE Transmit Data TXD 4 To DTE 2 TXD DCE Data Terminal DTE Data Terminal Ready DTR 5 To DTE 20 Ready DTR DCE Carrier Detect DTE Carrier Detect CD 6 To DTE 8 CD DCE Request to DTE Request to Send RTS 7 To DTE 4 Send RTS 3COM Router DB9 Socket COM Port AUX Port Signal RJ45 Pin Direction DB25 Pin Signal DCE Receive Data DTE Receive Data RXD 2 From DTE 2 RXD DCE Sign
213. e the reports 3 Save your changes See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about setting FTP configuration options November 2000 4 7 Security and Logins Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Access Management Link 4 8 gt Procedure To limit Telnet or FTP access when the session is on the TS Access Management Link 1 Select the Telnet and FTP Session options Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Disable Telnet Session and or FTP Session as appropriate 3 Return to the Management and Communication menu and select Node IP 4 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable access via the TS Access Management Link TS Access Management Link to None Assign an access level to the TS Access Management Link TS Access Management Link s Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the session e g if a user has a Level 1 login and Level 2 telnet access has been set the Level 1 user can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 5 Save your changes See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support or
214. e to the network No other cause in the normal class applies for this normal event No User 18 Called device does not Contact the network Responding respond to the call with an provider if the cause alert or connect indication continues within the prescribed period of time Internal network timers may be a cause Number Changed 22 Called number is no longer Look in the diagnostic field assigned for the new number then change the phone number in your ISDN link profile November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 12 Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages 5 of 6 9128 A2 GB20 40 Cause Message No What It Indicates What To Do Only Restricted 70 An unrestricted bearer Arrange for the desired Bearer Capability service has been capability Available requested but the device sending the cause only supports the restricted version Outgoing Calls 52 Network is using Call Contact the network Barred Screening provider to turn Call Screening off Pre empted 45 Call has been pre empted Contact the network provider Protocol Error 111 No other cause in the Contact your service Unspecified protocol error class applies representative for this protocol error event Quality of Service 49 Requested Quality of No action is needed Unavailable Service requested cannot be provided e g throughput cannot be supported Recovery of Timer 102 Error handling
215. ect feature provides an easy method of assigning time slots for frame relay data and creating cross connections to the synchronous data interface The system allows you to assign DSOs on the T1 network interface and between the user data port and network interface in order to share the T1 network You can also clear cross connection assignments for the system or for a selected slot or interface NOTE Although it is not required it is suggested that you progress through each screen in order from top to bottom November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Assigning Frame Relay Time Slots to the Network Interface Before assigning network time slots for use by frame relay traffic configure the Network physical and Frame Relay options if needed then allow Time Slot Discovery to autodetect and assign the appropriate time slots to frame relay If there are multiple Frame Relay data links on the network interface or if Time Slot Discovery is not currently active you can manually assign time slots on the network interface for frame relay traffic using the Frame Relay Network Assignments screen This screen is read only when Time Slot Discovery is set to Enable for the network interface Frame Relay Network Time Slot Assignment Screen Example main config tslot_assign frame_relay 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 FRAME RELAY NETWORK 1 ASSIGNMENT Time Slot Discovery Disable NO1 N02 N03 N04 NOS NO6 NO7 Nos Available
216. ected T1 network interface if a Carrier Group Alarm CGA occurs on a T1 network interface DSX 1 to Network Time Slot Assignment Screen Example Page 2 main config tslot_assign dsx 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 DSX 1 TO NETWORK 1 ASSIGNMENTS Page 2 of 2 SIGNALING AND TRUNK CONDITIONING Network 1 Side DSX 1 Side Network 1 Side DSX 1 Side Net1 01 E amp M busy DSX 1 01 E amp M busy Net1 02 E amp M busy DSX 1 01 E amp M busy Net1 03 E amp M busy DSX 1 03 E amp M busy Net1 04 E amp M busy DSX 1 04 E amp M busy Net1 09 None DSX 1 09 None Net1 10 None DSX 1 10 None Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save PgDn PgUp ClearAll VocAssign FrAssign For easy movement between screens select the ErAssign function key to go directly to the Frame Relay Network Assignments screen or the DSXAssign function key to go to the DSX 1 to Network Assignments screen November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Only those DSX 1 to Network assignments from page 1 are displayed on this page from left to right and top to bottom in ascending order by network and time slot When a CGA condition LOS OOF or AIS is declared for a T1 interface the signaling bits being transmitted to the other T1 interface for the DSO are forced to idle for two seconds except for user defined patterns which are transmitted immediately This drops any call in progress The signaling bits are then forced to the s
217. ectories for Trap Dial Out when trap dial out is desired See Setting Up to Use the Modem PassThru Feature if this feature is desired See Limiting Dial In Access via the Modem Port in Chapter 4 Security and Logins for additional information Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out 3 10 gt Procedure 1 Setup directory phone numbers Main Menu gt Control Modem Call Directories 2 Select Directory Number A for Alarm 3 Enter the phone number s Valid characters include For ASCII text Entering the phone number Space Readability characters underscore _ and dash Comma Readability character for a 2 second pause B Blind dialing P Pulse dialing unless B is specified T Tone dialing unless B is specified W Wait for dial tone 4 Save the phone number s November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Setting Up to Use the Modem PassThru Feature 9128 A2 GB20 40 Dial in access to the router is possible via the Modem PassThru feature also known as the Router Assist feature The FrameSaver unit s COM port must be connected to the router s auxiliary AUX or console port and the COM port must be configured for this use When this feature is set up and active a logical connection between the unit s modem and COM ports is made and data received over the modem port is transmitted out the COM port to the router s AUX or console port Whe
218. ed that the secondary clock source is operational again String Secondary clock restored November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 7 enterprise Specific Traps and Variable Bindings 3 of 3 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause enterpriseSelfTest Fail 2 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib Unit has completed re initialization and a hardware failure was detected String Self test failed s s is the contents of devSelfTestResult enterprise Test Start 5 enterprise Test Stop 105 For physical interfaces and frame relay links m iflndex RFC 1573 0 0 placeholder devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib For virtual circuits DLCls devFrExtDicilflndex devFrExt mib devFrExtDiciDlci devFrExt mib devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib At least one test has been started on an interface or virtual circuit String testString test started on ifString e g DTE Loopback test started on Sync Data Port S01P1 All tests have been halted on an interface or virtual circuit String testString test stopped on ifString e g Disruptive PVC Loopback test stopped on DLCI 100 of Sync Data Port S01P1 frame relay November 2000 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Traps RMON Specif
219. ee 5 35 P Routing Tabie piere ticritirre tinain eet bec relearn ice ned 5 45 Perormance SIAUSICS 22 cfc3 hcgbactd db bed Hee irie aieia 5 47 Clearing Performance Statistics 0 c cece eee eee 5 48 Service Level Verification Performance Statistics 5 49 DLC PerormanCe Statisties cicici vadacbians seeasdadewaecaahieds 5 51 Frame Relay Performance Statistics 2 00 ee eee 5 53 ESF Line Performance Statistics 0000s e eee 5 57 DBM Call Performance Statistics 002 0 eee eee eee 5 60 Ethernet Performance Statistics 0066 e eee eee 5 61 AD EVent LOG is iencciid Seiad Sh diets b Secenah dina BAe dearah raa 5 62 Modem Operations re t2ccctetietageet weet cei te bededede Mendenes 5 63 Activating the Modem PassThru Feature 2 0005 5 63 Canceling Modem PassThru Operation 0 00eeeeeeee 5 63 Manually Disconnecting the Modem 0 00eeeeeees 5 64 Verifying Modem Operation 0000c cece eee 5 64 OON DBM ODEON srreieeroter ikt trite tedeetarretretecereedued 5 65 Forcing Backup Dismiptve cii neteiewieeietetingdei wt kiera 5 65 Placing a Test Call Nondisruptive 0002 cece eee 5 66 Verifying ISDN LINES scsccctactedciaaiesne uedaamew en edama ed 5 67 Verifying That Backup Can Take Place 00eeee eae 5 67 Pie File Tanso S irate icahtschhed batt shba dh GbeE donde diw seein eee 5 68 Upgrading System Software
220. ee Table 3 12 DLCI Record Options the letter designation assigned to the group of DLCls appears next to the primary destination DLCI number on the Management PVCs Options screen 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number Primary Destination EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the primary destination Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLCI for a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a connection Display Conditions This option only appears when the Primary Destination DLC contains a multiplexed DLCI record number 0 62 Specifies the EDLC number November 2000 3 67 Configuration 3 68 Table 3 13 PVC Connection Options 3 of 3 Alternate Destination Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 ISDN Link Name Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface used as the alternate destination link the to end of a from to link that is used for backup when the primary destination link or DLCI is out of service The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI defined which are not part of a PVC connection or management link For example if ISDN Link Name has no DLCls defined the ISDN link name would not appear as a valid setting Net1 FR1 Specifies the Network interface as the destination l
221. eeded to monitor network service levels plus throughput with accurate data delivery network latency and LMI and PVC availability Continuous roundtrip latency testing and reporting as well as CIR to transmitted and received data performance statistics are included In addition port bursting statistics are kept for all frame relay links for accurate calculation of utilization RMON User History Performance Statistics via SNMP Polling Provides access to the physical interface and basic frame relay performance statistics by polling the FrameSaver unit using SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol These statistics are available real time via the Enterprise MIB and historically as an RMON2 User History object Frame Relay Traffic Policing Ensures proper alignment and correlation of CIR Committed Information Rate values between the FrameSaver unit and the network switch When this feature is enabled the unit can enforce CIR and EIR Excess Information Rate marking frames that exceed CIR as DE Discard Eligible using the same method used by the switch November 2000 1 5 About the FrameSaver SLV Service Provider Support Provides information and tools useful to network service providers which includes the following IP Routing Table Shows the IP routing table for the FrameSaver unit with network as well as host routes the number of hops to the destination the method by which the route was added to the table the interf
222. eee 3 4 Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options 3 5 Changing Configuration OpllONns cccnciccrecseteieetaeswteb cers 3 6 Saving Configuration OptionS 0 60 cc eee eee 3 7 m Using the Easy Install Feature 00000 e cece eee eens 3 8 Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP 222 0 eee 3 9 Entering System Information and Setting the System Clock 3 9 a Setting Up the MOdEMi ris 2 200 450 e0 r00075404 07e5secencepeces 3 10 Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out 3 10 Setting Up to Use the Modem PassThru Feature 3 11 m Setting Up Auto Configuration 0 0 ccc cece cece nee 3 12 Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode 0005 3 13 Automatically Removing a Circuit 0 0 cece eee eee 3 15 E Setting Up Dial Backup sc 2 cieneeteetehne eile Siedeaieat eee es 3 16 Setting Up the DBM Physical Interface 2 2 0005 3 16 Setting Up Automatic Backup Configuration 3 17 Modifying ISDN Link Profiles 2022 0 sscceocan0ssiadeveaa nii hni 3 20 Restricting Automatic Backup and Configuring Backup Timers 3 21 Configuring the DBM Interface to Send SNMP Traps 3 22 Assigning DLCls to a Backup Group 000 cece eee eens 3 22 m PVC Backup Over the Network Interface 000 cece eee eee 3 23 m Setting Up Back to Back Operation 0 cece cece
223. eens ix E Docuitisnht OFGaNiZaONn dc scrrsiniacisssriadvtaedtotiadatasdandadus ix m Product Related Documents 000 cece ence ee eee eee xi E Conventions Uod 2 22 94 diss diasydt Md ddd oar betii xii 1 About the FrameSaver SLV SVEM OVOCE W rii terate ertor EE EIN EEIE ERER Ahi 1 1 FrameSaver SLV Features lt ciioscanieeirraearigerarseregepeeoe ved 1 2 Additional FrameSaver SLV 9128 Features 0005 1 6 FrameSaver SLV 9128 Il Only Features 00005 1 7 OpenlLane SLM Systeme sericea denwa ieee ad eeeaeead sedewae i 1 7 NetScout Manager Plus and NetScout Probes 005 1 8 2 User Interface and Basic Operation 9128 A2 GB20 40 LOGGING OM n02c4 pnge treia theret kE page E EEE ES i 2 2 MAn MEM errre c npge tb bded tratah kE eE E E E a eaa 2 4 Screen Work ArGAS a6 tcscw ssi h acieetida gradient RA a 2 5 Navigating the SChGNS acnctaciics meahiididasiehdigudata sanegeees 2 6 Keyboard KEYS ai 24h dt dae iinn a hohe Hudak Sach Subba sys 2 6 PUNCHON KGYS 2cs c7 su wtladnienihihbhe riii rii rii r 2 7 Selecting front a Menu cidsccepseeritond mater eieetatderhinesis 2 8 Switching Between Screen Areas 00 cc cece eee eee 2 8 Selcinga Field csccaucadie id Mabe aie iaio a ER 2 9 Entering MO Mmao aesae a ai 2 9 November 2000 Contents 3 ii Configuration W Basici Conngurauon i ccccisacan cance dire raven dariadaeiasenaaded 3 3 Configuration Option Areas 0c cece eee
224. eived on the ISDN network interface Active Backup call was in progress Idle DBM was in Idle mode Indicates a possible cable problem Yellow at Network 1 A yellow alarm signal is received on the network interface Possible reasons include Network cable problem T1 facility problem November 2000 5 25 Operation and Maintenance 5 26 Test Status Messages These test messages appear in the right column of the System and Test Status screen You have the option of allowing the test to continue or aborting the test See Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for more information on tests including how to start and stop them Table 5 8 Test Status Messages 1 of 2 Message What It Indicates DCLB Active frame_relay_link or DCLB Active Port 2 A Data Channel V 54 Loopback DCLB is active on the specified frame relay link or Port 2 DTE External LB Active Port n An external DTE Loopback is active on the user data port DTE Init Ext LB Active Port n An external DTE Loopback is active on the user data port DTPLB Active Port n A Data Terminal Payload Loopback DTPLB is active on the user data port Lamp Test Active The Lamp Test is active causing the LEDs on the faceplate to flash on and off LLB Active Interface A network Line Loopback LLB is active on the specified network DSX 1 or ISDN PRI interface No Test Active No tests
225. elected state Busy or Idle and remain in this state until the CGA condition clears At this point the received signaling bits from the T1 interface which formerly had the CGA condition are passed through to the other T1 interface NOTE Trunk conditioning will only occur on DSOs that are cross connected to another T1 interface All other DSOs remain unaffected by trunk conditioning Enter one of the values shown in Table 3 10 in each of the fields on both the Network side and the DSX 1 side Although you can choose any value for the DSX 1 side the default value displayed is based on a typical setting that would be used with the corresponding Network side value Typical pairs of values are shown in the table below If you change the Network side value the DSX side value is changed to the corresponding default value Table 3 10 Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values 1 of 3 Network Side Meaning DSX 1 Side None No signaling used on this DSO Use this setting if None there is no voice signaling information being passed on this DSO clear channel RBS default Robbed Bit Signaling is used on this DSO but no RBS trunk conditioning Signaling bits will be passed to the T1 interface to which this DSO is cross connected when this T1 interface is not in CGA but the signaling bits will be all ones when CGA is present The following values configure the cross connect for RBS as well as perform the trunk condition
226. en Save is complete the cursor is repositioned at the Login ID field ready for another entry See Configuring SNMP NMS Security in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about security configuration options 4 12 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Security and Logins Modifying a Login Logins are modified by deleting the incorrect login and creating a new one Deleting a Login gt Procedure To delete a login record 1 Select Administer Logins Main Menu gt Control gt Administer Logins 2 Page through login pages records using the PgUp or PgDn function keys until the login to be deleted is displayed 3 Select Delete 4 Save your deletion When the deletion is complete the number of login pages records reflects one less record and the record before the deleted record reappears Example Page 2 of 4 is changed to Page 2 of 3 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 4 13 Security and Logins 4 14 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance This chapter includes the following Displaying System Information m Viewing LEDs and Control Leads FrameSaver SLV 9126 LEDs and Control Leads FrameSaver SLV 9128 9128 Il LEDs and Control Leads LED Descriptions Control Lead Descriptions m Device Messages Status Information System and Test Status Message Network LMI Reported DLCls Status PVC Connection Status Time Slot Assignment Status DBM Interface Status
227. en made and the link is successfully passing LMI data m AFrame Relay Link Suboptimal message indicates that at least one call has been made on the link the link is successfully passing LMI data but the Maximum Link Rate configured in the ISDN Link Profile has not been achieved for the link m AFrame Relay Link Down message indicates that the call attempts were not successful NOTE Primary network data is not affected by a test call If there is a network failure while a test call is active the test call is terminated and the call is automatically converted to a backup call 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 6 25 Troubleshooting Physical Tests 6 26 Physical tests require the participation of your network service provider Main Menu gt Test gt Network Physical Tests Data Port Physical Tests DSX 1 Physical Tests PRI Physical Tests If the unit does not have the ISDN PRI DBM feature PRI Physical Tests does not appear A FrameSaver unit s physical tests screen for the network interface is shown below Physical Tests Screen Example main test network 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 NETWORK 1 PHYSICAL TESTS Test Command Status Results Local Loopbacks Line Loopback Inactive Payload Loopback Inactive Repeater Loopback Inactive Remote Loopbacks Send Line Loopback Down Inactive Pattern Tests Send user defined 0a0a Active Errors 99999 Monitor user defined 0a0a Active E
228. enance for additional information about ISDN problems Last Cause Value messages appear on the DBM Interface Status screen Main Menu Status DBM Interface Status See Configuring the ISDN DBM Interface and Setting Up ISDN Link Profiles in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about ISDN DBM configuration 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 6 17 Troubleshooting Tests Available The following tests are available to a FrameSaver SLV 9126 9128 or 9128 Il Test Menu Example main test 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 TEST Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests ISDN Call PVC Tests Network Physical Tests Data Port Physical Tests DSX 1 Physical Tests PRI Physical Tests IP Ping Lamp Test Abort All Tests Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit If the unit does not have the ISDN DBM feature ISDN Call does not appear with the ISDN PVC Tests PRI Physical Tests only appears when an ISDN PRI DBM is installed PVC Tests menu selections are suppressed when no PVCs have been configured on the interface Check that both ends of the cables are properly seated and secured Tests can be commanded from the OpenLane 5 x management system using its Diagnostic Troubleshooting graphical interface as well as from the menu driven user interface 6 18 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Troubleshooting Test Timeout Feature DBM Tests 9128 A2 GB20 40 A Test Timeou
229. enu driven user interface Configuration Provides configuration information for the FrameSaver SLV 9126 and 9128 9128 Il Security and Logins Provides procedures for controlling access to the FrameSaver SLV and setting up logins Operation and Maintenance Provides procedures to display unit identification information and perform file transfers as well as how to display and interpret status and statistical information Troubleshooting Provides device problem resolution alarm and other information as well as troubleshooting and test procedures November 2000 ix About This Guide Section Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Index Description Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices Identifies where installation and setup information is located and how FrameSaver units are supported Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Describes setup of the NetScout Manager Plus application so it supports FrameSaver units and so you can change alarm and history file defaults Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Describes setup of Concord s Network Health application so reports can be created for FrameSaver units and identifies those reports that apply to FrameSaver units Menu Hierarchy Contains a graphical representation of how the user interface screens are organized SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Iden
230. er_history_table_number config number_of_buckets interval download_file udh to load user defined history files for a specific DLCI Example dvuhist f Dallas51 301 3 config 30 60 Dallas301 udh The same user history table number can be used for both the link and DLCI For these examples user history table number 3 will appear as UserHistory3 on the History List See Step 5 in Monitoring a DLCI s History Data to verify that the user defined history files have been loaded Refer to Installing UDH Files in Using Custom History of the NetScout Manager Plus User Guide for additional information November 2000 8 15 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Monitoring a DLCI s History Data 8 16 Once the monitoring variables have been defined a problem DLCI can monitored gt Procedure To monitor user history data 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay radio button still selected select the Traffic radio button The appropriate icons appear Highlight an agent in the agent list box so that its DLCls appear in the DLCI list box under the agent list box Highlight the DLCI to be monitored Click on the Custom History icon The NetScout Custom History window opens Adjust the size of the window so the entire report can be viewed NetScout Custom History GrenadaS1 DLCI 301 NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 Interval 60 Seconds File Yiew Fo
231. erature Relative humidity Shock and vibration 32 F to 122 F 0 C to 50 C 4 F to 158 F 20 C to 70 C 5 to 85 noncondensing Withstands normal shipping and handling November 2000 D 1 Technical Specifications D 2 Table D 1 NAM Technical Specifications 2 of 3 Specification Criteria Physical Dimensions NAM Height 8 inches 20 32 cm Depth 11 58 inches 29 41 cm I O Card Height 10 15 inches 25 78 cm Depth 2 9 inches 7 37 cm Weight NAM 1 Ib 2 oz 51 kg I O Card 6 oz 17 kg Power Consumption and Dissipation 9 5 watts 0 080A at 120 VAC Result 32 Btu per hour COM Port Interface Communications Management Standard Data rates 8 position unkeyed modular jack EIA 232 ITU V 24 ISO 2110 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 and 115 2 kbps T1 Network Interface Data rates Services supported Physical interface USA Physical interface Canada Framing format Coding format Line Build Out LBO ANSI PRM Bit stuffing 8 position unkeyed modular USOC RJ48C jack Up to 1 536 Mbps Fractional T1 service frame relay service RJ48C CA81A using adapter cable D4 ESF AMI B8ZS 0 0 dB 7 5 dB 15 dB 22 5 dB Selectable AT amp T TR 62411 DSX 1 Interface Framing format Coding format DTE line equalization Send AIS 8 position modular connector with 8 position modular to DB15 adapter D Sub 15 socket D4
232. erface setting timers and thresholds verifying setup November 2000 IN 1 Index Bc 3 64 Committed Burst Size Bc Bits Be 3 64 Committed Information Rate CIR Bearer channel Communication Port user interface options 3 88 BECN ISDN backup Community Name Bit Stuffing assigning BKP LED Concord s Network Health blank field value compatibility branches menus Configuration Auto Active displaying and changing options FTP transfer rate bursting port C menu Call menu branch option areas 3 4 Directories is tables Retry saving options Status tables Caller eee configuring ID added SLV units elements Identification Method 3 50 4 5 DBM canceling Modem PassThru interface to Send traps Cause Value messages DLCI records manually central clock frame relay options CGA modem port 3 92 changing NetScout Manager Plus auto configuration 3 18 network interface System options the system connecting to a PC terminal or printer automatic backup configuration SLV options configuration options domains and groups operating mode software release Connectivity test Channel Loopback Control Character keys Length lead descriptions matching Leads Ignore CIR menu branch enforcement Control Leads and LEDs displaying statistics controlling 3 36 3 47 Ci
233. ernate Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the alternate subnet mask needed to access the unit Only in effect when the modem port is configured as a network communication link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the modem port which you can view or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the modem port and fills the address with zeros When the node subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 95 Configuration Configuring the Criteria for Automatic Backup For units with an ISDN DBM follow this menu selection sequence to specify whether and when automatic backup is allowed and to configure timers that will control and terminate backup or set delays see Table 3 23 Main Menu gt Configuration Auto Backup Criteria Table 3 23 Auto Backup Criteria Options 1 of 2 Auto Backup Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether backup for the access unit is automatically performed when the primary physical link or LMI or a DLCI on a PVC connection fails or when latency is exceeded When e
234. ers can be entered in the Login ID and Password fields Case sensitive Yes An asterisk appears in the password field for each character entered November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 User Interface and Basic Operation If your login was Then the Valid Main Menu appears Begin your session NOTE If your login is valid but access is denied there are two currently active sessions Invalid Message Invalid Password appears on line 24 and the Login screen is redisplayed After three unsuccessful attempts A Telnet session is closed The User Interface Idle screen appears for a directly connected terminal The internal modem connection is disconnected An SNMP trap is generated Access is denied See your system administrator to verify your login Login ID Password combination FrameSaver units support two sessions simultaneously If two sessions are currently active wait and try again m If two sessions are currently active and you are attempting to access the unit through Telnet the local Telnet client process returns a Connection refused message at the bottom of the screen m If two sessions are currently active and you are attempting to access the unit over the COM port or modem port not via Telnet the User Interface Already In Use screen is redisplayed In addition the type of connection Telnet Connection Direct COM Port Connection or Direct Modem Po
235. erties File must be edited November 2000 8 5 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Correcting Domains and Groups Properties need to be edited when not using the Paradyne provided file and when Anunsupported domain needs to be deleted A missing domain needs to be added Groups Samples Interval and Logging are not configured as specified in Step 3 of Verifying Domains and Groups B gt Procedure 1 Select the the Property button down the center of the Configuration Manager main window The Property Editor window opens Property Editor Shared Type FrameRelay Samples Interval Logging Tomain Groups SH LH SH LH Stat Host Conv oo oso co eccococe o ececococeco 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Trap Variable Rising Falling Add Edit Delete 2 To delete an unsupported domain click on the domain from the Domains list then select the Delete button The Are you sure prompt appears Select Yes The unsupported domain disappears from the list 8 6 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices 3 To add a FrameSaver SLV supported domain or correct property settings select the Edit button to the right of the Domain section of the Property Editor window The Edit Domain window opens Edit Domain Domains Logging DLCLPart List Stats Enable Disable Hosts Enable 4 Disable
236. est pattern A aborting tests Access Dial In Easy 3 8 Level Port Name to another device s interface 5 63 security Session Action on Network Yellow Alarm activating Modem PassThru adding SLV units to network AIS alarm condition at DSX 1 or Network at ISDN PRI LED linkDown trap Alarm Fail 5 7 5 8 adding manually 8 11 conditions 6 2 6 7 configurable thresholds editing 8 9 LED is lit Relay turning off ALM LED Alternate Dial Out Directory 3 85 IP Address Outbound Phone Number software revision Subnet Mask 9128 A2 GB20 40 Alternate Destination Annex A and D LMI Protocol ANSI Performance Report Messages 3 35 3 46 ANSI T1 403 Annex B FT1 Channel Loopback ARP inverse Proxy assign DSX 1 time slots frame relay time slots synchronous data port time slots and cross connections assigning community names and access levels 4 10 DLCls to a Backup Group At a Glance report authentificationFailure trap Auto Backup Criteria restricting Auto Configuration Active setting up availability LMI and PVC 2 4 B back door access when locked out Back to Back Mode Active 5 19 operation setting up 3 23 Backspace Backup Active 5 19 assigning DLCls to a group 3 22 auto changing automatic configuration ISDN manually forcing over network int
237. ests ISDN PVC Loopback DTE PVC x ISDN DBM ISDN PVC x Po e m Network 98 16188 November 2000 6 23 Troubleshooting Send Pattern Monitor Pattern 6 24 This test sends packets filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence number over the selected interface and DLCI to another FrameSaver device To send a pattern test on a link Main Menu gt Test gt Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests ISDN Call PVC Tests If the selected And the default DLCI is configured as Then Rate kbps setting is Standard Disruptive 100 of CIR appears after Test Multiplexed Non Disruptive 10 of CIR appears after Test If the CIR is zero the pattern will be sent at a rate of 1000 bps This test monitors packets filled with a hexadecimal 55 test pattern and sequence number over the selected interface and DLCI to another FrameSaver device To monitor a pattern test on a link Main Menu gt Test gt Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests ISDN Call PVC Tests The current number of sequence and data errors are shown under the Result column when the FrameSaver unit is in sync An Out of Syne message appears when 5 frames out of 25 are missing or out of sequence These error counts are updated every second If the maximum count is reached 99999 appears in these fields November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Troubleshooting Connectivit
238. et 5 18 changing 5 72 messages ISDN pr pEM 571 Name Contact and Location downloading setting the clock data amp time 3 9 revision DBM NAM T Source T1 DLCI Canadian line interface cable C 13 EDLCI LMI Heartbeat 3 27 3 62 Link mass termination cable Spacebar network cable C 12 C 13 specifications technical network interface options SPID 3 44 D 7 T2 LMI Inbound Heartbeat 3 27 3 62 Standard_out RIP T3 LMI N4 Measurement Period 3 27 3 62 standards compliance for SNMP Traps starting a session a test technical specifications er i Telnet call limitin 4 B ie intervals for display 5 57 Session 48 selecting performance intervals for display 5 i E uploading to an NMS 5 73 user interface options 3 77 IN 10 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Terminal COM port cable Port Use 3 88 3 92 Test Call 6 25 menu branch Mode Status messages DBM Tests aborting available Connectivity 6 25 Data Channel Loopback DBM DTE Loopback Duration IP Ping Lamp Line Loopback pattern Payload Loopback physical PVC PVC Loopback Remote Line Loopback 6 31 6 33 Repeater Loopback Send Monitor Pattern starting or stopping Test Call Timeout throughput time setting time slot assignments synchronous data port to network or DSX 1 time slots 3 50 Timeout Inactivit
239. ete a DLCI then create the new DLCI Record No Primary Destination Link DLCls Available New or Modify was selected from the PVC Connection Table but even though DLCls are available to form a connection no DLCls are available on the network link which is a suitable Primary PVC Destination Configure additional DLCls for the network link and try again If a network DLCI has been entered as a Source DLCI 1 Change the Source DLCI to a user data port DLCI 2 Enter the network DLCI as the PVC s Primary Destination No Security Records to Delete Delete was selected from the Administer Login screen and no security records had been defined No action needed Enter a security record Password Matching Error Re enter Password Password entered in the Re enter Password field of the Administer Logins screen does not match what was entered in the Password field Try again Contact your system administrator to verify your password November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance 9128 A2 GB20 40 Table 5 5 Device Messages 5 of 6 Message What It Indicates What To Do Permission Denied A file transfer was attempted but the Seen at an FTP terminal User did not have See your system administrator Level 1 security to get your security level changed Wrong file was specified Try again entering the correct when
240. ether ANSI T1 403 compliance performance report messages PRMs are generated and sent to the network over the ESF facility data link every second Display Conditions This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF Enable Generates and sends PRMs Disable Does not generate and send PRMs 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 35 Configuration Table 3 4 Network Physical Interface Options 4 of 4 Excessive Error Rate Threshold Possible Settings 10E 4 10E 5 10E 6 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 Default Setting 10E 4 Sets the error rate threshold that determines when an EER condition is declared The excessive error rate is determined by the ratio of the number of CRC6 errors to the total number of bits received over a set period of time Display Conditions This option only appears when Line Framing Format is set to ESF 10E 4 Declares an EER if more than 1 535 CRC6 errors are detected in a 10 second period Clears when fewer than 1 536 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 5 Declares an EER if more than 921 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 922 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 6 Declares an EER if more than 92 CRCE6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 1075 or 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 93 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period
241. etwork interface or any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous assigned to this interface Send V 54 or FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous and assigned to this network interface November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Troubleshooting Repeater Loopback The Repeater Loopback RLB loops data received from the data ports and the DSX 1 interface after the signal has passed through the framing circuitry Use RLB to ensure that all of the data is correct up to the point where it is sent over the interface This helps to indicate that the FrameSaver unit is operational Main Menu gt Test Network Physical Tests An attached device or test equipment should generate and monitor data to be looped back Oth Framer lt __ er 4 t T1 RLB AIS ee Interface gt a pares l 97 15338 The FrameSaver unit will not respond to any messages from the network during this test CAUTION This test may affect operation of frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected interface While in loopback the frame relay link will be down so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted An RLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active m Payload Loopback Send Remote Line Loopback or an active Monitor Pattern on this network interface m All loopbacks on any other T1 interface with DSOs assigned to this network inter
242. ety dike Hh oboe eee bow Ried 6 18 Test Timeout Featur otccicacieeds ie otiinedeiawieiaededeud te 6 19 DBM EStSisd iidaesediecedes sed ai 6 19 Starting and Stopping a Test wccccccacsccadecanwsadacioadaws dawn 6 20 Aborting All ests icpeercee crc yeerr peer ari EEEN EEE E ces 6 21 PYG TOSE ccosonpeneeacperphoeenneecieesl nedeugpede naeemegieaied 6 22 PVC LOOPDACK sakaadsntacawacscea cm weadea a ecm NEUER 6 23 Send PANG sccpatacs casing hid coemngadwigaeomngaeeadaamannes 6 24 MONIOF Pale Mica sanis ncaa Laan ssinne Paci a n peewee be 6 24 CONNEC arisa teia aa ree eara EEEE V 6 25 Test Galareeroree tedma hereu hides irrien eeehe eE bee 6 25 Physical Tesis seic ceaectskiedeouctexiota ee tiee u O E ee 6 26 Line Loopback lt wtrscidilaasatcatadeadecaaeaenieaceaadaseaas 6 27 Payload Loopa k si 26 c5 chahitndie din ien nA 6 28 Repeater Loopoa k ci10c nnpeerreerserererparerieenrieaneyeaes 6 29 DTE LOOPDACK 2264 55 04 n09eerhieiterepnrpeitepaeeteeetepedes 6 30 Send Line Loopback cic1 cicic ieienestaw teeeeaetaweedaeend 6 31 Data Channel Loopbacks on a Frame Relay Link 6 32 Send Remote Line Loopback 0 00 ce eeee eee eee 6 33 Send and Monitor Pattern Tests 0 0c cece eee eee 6 34 PFNO Test tase haee tie ibnee pitii iiid praia i ekien 6 35 u Lamp TeSisrrrerinirsiia aiae aeaa i 6 36 November 2000 v Contents 7 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices m OpenLane Support of FrameSaver Devices
243. f the FrameSaver SLV unit s menu organization The following menu structures are shown FrameSaver SLV 9126 Menu Hierarchy see page A 2 FrameSaver SLV 9128 and 9128 1 Menu Hierarchy see page A 4 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 Menu Hierarchy FrameSaver SLV 9126 Menu Hierarchy Status System and Test Status Self Test Results Last System Reset e Health and Status Test Status PVC Tests DLCI Number e PVC Loopback Send Pattern Monitor Pattern Connectivity e Test Call System and Test Status LMI Reported DLCls PVC Connection Status Timeslot Assignment Status DBM Interface Status IP Routing Table Performance Statistics Trap Event Log MAIN MENU Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control Easy Install Display LEDs and Control Leads Identity LMI Reported DLCls DLCI Status CIR bps Timeslot Assignment Status Network Timeslot Status DSX 1 Timeslot Status PVC Connection Status e Source Link DLCI EDLC Primary Destination Link DLCI EDLCI Status Alternate Destination Link DLCI EDLCI Status Identity System NAM DBM Trap Event Log e Number of Trap Events Time Elapsed Since Event Event MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control Easy Install Test lt PVC Tests Network Data Port ISDN Call Physical Tests Network Data Port
244. face Send Pattern Test on this network interface or any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous assigned to this interface m Send V 54 or FT1 Loopback or Data Channel Loopback on any synchronous data port Port Use set to Synchronous assigned to this network interface 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 6 29 Troubleshooting DTE Loopback The DTE external Loopback DTLB test loops the received signal on a DTE interface back to the DTE without affecting the operation of the remaining ports Use this test for isolating problems on the DTE interface Main Menu gt Test gt Data Port Physical Tests An attached device or test equipment must generate data to be looped back DSX Network Interface Interface __ DTLB DTLB DTE DTE Port 2 Port 1 98 16190 CAUTION This test may affect operation of frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected port Any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted 6 30 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Troubleshooting Send Line Loopback 9128 A2 GB20 40 The remote Line Loopback LLB up and down codes are in band codes that allow control of a remote device The LLB Up code invokes a line loopback in the remote unit while the LLB Down code terminates the remote line loopback Network loopbacks are defined in AT amp T TR 62411 A remote LLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active m Any Loopback on the same interface Send Pattern Test
245. face Table ifTable NetScout Indexes to the Interface Table ifTable Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps Trap warmStart Trap authenticationFailure Traps linkUp and linkDown Traps enterprise Specific Traps RMON Specific Traps dialControl RMON Alarm and Event Defaults Physical Interface Alarm Defaults Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area m Object ID Cross References Numeric Order 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 B 1 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults MIB Support The FrameSaver unit supports the SNMP Version 1 and has the capability of being managed by any industry standard SNMP manager and accessed by external SNMP managers using SNMP protocol The following MIBs are supported MIB II RFC 1213 and RFC 1573 m Frame Relay DTEs MIB RFC 2115 m DS1 E1 MIB RFC 1406 m RS 232 Like MIB RFC 1659 m Frame Relay Service MIB RFC 1604 Enterprise MIB m Dial Control MIB using SMIv2 RFC 2128 RMON Version 1 MIB RFC 1757 RMON Version 2 MIB RFC 2021 Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps Paradyne standard and enterprise MIBs are available from the Paradyne World Wide Web site gt Procedure To access Paradyne MIBs 1 Access the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www paradyne com 2 Select Technical Support 3 Select Management Information Base MIBs The download procedure may vary
246. faults that change when the interface s line speed changes The thresholds for these alarms can be edited using NetScout Manager Plus so they match the values in the SLA between the customer and service provider Up to eight alarms per interface are allowed Any additional alarms are added to the Paradyne Area alarms and they cannot be changed using NetScout software See Editing Alarms in Chapter 8 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 B 23 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 12 Static DLCI Alarm Defaults NetScout Area Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Current Latency A MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 60 secs None Must be 0 Tag devFrExtLatencyLatest timin configured OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 7 1 D Average Latency A MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs None Must be 0 Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg ee mins COnngUIE Gs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1 D Frames Received D MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs None Must be 0 RFC 2115 1 min configured Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 1 D Frames Sent D MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs None Must be 0 RFC 2115 1 min configured Tag frCircuitSentFrames OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D Tx Frames D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 60 secs None Must be 0 Exceeding CIR Tag devFrExt
247. fies the number of transitions allowed between Active and Inactive status Backup Restoration Delay sec Possible Settings 0 3600 Default Setting 0 Specifies the number of seconds the unit will wait after all backup alarm conditions have cleared for a primary destination DLCI before the backup connection is terminated 0 3600 Specifies the amount of time for the delay 3 96 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration 9128 A2 GB20 40 Table 3 23 Auto Backup Criteria Options 2 of 2 When Auto Backup Allowed Possible Settings Always Restrict Default Setting Always Determines when backup for the access unit is allowed to occur Always No restrictions on backup Restrict Backup is restricted to the day and time selected in the following configuration options Use this selection when the importance of the data that you are backing up is day time dependent Backup Allowed Day From nn nn Possible Settings 00 00 23 00 None Default Setting 00 00 Specifies the time that Auto Backup can begin for a selected day of the week in increments of 1 hour Day is Monday through Sunday 00 00 23 00 Specifies the time of day that Auto Backup will start for this particular day None Auto Backup cannot occur on this day Backup Allowed Day To nn nn Possible Settings 00 00 24 00 Default Setting 24 00 Specifies the time that Auto Bac
248. figuration file to the factory cfg or current cfg files under the system directory Configuration files should be put to a customer file cust1 cfg or cust2 cfg then loaded into the downloaded unit s Current Configuration via the menu driven user interface m You can only put a NAM program file nam ocd into a FrameSaver unit You cannot get a program file from the FrameSaver unit to a host Before putting a download file you must use the bin binary command to place the data connection in binary transfer mode m When transferring SLV user history information to the NMS you can only get a uhbcfull dat file It is recommended that you use the NMS application to get this information see Transferring Collected Data A data file uhbcfull dat or Imitrace syc cannot be put into a FrameSaver node LMI packet capture data Imitrace syc is not readable when the LMI Packet Capture Utility is active FrameSaver SLV units provide an additional feature that allows new software to be downloaded in the background using the selected bandwidth and without interfering with normal operation Downloads can be performed quickly using the full line speed or at a slower rate over an extended period of time You initiate an FTP session to a FrameSaver node in the same way as you would initiate an FTP to any other IP addressable device NOTE Loading a configuration with many DLCls from a unit s Customer Configuration 1 or 2 option area i
249. for enterpriseSpecific events Disable Does not send trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events Link Traps Possible Settings Disable Up Down Both Default Setting Both Determines whether SNMP linkDown or linkUp traps are sent to the currently configured trap manager s A linkDown trap indicates that the unit recognizes a failure in one of the interfaces A linkUp trap indicates that the unit recognizes that one of its interfaces is active Use the Link Traps Interface and the DLCI Traps on Interface configuration options to specify which interface will monitor linkUp and linkDown traps messages Disable Does not send linkDown or linkUp trap messages Up Sends trap messages for linkUp events only Down Sends trap messages for linkDown events only Both Sends trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events Link Traps Interfaces Possible Settings Network DSX 1 Tis Ports DBM All Default Setting All Specifies which interfaces will generate linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific trap messages These traps are not supported on the COM port or Modem port Network Generates these trap messages on the network interface only DSX 1 For applicable T1 FrameSaver units generates these trap messages on the DSX 1 interface only T1s For applicable T1 FrameSaver units generates these trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on both the T1 network and
250. forced into backup Verify the ISDN lines by checking the DBM Interface Status Main Menu Status DBM Interface Status Line Status should be Active If an invalid Inv status e g Inv SPID is displayed verify that you entered ISDN physical options correctly Check backup setup and that data can be passed between DBMs Reconnect the network cable See Table 5 7 Health and Status Messages Viewing LEDs and Control Leads and DBM Call Performance Statistics for additional information 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 5 67 Operation and Maintenance FTP File Transfers 5 68 The FrameSaver unit supports a standard File Transfer Protocol FTP server over Transmission Control Protocol TCP A complete binary image of the configuration files can be copied to a host to provide a backup To use this feature the unit must be configured to support Telnet and FTP Sessions Using this feature you can transfer configuration files to from a FrameSaver node program files fo a FrameSaver node and User History data froma FrameSaver node through a user data port or the network interface using a management PVC or through the COM port Be aware of the following rules when doing a file transfer You must have Access Level 1 permission to use the put and get commands and to access the LMI packet capture data However you can retrieve the data file for the user history reports regardless of access level You cannot put a con
251. g 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 18 1 Rx Illegal Frames MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxllFrames 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 19 1 Total Tx Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotTxErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 20 1 Total Rx Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotRxErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 32 1 Total LMI Errors MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkTotLMIErrs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 2 1 N Port Burst Upper Limits 1 4 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkUtilUpLimit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 3 1 N Rx Port Burst Octets 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkUtilRxOctets 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 10 3 1 4 1 N Tx Port Burst Octets 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkUtilTxOctets 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size See Table B 15 on page B 32 for an RMON alarm OID cross reference 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 B 31 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 15 Alarm OID Cross Reference 1 of 3 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 18 9 1
252. g problem T1 facility problem Check that the framing format for the network interface is correct Check that the network cable is securely attached at both ends Contact your network provider Power Supply Fan Alarm The power supply output voltage has dropped below the specified tolerance level required for the system Or one or both fan trays are not operating properly Check the LEDs on the power supply and fan trays to determine which may have failed then replace the failed component Primary Clock Failed A failure of the configured primary clock source for the unit was detected and the secondary clock is providing the timing for the unit This condition clears when the configured primary clock is restored Primary amp Secondary Clocks Failed A failure of both clock sources configured for the unit was detected This condition only applies to T1 network and DSX 1 interfaces It clears when the configured primary clock is restored Secondary Clock Failed A failure of the configured secondary clock source for the unit was detected and the internal clock is providing the timing for the unit The clock source will not automatically switch from internal until the primary clock source returns Check that the network cable is securely attached at both ends Contact your network provider November 2000 6 11 Troubleshooting 6 12 Tabl
253. guration option for applications where data is being transported using HDLC protocol whereby inverting the data ensures that the ones density requirements for the network are met Display Conditions This option only appears for Port 2 on a FrameSaver SLV 9128 or 9128 II when Port Use is set to Synchronous Data Enable Inverts the transmitted and received data for the port Disable Does not invert the transmitted and received data for the port 3 40 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 5 Data Port Physical Interface Options 5 of 5 Action on Network Yellow Alarm Possible Settings None Halt Default Setting Halt Specifies the action to take on the synchronous data port when a yellow alarm is received on the network interface A yellow alarm indicates a problem with the signal being transmitted to the network Display Conditions This option only appears for Port 2 on a FrameSaver SLV 9128 or 9128 II when Port Use is set to Synchronous Data None No action taken when a yellow alarm is received Halt Halts the transmission of data received on the synchronous data port and all ones are sent on circuit BB ITU 104 Receive Data RD and circuit CB ITU 106 Clear to Send CTS is deasserted to the port when a yellow alarm is received Network Initiated Data Channel Loopback Possible Settings Disable V 54 ANSI_FT1 V 54_ amp ANSI Default Setting Disable
254. hanging the modem port s access level to Level 2 or 3 make sure that either Telnet Session Access Level or the communications port s Port Access Level is set to Level 1 and at least one Login ID are set to Level 1 Otherwise access will be lost If this occurs you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the configuration process again Level 2 Allows limited access and control of the device The user can monitor and perform diagnostics display status and configuration option information If Login Required is set to Enable the effective access level is 2 for User ID access levels of 1 or 2 User IDs set to access Level 3 have only Level 3 access Level 3 Allows limited access with monitoring control only The user can only display and monitor status and configuration screens If Login Required is set to Enable the effective access level is 3 for all user IDs Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether a user session is disconnected after a specified time of inactivity no keyboard activity Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Disconnects the user session after the specified time of inactivity Disable Does not disconnect the user session November 2000 3 93 Configuration Table 3 22 Modem Port Options 3 of 4 Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1
255. he COM port s Port Access Level is set to Level 1 and that at least one Login ID is set to Level 1 Otherwise access will be lost If this occurs you must reset the unit to the factory defaults and begin the configuration process again A reset is required if the Communication Port s Port Use option is set to Net Link see Table 3 3 General System Options Level 2 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information and run tests only they cannot change configuration options Level 3 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information only they cannot change configuration options or run tests 3 78 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 17 Telnet and FTP Session Options 2 of 2 Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether a Telnet session is disconnected after a specified period of keyboard inactivity Enable Terminates the session after the Disconnect Time expires Disable Does not terminate Telnet session during inactivity Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 10 Sets the amount of keyboard inactive time allowed before a user session is disconnected Display Conditions This option does not appear when Inactivity
256. he unit supports the following traps warmStart authenticationFailure linkUp and linkDown enterprise Specific RMON Specific dialControl These traps are listed in alphabetical order within each table B 8 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Trap warmStart SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults This trap indicates that the FrameSaver unit has been reset and has stabilized Table B 3 warmStart Trap Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause warmStart FrameSaver unit has just Reset command sent reinitialized and stabilized f Power disruption itself String Variable Binding Unit reset devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib Trap authenticationFailure 9128 A2 GB20 40 This trap indicates that access to the FrameSaver unit was unsuccessful due to lack of authentication Table B 4 authenticationFailure Trap 1 of 2 Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause authenticationFailure Access to the FrameSaver Bad password on COM port unit was attempted and terminal failed String Unauthorized access attempted from COM port Bad password on modem port terminal String Unauthorized access attempted from modem port Bad password through telnet String Unauthorized access attempted from telnet user at ipAddress SNMP bad community unauthorized IP address or unauthorized operation String Unauthorized access attempted f
257. he unit to the factory refer to Warranty Sales Service and Training Information on page A of this document 6 14 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Table 6 2 Device Problems 2 of 2 Troubleshooting Symptom Possible Cause Solutions Cannot access the unit or the menu driven user interface Login or password is incorrect COM port is misconfigured or the unit is otherwise configured so it prevents access Reset the unit see Restoring Communication with a Misconfigured Unit Contact your service representative Failure XXXXXXXX appears at the top of the System and Test Status screen at Self Test Results The unit detects an internal software failure Record the 8 digit code from the System and Test Status screen Reset the unit and try again Contact your service representative and provide the 8 digit failure code An LED appears dysfunctional LED is burned out Run the Lamp Test If the LED in question does not flash with the other LEDs then contact your service representative Not receiving data Network cable loose or broken Reconnect or repair the cable Call the network service provider Receiving data errors on a multiplexed DLCI but frame relay is okay Frame Relay Discovery is being used for automatic DLCI and PVC configuration The equipment at the other end is not frame relay RFC 149
258. hock and vibration 32 F to 122 F 0 C to 50 C 4 F to 158 F 20 C to 70 C 5 to 85 noncondensing Withstands normal shipping and handling November 2000 D 3 Technical Specifications D 4 Table D 2 1 Slot FrameSaver Unit Technical Specifications 2 of 3 Specification Criteria Physical Dimensions Height 2 9 inches 7 4 cm Width 8 5 inches 21 6 cm Depth 12 5 inches 31 8 cm Weight FrameSaver SLV 9126 2 10 Ibs 0 95 kg FrameSaver SLV 9128 and 9128 II 2 59 Ibs 1 18 kg Power Consumption and Dissipation Built in power cord Normal service voltage ranges for 100 240 VAC power supply FrameSaver SLV 9126 Power consumption 120 VAC power supply FrameSaver SLV 9128 and 9128 I power consumption NEMA 5 15P plug 120 Vac 12 60 Hz 3 9 1 watts 60 Hz 3 0 151 A at 120 VAC 12 Result 31 05 Btu per hour 10 3 watts 60 Hz 3 0 125 A at 120 VAC 12 Result 35 14 Btu per hour COM Port Interface Communications Management Standard Data rates 25 position DB25 connector EIA 232 ITU V 24 ISO 2110 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 and 115 2 kbps T1 Network Interface Data rates Services supported Physical interface USA Physical interface Canada Framing format Coding format Line Build Out LBO ANSI PRM Bit stuffing 8 position unkeyed modular USOC RJ48C jack Up to 1 536 Mbps Fractional T1 ser
259. hresholds are exceeded Supports backup call groups where redundant PVCs can be assigned to a specified call group Using this feature the unit only goes into backup when all PVCs in the group are down and it returns to normal service as soon as one PVC in the group is operational again This feature is useful when multiple PVCs are going to redundant central sites When the SLV Sample Interval is set to 10 seconds provides advance detection of network problems before a DLC Down indication is received to minimize data loss Provides customer premises equipment CPE with a Backward Explicit Congestion Notification BECN when backup bandwidth is not sufficient for the traffic allowing the CPE time to slow traffic to the ISDN before the network starts discarding data Supports Frame Relay Forum Multilink Frame Relay Implementation Agreement FRF 15 so backup bandwidth can be increased by aggregating multiple B channels over the ISDN link November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 About the FrameSaver SLV Supports collection of call and call attempt statistical information that can be viewed from the menu driven user interface or via SNMP and supports alarm generation and call security as well Provides test call capability on ISDN backup links so ISDN and DBM function can be verified before there is an actual primary link failure and switched over to the backup link Periodic tests are recommende
260. ible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 15 Configures the LMI defined T2 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages on the network side of the LMI Applies to the network side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the receipt of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI N4 Measurement Period T3 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 20 Configures the LMI defined T3 parameter which is the time interval in seconds that the network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry messages that have been received N4 from the user side 5 30 Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Manually Configuring DLCI Records 9128 A2 GB20 40 The Auto Configuration feature automatically configures DLCI Records and their PVC Connections DLCI Records can also be created manually see Table 3 12 Main Menu gt Configuration Network Data Port ISDN DLCI Records ISDN is only available when the FrameSaver unit has an ISDN DBM installed Typically DLCI Records only need to be configured when building Management PVCs between the NOC and the central site unit the unit automatically configures non management DLCI Records and PVC Connections Table 3 12 DLCI Record Options 1 of 3 DLCI Number Possible Setting
261. ic B 16 Two traps are defined to support the Alarm and Events Groups of RMON See RMON Alarm and Event Defaults for the default values that will generate RMON specific traps Table B 8 RMON Specific Traps and Variable Bindings alarmVariable RFC 1757 alarmSampleType RFC 1757 alarmValue RFC 1757 alarmFalling Threshold Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause risingAlarm alarmindex RFC 1757 Object being monitored has risen above the set threshold alarmVariable RFC 1757 String i s leT Change in variableName 5 BEC rl etype typeString threshold of alarmRisingThreshold by alarmValue RFC 1757 alarmValue 7 AlarmRisingThreshold alarmRisingThreshold e g Octets received on RFC 1757 Network T1 frame relay rose m devLastTrapString to threshold of 1 devHealthAndStatus mib fallingAlarm alarmindex RFC 1757 Object being monitored has fallen below the set threshold String Change in variableName typeString threshold of alarmFallingThreshold by alarmValue AlarmFalling Threshold e g Octets received on RFC 1757 Network T1 frame relay fell devLastTrapString to threshold of 1 devHealthAndStatus mib November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Trap dialControl 9128 A2 GB20 40 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults These traps indicate when an ISDN backup call is initiated or terminated or when an outgoing ca
262. icate with the FrameSaver unit 2 Verify that the central site NMS s router has the FrameSaver unit s IP address in its routing table so it can communicate with the FrameSaver unit 3 Verify that the central site NMS has been configured as an SNMP Trap Manager if the router is to route data so a route has been configured within the FrameSaver unit Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP Traps Or for a local DLCI between the central site FrameSaver unit and its router verify that a Default IP Destination route has been configured Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Node IP Default IP Destination Configure both SNMP Traps and a Default IP Destination when PVC Multiplexing is used as when using the Auto Configuration feature 4 Select the IP Ping test Main Menu gt Test gt IP Ping 5 Enter the IP Address of the central site NMS then select Start 6 Verify the results of the IP Ping test While the test is running In Progress appears in the Status field When the test is finished Alive Latency nn ms should appear as the Status nn being the amount of time the test took in milliseconds If any other message is displayed additional testing will be required Lamp Test The FrameSaver unit supports a Lamp Test to verify that all LEDs are lighting and functioning properly All LEDs flash or blink on and off at the same time every
263. ifOutOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 10 32 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D Rx FECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D Rx BECNs MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 1 D Tx Frames MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 7 1 D Tx Octets MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitSentOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 8 1 D Rx Frames MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedFrames 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 9 1 D Rx Octets MIB FR DTE MIB RFC 2115 Tag frCircuitReceivedOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 12 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 12 2 1 2 P Protocol Octets MIB RMON II RFC 2021 for 11 y forct protocols Tag protocolDistStatsOctets 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 B 27 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 14 History OID Cross Reference 2 of 5 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 5 4 8 1 2 1 Unavailable Seconds MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFreeRunUAS 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 7 1 16 1 Rx Non octet Aligns MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLinkRxNonOctet 1 3 6 1 4 1
264. igures the LMI defined T3 parameter which is the time interval in seconds that the network side of the LMI uses to measure the maximum number of status enquiry messages that have been received N4 from the user side 5 30 Specifies the interval of time in increments of 5 November 2000 3 27 Configuration Configuring Service Level Verification Options SLV options are selected from the System menu see Table 3 2 Main Menu gt Configuration gt System Service Level Verification Table 3 2 Service Level Verification Options 1 of 2 SLV Sample Interval secs Possible Settings 10 3600 Default Setting 60 Sets the inband communications interval between FrameSaver SLV devices Inband communications are used to pass frames that calculate latency as well as transmission success and other SLV information 10 3600 Sets the SLV Sample Interval secs in seconds SLV Delivery Ratio Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether communication of Frame and Data Delivery Ratios FDR DDR between FrameSaver SLV devices is enabled To use this capability both ends of all PVCs must be FrameSaver SLV devices If some of the units are FrameSaver 9124s or 9624s they must be running software version 1 2 or higher Enable An extra byte for FDR DDR statistics collection is included with each frame which is used at the receiving end to determine the
265. ing Although ABCD signaling bits for each setting are described only AB bits are transmitted when the cross connected T1 network interface is using D4 framing 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 55 Configuration Table 3 10 Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values 2 of 3 Network Side Meaning DSX 1 Side E amp M idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an E amp M interface ABCD 0000 E amp M idle E amp M busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an E amp M interface ABCD 1111 E amp M busy FXOg idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXO Ground Start interface ABCD 1111 FXSg idle FXOg busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXO Ground Start interface ABCD 0101 FXSg busy FXOI idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXO Loop Start interface ABCD 0101 FXSI idle FXOl busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXO Loop Start interface ABCD 0101 FXSI busy FXSg idle The signaling bits transmit
266. ing Alarms if any default settings need to be changed 8 8 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Editing Alarms gt Procedure 1 From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window 2 Select the Custom radio button from the Properties File area in the upper right of the window then Property down the center of the screen The Custom Property Editor window opens Property Editor Custom Domain _ RT Delay _ Proxy SNMP Properties File GrenadaS8 Type FrameRelay Logging Domain Stat Host Conv ART DLCI Add Edit Delete Trap Variable Rising Falling DLCI USRDEF 3FrSent elta 45000 45000 3i Add ISRDEF FrSent SRDEF FrSent Edits ISRDEF FrSent SRDEF FrSent Delete ISRDEF FrSent ISRDEF FrSent ISRDEF 3FrSent ISRDEF 3FrSent 3 Select a DLCI from the Trap list and select the Edit button to the right of the list The Edit Trap window opens 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 8 9 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Domain Stats Type Trap Yariable Key1 Threshold Severity Script Description Community Trap Number Check every Edit Trap USRDEF Ethernet Stats Drop Events io B00 Absolute Delta Rising _ Falling _
267. ing the ISDN DBM Interface Setting Up ISDN Link Profiles Assigning Time Slots Cross Connections Assigning Frame Relay Time Slots to the Network Interface Assigning DSX 1 Time Slots to the Network Interface Assigning a Synchronous Data Port to Network or DSX 1 Time Slots Clearing Assignments Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface Manually Configuring DLC Records Configuring PVC Connections Setting Up Management and Communication Options Configuring Node IP Information Configuring Management PVCs Configuring General SNMP Management Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support Configuring SNMP NMS Security Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Configuring the Ethernet Port Configuring the Communication Port Configuring the Modem Port Configuring the Criteria for Automatic Backup November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Basic Configuration Configuration option settings determine how the FrameSaver unit operates Use the FrameSaver unit s Configuration Edit Display menu to display or change configuration option settings The Configuration Edit Display menu shown below is for a FrameSaver SLV 9128 II with the optional ISDN backup feature Configuration Menu main config 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 CONFIGURATION EDIT DISPLAY System Network DSX 1 Data Ports ISDN Time Slot Assignment PVC Connections Management and Communica
268. ink ISDN Link Name Specifies the ISDN link of the DBM as the destination of the connection This can be any non null link name configured on an ISDN frame relay link on an installed DBM Clear Alternate Clears the Alternate Destination Link and Alternate Destination DLCI settings and suppresses Alternate Destination EDLCI Alternate Destination DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the alternate destination Data Link Connection Identifier DLCI for a frame relay interface used for backup The DLCI must be defined and cannot be part of a PVC connection or management link For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLC must be unconnected for the DLCI to be a valid selection Display Conditions This option does not appear when the Alternate Destination Link contains no value 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number Alternate Destination EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the alternate destination Embedded Data Link Connection Identifier EDLC for a frame relay interface when a multiplexed DLCI record is selected as one end of a backup connection Display Conditions This option only appears when the Alternate Destination DLCI contains a multiplexed DLCI record number 0 62 Specifies the EDLC number November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Setting Up Managemen
269. ink is available to help service providers isolate device problems within their networks This feature allows Telnet or FTP access to the unit on this link and troubleshooting over this link is essentially transparent to customer operations No alarms or SNMP traps are generated to create nuisance alarms for the customer See Configuring Node IP Information in Chapter 3 Configuration for additional information about this feature LMI Packet Capture Utility Feature A packet capture utility has been provided to aid with problem isolation when LMI errors are detected Using this utility any enabled frame relay link on the user data port or network interface can be selected The utility captures any LMI packets sent or received and writes them to a data file called Imitrace syc in the system s data directory so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for analysis The LMI Trace Log also provides access to captured packet information See Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface for additional information on this feature B gt Procedure To use this utility 1 Select the LMI Packet Capture Utility Select an enabled frame relay link Main Menu gt Control gt LMI Packet Capture Utility 2 Select an enabled frame relay link or Capture Interface either Net1 FR1 Port 1 Port 2 or an ISDN Link Name if a DBM is present 3 Start packet capture While capturing data the status is Activ
270. interface Then the lowest available time slot number to the highest available time slot number For example if the cursor is on a field with the Available value under assigned time slot Nit pressing the Spacebar causes this field s values to cycle through all valid DSX 1 time slots starting with Ds p yy assuming it is unassigned If Ds p tt is already assigned the next valid time slot in the order described above is displayed 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 53 Configuration 3 54 B gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Configuration Time Slot Assignment DSX to Network Assignments The DSX 1 to Network Assignments screen appears This screen contains a matrix of the current cross connect status of all time slots on the network interface 2 Move the cursor to the next time slot that can be edited underlined Use the spacebar or type in the desired time slot to display its time slot assignment 3 Repeat Step 2 until all desired time slots are assigned 4 Save the configuration DSX 1 Signaling Assignments and Trunk Conditioning Page 2 The second page of the DSX 1 to Network Assignments screen allows you to define the signaling assignments and trunk conditioning for each time slot on the DSX 1 interface You can specify whether robbed bit signaling information is being passed within a given DSO and the value of the signaling bits that will be transmitted for that DSO to the other cross conn
271. interface comes back up Port 1 is reenabled and its control leads are reasserted The LMI state on Port 1 has no effect on the LMI state on the network interface That is Port 1 s LMI follows the network interface s LMI This setting is useful if the router connected to Port 1 is used to initiate recovery when network failures are detected Port 2_Follows_Net1 FR1 Reacts like the Port 1_ Follows_Net1 FR1 selection but for Port 2 instead All_Ports_Follow_Net1 FR1 Brings LMI down on all user data ports when LMI on the network interface goes down disabling all ports and deasserting their control leads Allows LMI to come back up and reenables the ports when LMI comes up on the network That is LMI on each port follows the network interface s LMI The state of LMI on the port will not affect the state of LMI on the network interface Port 1_Codependent_with_Net1 FR1 Brings LMI down on the network interface when LMI on Port 1 goes down or LMI down on Port 1 when LMI on the network interface goes down and allows LMI to come back up when LMI comes back on the other interface That is the LMI state for one interface is dependent on the other Use this setting when backup is through the router instead of the unit It is not recommended since it makes fault isolation more difficult Port 2_Codependent_with_Net1 FR1 Reacts like the Port 1_Codependent_with_Net1 FR1 selection but for Port 2 instead The state of LMI on the netwo
272. ion ISDN Link Name For units with ISDN backup capability specifies the ISDN link of the DBM to be used in the connection This can be any nonnull link name configured on an ISDN frame relay link on an installed DBM Clear Clears the link and the DLCI field and suppresses the EDLCI field if the DLC was multiplexed Alternate DLCI Possible Settings 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the alternate DLCI number to be used for the management PVC after the frame relay interface is selected The DLCI must be defined for the link i e has a DLCI record and it must not be part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC For multiplexed DLCls at least one EDLCI must be unconfigured for the DLCI Display Conditions The DLCI cannot be entered if the Link field is blank NOTE Clearing Link also clears the DLCI 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number inclusive 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 75 Configuration Table 3 15 Management PVC Options 4 of 4 Alternate EDLCI Possible Settings 0 62 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the alternate EDLCI number used for a management PVC when a multiplexed DLCI is selected for the frame relay link EDLCls identify individual connections within multiplexed DLCls that are unique to those DLCls Use a unique EDLCI to identify an individual connection within a multiplexed DLC
273. ion Rorr Refresh Update screen with current information Corc ClrStats Clear network performance statistics and refresh the screen Variations include ClrSLV amp DLCIStats for clearing SLV and DLCI statistics ClrLinkStats for clearing frame relay link statistics ClrDBMStats for clearing DBM call statistics Uoru PgUp Display the previous page Dord PgDn Display the next page November 2000 2 7 2 8 User Interface and Basic Operation Selecting from a Menu gt Procedure To select from a menu 1 Tab or press the down arrow key to position the cursor on a menu selection or press the up arrow key to move the cursor to the bottom of the menu list Each menu selection is highlighted as you press the key to move the cursor from position to position 2 Press Enter The selected menu or screen appears B gt Procedure To return to a previous screen press the Escape Esc key until you reach the desired screen Switching Between Screen Areas Use Cirl a to switch between screen areas see the example on page 2 5 B gt Procedure To switch to the function keys area 1 Press Ctrl a to switch from the screen area to the function keys area 2 Select either the function s designated underlined character or Tab to the desired function key 3 Press Enter The function is performed To return to the screen area press Ctrl a again November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Selecting a Field User Inte
274. ion and administration icons appear in the box below the application bar Help wv Application Admin Click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window Select the Add button down the center of the screen Minimally enter the following Agent name IP address Enter 1 for the frame relay logical interface to be monitored Properties File Select paradyne Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to add the agent discover its DLCls and return to the Configuration Manager main window The frame relay agent just entered appears in the agent list box with its DLCls in the DLCI list box at the bottom of the screen Select the Test button fourth button down center of the screen to make sure you can communicate with the agent Refer to Adding Frame Relay Agents in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information 8 4 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Verifying Domains and Groups 9128 A2 GB20 40 B gt Procedure From the NetScout Manager Plus main window with the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected click on the Config Manager icon to open the Configuration Manager main window Configuration Manager File Password wv Agent w AgentGroup w Switch FrameRelay Domain YR Baloy vy Pravy SNMP IP Address Properties File fw42prop Sha
275. ion is set to None and the link and its DLCI will be deleted None Disables or does not specify a TS Access Management Link PVCname Specifies the name of the TS Management PVC Display Conditions This selection only appears when a dedicated management PVC has been defined on the network frame relay link as a DLCI with DLCI Type set to Standard 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 71 Configuration Table 3 14 Node IP Options 3 of 3 TS Management Link Access Level Available Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies the highest access level allowed when accessing the unit via a Telnet or FTP session when the service provider is using the TS Access Management Link Display Conditions This option only appears when TS Access Management Link is set to None NOTES Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are not affected by the access level set by the Session Access Level Login Required or FTP Login Required option settings see Table 3 17 Telnet and FTP Session Options Telnet and FTP sessions on this link are affected by the Telnet Session Inactivity Timeout Disconnect Time and FTP Session option settings Level 1 Allows Telnet or FTP access by network service providers with the capability to view unit information change configuration options and run tests This is the highest access level allowed Use this setting when downloading files Level 2 Allows Telnet
276. ions Auto Configuration Configure basic access unit setup automatically based upon a selected application You can also automatically populate network and data port DLCI configuration options with numeric settings Control Control the asynchronous user interface for call directories device naming login administration and selecting software releases You can also initiate a power on reset of the FrameSaver unit Easy Install Configure minimal options for a quick installation See Appendix A Menu Hierarchy for a pictorial view of the menu hierarchy which represents the organization of the FrameSaver unit s menus and screens 2 4 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Screen Work Areas User Interface and Basic Operation There are two user work areas Screen area Where you input information into fields Function keys area Where you perform specific screen functions Below is a sample configuration screen Model Number Date and Time 9128 II 05 26 2000 23 32 SERVICE LEVEL VERIFICATION SYSTEM OPTIONS Menu Path main config system slv Device Name Node A Device Name SLV SLV Screen SLV Area SLV SLV SLV SLV Save Keys Area Sample Interval secs Delivery Ratio DLCI Down on SLV Timeout Timeout Error Event Threshold Timeout Clearing Event Threshold Round Trip Latency Error Threshold ms Latency Clearing Event Threshold Packet Size bytes Synchro
277. ise 7805 D1 001 OpenLane Workgroup 7805 D 1 003 NetScout Manager Plus For UNIX or Windows NT 9180 NetScout Server For UNIX or Windows NT 9190 NetScout WebCast For UNIX or Windows NT 9155 Optional Features Wall Mounting Kit for 1 Slot Housing 9001 F 1 891 Shelf Mounting Kit for Up to Two 1 Slot Housings 9001 F 1 894 ISDN BRI DBM 9098 F 1 870 ISDN PRI DBM 9098 F 1 875 FrameSaver SLV 9128 1 Slot Housing to 9000 Series 9128 F1 212 Access Carrier Upgrade November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Equipment List 9128 A2 GB20 40 Model Feature Description Number Power Supplies 100 240 VAC for 1 Slot Housing 9001 F1 040 120 VAC for 1 Slot Housing 9001 F 1 020 AC Power Supply for Access Carrier 9007 F 1 040 DC Power Supply for Access Carrier 9005 F 1 050 9000 Series Access Carrier 9128 or 9128 II NAM only Access Carrier 9007 B1 409 Includes 14 Slot Housing Universal 90 250 VAC Power Supply Power Supply Tray Baffle Fan Tray Mounting Brackets and Installation Instructions Access Carrier 9007 B1 509 Includes 14 Slot Housing Universal 48 VDC Power Supply Power Supply Tray Baffle Fan Tray Mounting Brackets and Installation Instructions Baffle for Access Carrier 9007 S1 897 Fan Tray for Power Supply in Access Carrier 9007 S1 898 Fan Tray for Access Carrier 9007 S1 899 November 2000 E 3 Equipment List Cables This table lists cables you can order
278. ising 1 1 15 mins in the MIB 2 lin the OID Interface ID of the frame relay link 1 D Delta Indicates that the calculated difference between the current value and the previous value is contained 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 B 21 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area These alarms apply to all DLCls on the network interface and can be created during RMON initialization or when a DLCI is created They are put into the Paradyne defined alarm area Table B 11 DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area 1 of 2 Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default DLCI Inactive D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 1 1 oeeonds Tag devFrExtDlciStsInactive sional Secs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 2 1 D Missing Latency D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 900 secs Rising 5 5 eepoiere Tag devFrExtDiciMissedsLvs 19 MINS OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 23 1 D Rx FECNs D MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs Rising 1 1 RFC 2115 1 min Tag frCircuitReceivedFECNs OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 4 1 D Rx BECNs D MIB FR DTE MIB 60 secs Rising 1 1 RFC 2115 1 min Tag frCircuitReceivedBECNs OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 5 1 D Congested Seconds D MIB pdn_FrExt mib E 60 secs Rising 5 5 Tag devFrExtDlciSts hy CongestedSecs OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4
279. ive that was set for the route in seconds 1 999 If 999 appears the route is a permanent one 5 46 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance Performance Statistics Use the Performance Statistics menu to display statistical information for a selected interface Statistical information is useful when trying to determine the severity and frequency or duration of a condition Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Physical and link layer statistics Layers 1 and 2 are collected on the port The following menu shows the performance statistics that can be selected Performance Statistics Menu main status performance 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Service Level Verification DLCI Frame Relay ESF Line DBM Call Ethernet Clear All Statistics Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit DBM Call Statistics only appear when the FrameSaver unit has the ISDN DBM feature and Ethernet only appears for the FrameSaver SLV 9128 II 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 5 47 Operation and Maintenance Clearing Performance Statistics Performance statistics counters can be reset to the baseline when using a directly connected asynchronous terminal and your security Access Level is Level 1 This feature is useful when troubleshooting problems Statistic counters are not actually cleared using this feature True statistic counts
280. k interface Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with the user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 7 Health and Status Messages 3 of 7 Message What It Indicates ISDN Active An ISDN call is active ISDN Link Profile Disabled ISDN Link Name An ISDN backup call could not be made because the ISDN link profile specified Link Name is disabled Main Menu gt Configuration gt ISDN gt Link Profiles ISDN Link Profile Invalid ISDN Link Name No phone numbers have been specified in the ISDN link profile specified by ISDN Link Name ISDN Network Failed Active Idle An ISDN network failure was detected when Active Backup call was in progress Idle DBM was in Idle mode Link Down Administratively frame relay link The specified frame relay link has been disabled by the unit due to LMI Behavior conditions or LMI Protocol on another link is in a failed state Link Profile Disabled ISDN Link Name An ISDN backup call could not be made because the specified link profile was disabled LLB Active Interface A network Line Loopback LLB is active on the specified interface LMI Discovery in Progress frame relay link 2 Local Management Interface protocol discovery is in progress to determine which protocol will be used
281. ket Capture Utility Feature Viewing Captured Packets from the Menu Driven User Interface Alarms Viewing the Trap Event Log Troubleshooting Tables Device Problems Frame Relay PVC Problems ISDN DBM Problems Tests Available Test Timeout Feature DBM Tests Starting and Stopping a Test Aborting All Tests PVC Tests PVC Loopback Send Pattern November 2000 6 1 Troubleshooting Monitor Pattern Connectivity Test Call Physical Tests Line Loopback Payload Loopback Repeater Loopback DTE Loopback Send Line Loopback Data Channel Loopbacks on a Frame Relay Link Send Remote Line Loopback Send and Monitor Pattern Tests P Ping Test Lamp Test Problem Indicators 6 2 The unit provides a number of indicators to alert you to possible problems Indicators See LEDs Viewing LEDs and Control Leads and LED Descriptions in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance as well as the user interface screen Main Menu gt Status gt Display LEDs and Control LEDs Health and Status Table 5 7 Health and Status Messages in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance Main Menu gt Status gt System and Test Status Messages also appear at the bottom of any menu driven user interface screen Performance statistics Performance Statistics in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance to help you determine ho
282. kup must end occurring for the selected day of the week in increments of 1 hour Display Conditions This option only appears if a start time was specified 00 00 24 00 Specifies the time of day that Auto Backup will stop for this particular day November 2000 3 97 Configuration 3 98 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Security and Logins This chapter includes the following 9128 A2 GB20 40 Limiting Access Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access Limiting Dial In Access via the Modem Port Controlling ISDN Access ISDN Call Security Disabling ISDN Access Controlling Telnet or FTP Access Limiting Telnet Access Limiting FTP Access Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Access Management Link Controlling SNMP Access Disabling SNMP Access Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses Creating a Login Modifying a Login Deleting a Login November 2000 4 1 Security and Logins Limiting Access The FrameSaver unit provides access security on the following interfaces m Asynchronous terminal Telnet m FTP SNMP Up to two direct or Telnet sessions can be active at any given time that is you can have two simultaneous Telnet sessions or one Telnet session and one active asynchronous terminal session or two simultaneous asynchronous terminal sessions Controlling Asynchronous Terminal Access Direct asynchro
283. l Directories Easy Install System Information Administer Logins Change Operating Mode Select Software Release Select DSX PRI LED Source LMI Packet Capture Utility System Alarm Relay Cut off Enable Disable Modem PassThru to COM Disconnect Modem Reset Device System Information Device Name System Name Location Contact Date e Time Easy Install lt Administer Logins e Login ID Password Access Level New Select Software Release e Current Release Alternate Release Switch amp Reset MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control LMI Packet Capture Utility e Capture Interface Packet Capture Start Stop Status Packets in Buffer e Display LMI Trace Log LMI Trace Log Easy Install e Node IP Address and Subnet Mask e TS Access e Create Dedicated Network Management Link Time Slot Assignment Screen Ethernet Port Options Screen Selected Network Physical Interface Options 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 00 16756b A 5 Menu Hierarchy A 6 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults This appendix contains the following MIB Support Downloading MIBs and SNMP Traps System Group mib 2 FrameSaver Unit s sysDescr system 1 FrameSaver Unit s sysObjectlD system 2 m Interfaces Group mib 2 Paradyne Indexes to the Inter
284. l being transmitted from the DTE Check that the DSX 1 cable is securely attached at both ends Check the DTE status LOS at Network 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the network interface Clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal to 12 5 Network cable problem No signal is being transmitted at the far end FrameSaver unit T1 facility problem Check that the network cable is securely attached at both ends Check far end FrameSaver unit status Contact your network provider Network Com Link Down The communication link for the COM port is down and the COM port is configured for Net Link Check the router connected to the COM port OOF at DSX 1 An Out of Frame OOF condition is detected on the DSX 1 interface Incompatible framing format between the DTE and the FrameSaver unit DSX 1 cabling problem Check that the framing format for the DSX 1 DTE interface is correct Check that the DSX 1 cable is securely attached at both ends November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Table 6 1 Alarm Conditions 5 of 7 Troubleshooting Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do OOF at Network 1 An Out of Frame OOF condition is detected on the network interface Incompatible framing format between the network and the FrameSaver unit Network cablin
285. l information 3 12 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Selecting a Frame Relay Discovery Mode 9128 A2 GB20 40 When a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is active the FrameSaver unit discovers network DLCls from the network LMI status response message It configures a network DLCI a user data port DLCI and automatically connects them to create a PVC Main Menu Auto Configuration Frame Relay Discovery Mode Automatically configured network DLCls are multiplexed and each automatically configured port DLCI carries the same DLCI Number as its corresponding network DLCI These are the same DLCI numbers that would have been available had the FrameSaver unit not been inserted in the link between your equipment and the network NOTE A local Management PVC e g the PVC between the router and the FrameSaver unit s user data port must be configured manually The following will occur when a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is selected Discovery Mode Configuration Description 1MPort Auto configuration is enabled on Port 1 default A management DLCI is configured A multiplexed network DLCI containing two embedded DLCls EDLCIls is configured for Port 1 user data and management data A PVC connection is configured between the network and port DLCls 1Port Auto configuration is enabled on Port 1 No management DLCI is configured A multiplexed network DLCI is configured for Port 1 user data
286. lemented B gt Procedure To switch to the new software 1 Go to the Control menu and select Select Software Release Main Menu Control Select Software Release The currently loaded software version and the new release that was just transferred are shown If the download failed Invalid appears in the Alternate Release field instead of the new release number Repeat the procedure Upgrading System Software if this occurs 2 Select Switch amp Reset 3 Enter Yes to the Are you sure prompt The unit resets and begins installing the newly transferred software 4 Verify that the new software release was successfully installed as the Current Software Revision Main Menu gt Status gt Identity NOTE If someone opens a Telnet session and accesses the unit s Identity screen while the unit is downloading software the In Progress message appears in the Alternate Software Revision field See Displaying System Information to see what is included on the unit s Identity screen 5 72 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance Transferring Collected Data 9128 A2 GB20 40 SLV user history statistics and LMI packet capture data can be uploaded to an NMS or a Network Associates Sniffer using FTP which is faster than other methods The rate at which the data file is transferred is the rate set by the FTP Max Transfer Rate Kbps option see Table 3 17 Telnet and FTP Session Options in Chapter
287. lies to data coming into that interface For example the priority set for DLCls on Port 1 applies to data coming into Port 1 from the attached equipment such as a router NOTE For units with multiple user data ports since pipelining occurs on Port 1 it is recommended that higher priority data be connected to Port 1 Display Conditions This option is not available for the network interface or if the model has ISDN backup capability an ISDN DBM interface Low Data configured for the DLCI has low priority Medium Data configured for the DLCI has medium priority High Data configured for the DLCI has high priority Outbound Management Priority Possible Settings Low Medium High Default Setting Medium Specifies the relative priority for management traffic sent on management PVCs on this DLCI to the network Display Conditions This option is not available on a user data port Low Management data configured for the DLCI has low priority Medium Management data configured for the DLC has medium priority High Management data configured for the DLCI has high priority Backup Group Possible Settings A B C Z None Default Setting None Assigns DLCls to a backup group so backup does not take place unless all DLCIs in the group are no longer operational or latency has been exceeded Backup is terminated when one DLCI in the group is operational again This feature reduce
288. lines 10 13 or 16 When Enter is pressed the values change to the selected range To select intervals You must enter an interval or time on Occurring on and before a__ Line 10 The display will include the selected interval plus selected interval or time the 6 intervals recorded before it Bracketing a selected Line 13 The display will include the selected interval plus interval or time the 3 intervals recorded before it and the 3 intervals recorded after it Occurring on and after a Line 16 The display will include the selected interval plus selected interval or time the 6 intervals recorded after it 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 5 57 Operation and Maintenance ESF Line Performance Statistics Screen Example main status performance esf 9128 II Device Name Node A 05 26 2000 23 32 Network 1 ESF LINE PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Current Interval Timer ESF Error Events Near 123 Far 124 Near 15 Far 12 ES CSS LOFC Time Near Far Near Far Near Far Current 10 37 0 0 0 Line 10 Otr 10 235 02 10 20 03 10 05 Line 13 04 09 50 05 09 35 06 09 20 Line 16 07 09 05 oooooo0o0o0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 oooooo0o0o 0 oooooo0oo0o o oooooo0o0o o oooooo0oo0o o Line 18 Worst Interval 24 24 14 14 14 14 Near Tot valid 96 00010 00000 00000 Far Tot valid 96 00010 00000 00000 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Refresh PgDn PgUp ClrFa
289. link sic28 st candackal pean btohaphnad beam inea des 4 8 Controlling SNMP Access 0 0c eee eects 4 9 Disabling SNMP ACCESS 2 ucccriietsiicpeieisiedveetetecens 4 9 Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels 4 10 Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses 4 11 Creatine a LOGIN a ic udtacie bbGhrs beats anes 26 ee Shek ode ea cake bee 4 12 Moding T ON fics csriacah pnd attained ariecad di bein deans ats heodsadn rane ana arate danahandes 4 13 Deleting a LOGIT 1 022 2ropeerneeorreeernerserreeereoeereregreesars 4 13 November 2000 iii Contents 5 Operation and Maintenance iv Displaying System Information 0 000 eee eee eee ees 5 3 Viewing LEDs and Control Leads 0000 cece eee eee 5 5 FrameSaver SLV 9126 LEDs and Control Leads 5 5 FrameSaver SLV 9128 9128 II LEDs and Control Leads 5 6 LED D SCNDUONS 222 cccteinedavesd tia edaiauicdenetaalodwed ee 5 7 Control Lead Descriptions 000 cece cece dekis 5 10 Device WESsatee acvs iced cdaedecaes adana aka ie a iei 5 11 Stes MOMA srk ahaa a dict h eeahbhatehed noted sent nadie sund 5 17 System and Test Status Messages 00 cece eee eae 5 18 Network LMl Reported DLCls Status 00 cece eeeee 5 28 PVG Connection Stalis aicscccctetcieeeciieteieeeedeetemeaead 5 30 Time Slot Assignment Status 00 000 cece eee eee 5 33 DBM Interface Status 0 00 cece cece e
290. lity Rejected 29 Requested facility is not No action is needed provided by the network Incoming Calls 54 Called user is not permitted Turn off network call Barred to accept the call screening Incompatible 88 Request to establish a call Arrange for the desired Destination has been received but capability low layer high layer or another compatibility attribute e g data rate cannot be provided Incorrect format of the destination link Identified Channel 82 Channel requested for a Make sure the network is Does Not Exist call is not activated on the configured for 2B service interface if a BRI DBM Contact your service provider to verify that your service is provisioned for two B channels Info Element 99 Device sending this cause 1 Verify that the Inbound Nonexistent or has received a message it Calling ID has been Nonimplemented does not recognize defined This cause will not prevent 2 Verify that the Inbound the message from being Calling ID is part of your precessed service Interworking 127 Precise cause of a No action is needed Unspecified message cannot be determined because the interworking network does not provide causes Invalid Call 81 Call reference used is not Contact your service Reference Value currently in use on the user network interface representative November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 12 Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages
291. ll is rejected by the far end device Table B 9 dialControl Traps 1 of 2 Trap Variable Bindings Possible Cause Standard Dial Control MIB dialCtlIPeerCall callHistoryPeerld A peer to peer call has been Information RFC 2128 ended callHistoryPeerlflndex String RFC 2128 Call sequence on ifString using llHistoryLogicallfInd B ChnI channel terminated due eee BO age to causeString The causeString is the ifOperStatus RFC 1573 The B channel in this example is callHistoryPeerAddress only provided if it is known RFC 2128 See Table 5 11 Most Recent and Previous Cause Values in DBM ay c llHistorySubAddress Interface Status of Operation and RFC 2128 i Maintenance for a list of the callHistoryDisconnect causeStrings and their cause Cause RFC 2128 numbers callHistoryConnectTime RFC 2128 callHistoryDisconnect Time RFC 2128 callHistoryInfoType RFC 2128 a callHistoryCallOrigin RFC 2128 dialCtIPeerCall callActivePeerld A peer to peer call has been sent Setup RFC 2128 or received callActivePeerlflndex String RFC 2128 Call sequence on ifString fusing callActiveLogicallflndex RFC 2128 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 callActivePeerAddress RFC 2128 callActiveSubAddress RFC 2128 callActivelnfoType RFC 2128 callActiveCallOrigin RFC 2128 B Chnl channel initiated remotely ocally The B channel in this exampl
292. ly 3 Save your changes If connecting an asynchronous terminal to the unit s COM port See Configuring the Communication Port in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about the communication COM port Modem port See Setting Up Call Directories for Trap Dial Out and Configuring the Modem Port in Chapter 3 Configuration for additional information 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 4 3 Security and Logins Limiting Dial In Access via the Modem Port The modem port is already configured for dial in and asynchronous terminal access these are the default settings To limit dial in access via the modem port disable the Dial In Access configuration option Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Modem Port See Configuring the Modem Port in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about modem port options 4 4 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Security and Logins Controlling ISDN Access ISDN Call Security FrameSaver units with the built in DBM limit access through the following methods ISDN call security Disabling ISDN access The FrameSaver unit uses the Caller Identification Method to screen calls and avoid accidental or intentional disruption of network traffic The answering DBM only accepts calls with valid calling number identifiers or phone numbers When the ISDN DBM interface is enabled and Caller Identification Method is set to Caller ID
293. matic configuration takes place on the DBM interface and no alternate destinations are created for PVCs NOTE Changes must be saved to take effect See Setting Up Auto Configuration to see a screen example November 2000 3 17 Configuration 3 18 When the Automatic Backup Configuration setting is changed the following prompts appear No is the default for these prompts When the The following prompt appears If you select Automatic Backup Configuration setting was changed and Save was selected Saving will cause Auto Configuration to update and Restart Are you sure No No Auto Configuration updates are performed and updates due to LMI response messages are performed according to the previously saved setting Yes The Delete All DLCIs and PVC Connections prompt appears Response to the Delete All DLCIs and PVC Connections prompt was No and Automatic Backup Configuration was disabled Delete All Alternate Destinations from PVC Connections No No previously configured DLCls or PVC connections are removed or changed and newly discovered DLCls will be configured according to the new discovery mode and automatic backup setting Yes All multiplexed DLCls ISDN Link Profiles except for the first one and PVC connections are deleted except for management PVCs with the user data port as the primary destination and management PVCs designated as th
294. mentation training distributor locations or Paradyne worldwide office locations use one of the following methods m Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at www paradyne com Be sure to register your warranty at www paradyne com warranty Telephone Call our automated system to receive current information by fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 Outside the U S A call 1 727 530 2340 Document Feedback We welcome your comments and suggestions about this document Please mail them to Technical Publications Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Ave N Largo FL 33773 or send e mail to userdoc paradyne com Include the number and title of this document in your correspondence Please include your name and phone number if you are willing to provide additional clarification Trademarks ACCULINK COMSPHERE FrameSaver Hotwire and NextEDGE are registered trademarks of Paradyne Corporation MVL OpenLane Performance Wizard and TruePut are trademarks of Paradyne Corporation All other products and services mentioned herein are the trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks of their respective owners Patent Notification FrameSaver products are protected by U S Patents 5 550 700 and 5 654 966 Other patents are pending A November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Contents About This Guide m Purpose and Intended Audience 00 cece cece
295. munication link Port Use option is set to Net Link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the COM port which you can view or edit Clear Clears the IP address for the COM port and fills the address with zeros When the IP Address is all zeros the COM port uses the Node IP Address if one has been configured Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the COM port which you can view or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the COM port and fills the address with zeros When the node subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 RIP Possible Settings None Standard_out Default Setting None Specifies which Routing Information Protocol RIP is used to enable routing of management data between devices Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is
296. n Table 3 21 Communication Port Options 2 of 5 Parity Possible Settings None Even Odd Default Setting None Provides a method of checking the accuracy of binary numbers for the COM port A parity bit is added to the data to make the 1 bits of each character add up to either an odd or even number Each character of transmitted data is approved as error free if the 1 bits add up to an odd or even number as specified by this configuration option None Provides no parity Even Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always even Odd Makes the sum of all 1 bits and its corresponding parity bit always odd Siop Bits Possible Settings 1 2 Default Setting 1 Determines the number of stop bits used for the COM port 1 Provides one stop bit 2 Provides two stop bits Ignore Control Leads Possible Settings Disable DTR Default Setting Disable Specifies whether DTR is used Disable Treats control leads as standard operation DTR Ignores DTR This may be necessary when connecting to some PAD devices Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether a user ID and password referred to as the login is required in order to log on to the asynchronous terminal connected to the COM port Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable
297. n the Configuration Manager main window 2 Select the Custom radio button from the Properties File area in the upper right of the window then Property down the center of the screen The Custom Property Editor window opens see the window in Editing Alarms 3 Select a DLCI from the Trap list and select the Add button to the right of the list The Add Trap window opens Domain State Type Trap ariable Keyt Key2 f Add Trap Ethernet Stats Drop Events Absolute _ Delta Threshold y Severity Script Description Community Trap Number Check every Rising _ Falling Both Rising Falling Rising Threshold Reached Falling Threshold Reached public public a 2 o seconds Cancel November 2000 8 11 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices 4 Click on the button to the right of indicated fields for a drop down list from which selections can be made Minimally configure the following fields Field Select or Enter Domain User Defined DLCI DLCI number for trap being assigned Stats Type PARADYNE Trap Variable Trap variable to be configured Key1 The iflndex for the frame relay logical interface is 1 Key2 DLCI number same as DLCI above Type Absolute or Delta radio button Rising Falling or Both radio button 2 Threshold Value that will trigger a t
298. n IP Ping test is typically run from the remote site to ping the NMS at the central site The remote FrameSaver unit must have SNMP trap managers configured and one of those trap managers must be the central site NMS Select Procedure 2 to ping the NMS at the central site To test the path to the NMS trap managers during installation of the central site FrameSaver unit The remote FrameSaver unit must have configured the SNMP trap managers to be sent the ping Select Procedure 2 to ping SNMP trap managers p gt Procedure 1 To ping any far end FrameSaver unit 1 Select the IP Ping test Main Menu gt Test gt IP Ping 2 Enter the IP Address of the device the ping is being sent to then select Start NOTE If the FrameSaver unit has just initialized or the far end unit has just initialized it may take about a minute for the units to learn the routes via the proprietary RIP 3 Verify the results of the IP Ping test While the test is running In Progress appears in the Status field When the test is finished Alive Latency nn ms should appear as the Status nn being the amount of time the test took in milliseconds If any other message is displayed additional testing will be required 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 6 35 Troubleshooting B gt Procedure 2 To ping the NMS at the central site 1 Verify that the central site NMS has the FrameSaver unit s IP address in its routing table so it can commun
299. n ISDN backup call could not be made because the ISDN link profile specified Link Name is disabled Main Menu gt Configuration gt ISDN gt Link Profiles Enable the ISDN link profile if you want to make a call ISDN Link Profile Invalid ISDN Link Name An ISDN backup call could not be made because the ISDN link profile specified ISDN Link Name is invalid Check that the phone number is correct ISDN Network Failed Active Idle An ISDN network failure was detected when a backup call was in progress or the DBM was in Idle mode Contact your network provider if the problem persists 2 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network port Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with a user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Troubleshooting Table 6 1 Alarm Conditions 3 of 7 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do Link Profile Disabled An ISDN backup call could Change the ISDN Link Profile s ISDN Link Name not be made because the Link Status to Auto specified link profile was Main Menu gt Configuration gt disabled ISDN Link Profiles LMI Down The Local Management For the network interface frame relay link Interface is down for the i LMI if specified frame relay link WaS NEVEF UP VEriy that the LMI Pro
300. n an escape sequence minus minus minus with a minimum of 50 ms between each is detected the FrameSaver unit switches back to normal user interface operation See COM Port to Router Cables in Appendix C Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments for cable information B gt Procedure 1 Configure the COM port to use Modem PassThru Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Communication Port 2 Set Port Use to Modem PassThru 3 Save the configuration November 2000 3 11 Configuration Setting Up Auto Configuration The auto configuration feature allows you to select a method of automatic configuration and connection of DLCls within the FrameSaver unit as well as to automatically remove DLCls and connections that are no longer supported by the network service provider Main Menu gt Auto Configuration Auto Configuration Screen Example main auto configuration 9128 II Device Name Node A 8 18 2000 23 32 AUTO CONF IGURATION Frame Relay Discovery Mode 1MPort Automatic Circuit Removal Enable Automatic Backup Configuration Single Site Backup Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save This feature also maintains associated DLCI option settings when Standard LMI is used on the network interface If an ISDN DBM is not installed Automatic Backup Configuration does not appear see Setting Up Automatic Backup Configuration for additiona
301. n the network DLCI Up Time 1 Days hours minutes and seconds since the DLCI was last declared Active after a period of inactivity Down is displayed if the DLCI is inactive If the DLCI was Down this is the amount of time since the DLCI recovered If the DLCI was never Down this is the amount of time since the unit discovered that the DLCI was active in the network Total Tx Frames Tx Octets a Within CIR Between CIR amp EIR Above EIR With DE Set Total number of data frames and octets 8 bit bytes transmitted for the selected DLCI on the frame relay link The number of frames and octets sent by the far end device for on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were within the committed information rate The number of frames and octets sent by the far end device on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate The number of frames and octets sent by the far end device on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were above the excess information rate The number of frames and octets sent on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with the discard eligible bit set 1 Only appears for the network interface November 2000 5 51 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 15 DLCI Performance Statistics 2 of 2 Statistic What It Indicates Total Tx Frames The number of frames and octet
302. nabled the access unit automatically enables the Alternate Link configuration option and establishes an alternate DLCI and EDLCI rerouting traffic over the backup interface See Table 3 15 Management PVC Options to configure the alternate DLCI and alternate EDLCI NOTE Auto Backup cannot be enabled unless LMI Behavior is set to Independent see Table 3 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options Enable Reroutes traffic over the backup alternate interface Disable Does not reroute traffic over the backup interface DLCI Down Backup Activation Delay sec Possible Settings 0 3600 Default Setting 0 Specifies the number of seconds the unit will wait once a DLCI is declared down before it initiates backup A DLCI is declared down when the DLCI changes to Inactive status in an LMI response or when there is an LMI or physical link failure When a delay is configured the unit is more tolerant of network glitches or repeated short outages before going into backup minimizing bouncing between network and backup services 0 3600 Specifies the amount of time for the delay DLCI Down Backup Activation Transition Threshold Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 1 Specifies how many times a primary destination DLCI transitions up or down during the DLCI Down Backup Activation Delay period before the unit initiates backup provided the DLCI is active when the delay period ends 1 10 Speci
303. nation Cable Feature No 9007 F1 500 C 12 Canadian T1 Line Interface Cable Feature No 3100 F1 510 C 13 m Ethernet Port Connector 00 cc ccc eect teens C 13 a Nodem GOMMEGION scsiriidiiitdinitdiikti dees teh See oad desis So dee BOR C 14 E ISPNIDBMGONMECION siict wis sxteaheioease caddie balsa bbone da S aA C 14 ISDN Modular Gable sis cneccc caeeenpoenhnge capped biarecpneeact C 14 D Technical Specifications E Equipment List E LEGUIDMENE acisianadene sean Moaedtianssatnetednatadaareaam snd E 1 ESENE 226 bods EES er RES EEES DHEES EbEEE EERO ERED E 4 Index viii November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 About This Guide Purpose and Intended Audience Document Organization 9128 A2 GB20 40 This document contains information needed to properly set up configure and verify operation of the FrameSaver SLV Service Level Verifier 9126 9128 or 9128 ll a T1 frame relay access device It is intended for system designers engineers administrators and operators You must be familiar with the functional operation of digital data communications equipment and frame relay networks Section Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Description About the FrameSaver SLV ldentifies how the FrameSaver SLV 9126 and 9128 91 28 II fit into Paradyne s Service Level Management SLM solution and describes its features User Interface and Basic Operation Shows how to navigate the m
304. nd Save the change The default discovery mode is 1MPort management DLCls multiplexed with data DLCls on Port 1 In this mode for each DLCI discovered on the network the unit creates a multiplexed network interface DLCI which contains two EDLCls one for Port 1 data and the other for management a standard Port 1 DLCI with the same number as the network interface DLCI and a Management PVC then cross connects them When LMI is active on the network interface and PVC status information with provisioned DLC numbers is next received from the network the unit automatically saves the settings to the Current Configuration area Configuration options set by selecting a discovery mode can be manually modified refined or deleted at any time using the Configuration menus No previously discovered and configured DLCls or cross connections will be removed unless authorized or Automatic Circuit Removal is enabled see Automatically Removing a Circuit Additional discovered DLCls will be configured according to the current Frame Relay Discovery Mode setting Selecting or changing the setting will not affect IP Addresses or Subnet Masks NOTE When auto configuration creates a multiplexed DLCI but a standard DLCI is needed change the DLCI to standard from the network DLC Records screen Configuration Network gt DLCI Records 3 14 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration When a Frame Relay Discovery Mode is changed and save
305. nds FECNs to notify users of data traffic congestion in the same direction of the frame carrying the FECN indicator 5 52 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance Frame Relay Performance Statistics 9128 A2 GB20 40 The following statistics appear when Frame Relay is selected from the Performance Statistics menu Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Frame Relay All counts continue to increment until the maximum value is reached 222 2 then the count starts over The NextLink and PrevLink function keys only appear when multiple frame relay links have been configured For FrameSaver units with an ISDN DBM All enabled multilink aggregate links are available for selection from the Frame Relay Performance Statistics screen The multilink aggregate link must be enabled if statistics are to be collected for this frame relay link When the frame relay link is the multilink aggregate link statistics for its related constituent links can be viewed To view the statistics for a multilink constituent link select the ConstLinkStats function key All enabled multilink constituent links become available for selection Select the desired constituent link from the Multilink Constituent Link field The frame relay performance statistics collected for any frame relay link are collected for multilink frame relay links unless the link is a multilink aggregate link In this case statistics for Frame
306. neces 3 23 Changing Operating MOdG ciisaatetecedieeidieveatiwidetegts 3 23 E Configuration Option Tables c22cc7aciebagterdtiwieiengasdwraedies es 3 24 Configuring the Overall System 00 c cece eee 3 25 Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System 3 25 Configuring Service Level Verification Options 3 28 Configuring General System Options 00000ee eee 3 30 Configuring Physical Interfaces 006 c cece eee eee eee 3 33 Configuring the Network Interface 00 cece eee eee 3 33 Configuring a User Data Port 0 0 0 ccc cece eee 3 37 Configuring the DSX 1 Interface 0 00 cee eee 3 42 Configuring the ISDN DBM Interface 0 0020 eae 3 44 setting Up ISDN Link Proiiles cgccciecrstacicinetateeisigners 3 48 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Contents Assigning Time Slots Cross Connections 000220eee eee eee 3 50 Assigning Frame Relay Time Slots to the Network Interface 3 51 Assigning DSX 1 Time Slots to the Network Interface 3 52 Assigning a Synchronous Data Port to Network or SAT TME GOS vasdoi pda nia Sindee emcee Seinen Se 3 58 Clearing ASSIMO cerere tenne irere etie teie eea teena 3 59 Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface 000e eee eee 3 60 Manually Configuring DLCI Records 20 0 cc cece ee eee ee 3 63 Configuring PVG COnne ctionS cc iicecadendgicee aduedadess ddaes
307. nfiguration Table 3 3 General System Options 3 of 3 System Alarm Relay Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether an alarm condition for the unit will activate the system alarm relay The alarm relay is deactivated when the condition causing the alarm is corrected If more than one alarm condition is present the alarm relay remains active until all alarm conditions are cleared You can also deactivate an alarm via the System Alarm Relay Cut Off selection from the Control menu however the alarm itself is not cleared When another alarm condition is detected the alarm is reactivated again requiring another manual deactivation of the alarm relay Display Conditions This option only appears for a FrameSaver SLV 9128 or 9128 II installed in the 9000 Series Access Carrier Alarm conditions are Alarm Indication Signal AIS received at the Network DSX 1 or PRI interface Continuous Loss of Signal LOS condition at the Network DSX 1 or PRI interface CTS Down DBM Download Required DBM BRI Card Failed Device Fail DLC Down DTR Down Ethernet Link Down Excessive Error Rate EER detected at the Network or PRI interface Internal Modem Failed ISDN Network Failure LMI Down Network Communication Link Down Out of Frame OOF at Network DSX 1 or PRI Primary or Secondary Clock Failure Power Supply Fan Failure RTS Down Self Test Failure SLV Latency Exceeded SLV
308. nfigured Maximum Link Rate for the link This message appears for multilink aggregate frame relay links if LMI is down on any of its constituent links No action required 1 nnnn indicates a DLC number of 16 through 1007 2 frame relay link is one of the following Neti FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with a user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface 3 Does not apply to a TS Access Management Link DLCI November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Table 6 1 Alarm Conditions 7 of 7 Troubleshooting Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do Two Level 1 Users Accessing Device Another user with Level 1 security access is currently accessing the unit Be aware that actions of the other user may override your test commands and configuration changes Wait until no other Level 1 users are accessing the unit if testing or configuration will be performed Yellow at DSX 1 A yellow alarm signal is received on the DSX 1 interface DTE has detected a LOS or OOF condition Check that the DSX 1 cable is securely attached at both ends Check the status of the attached equipment Yellow at Network 1 A yellow alarm signal is received on the network interface Network cable problem T1 facility problem Check that
309. nization Role Function i Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Message Area Exit Screen Format Description Menu Path Menu selections made to reach the current screen Device Name unit Customer assigned identification of the FrameSaver 9126 9128 or 9128 II FrameSaver unit s model number Screen Area maintaining the FrameSaver unit Selection display and input fields for monitoring and Function Keys Area a specified key then pressing Enter Specific functions that can be performed by pressing Message Area input fields are in the lower left corner right corner System related information and valid settings for System and Test Status messages are in the lower 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 User Interface and Basic Operation Navigating the Screens You can navigate the screens by m Using keyboard keys Switching between the two screen work areas using function keys Keyboard Keys Use the following keyboard keys to navigate within the screen area Press To Ctrl a Move cursor between the screen area and the screen function keys area Esc Return to the previous screen Right Arrow on same screen row or Move cursor to the next field Tab on any screen row Left Arrow on same screen row or Move cursor to the previous field Ctrl k Backspa
310. nks If a nondigit numeric is entered an Invalid Character x message appears at the bottom of the screen If fewer than three digits numerics are entered an Invalid SPID must be at least 3 digits message appears at the bottom of the screen Clear Clears the SPID field so it can be reentered Local Phone Number 1 or 2 Possible Settings 10 digits Default Setting Clear Provides the telephone number associated with Bearer channel 1 B1 and 2 B2 All blanks is a valid setting 10 digits Enter the telephone number up to 10 digits If a nondigit numeric is entered an Invalid Character x message appears at the bottom of the screen Clear Clears the phone number field so it can be reentered November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Refer to the following table when configuring a PRI DBM Table 3 8 ISDN PRI DBM Physical Interface Options 1 of 3 Interface Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the ISDN interface is available for use Enable The ISDN interface is enabled Disable The ISDN interface cannot be configured nor can it transmit or receive data No PVC connections or frame relay DLCls will be deleted Disabling the ISDN interface results in the following All currently connected ISDN calls are terminated Alarms or traps associated with this interface are not generated or displayed LEDs associated
311. nous terminal access to the menu driven user interface can be limited by m Requiring a login m Assigning an access level to the port or interface An asynchronous terminal can be connected to the unit s COM communications port or its modem port 4 2 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 B gt Procedure Security and Logins To limit asynchronous terminal access to the menu driven user interface 1 Select the appropriate port options Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Communication Port Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Modem Port 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login Limit the effective access level to Level 3 or Level 2 Port Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the port e g if a user has a Level 1 login and Level 2 port access has been set the Level 1 user can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow Level 1 users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 NOTE See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication in Chapter 6 Troubleshooting should you be locked out inadvertent
312. ns All device messages are listed in alphabetical order Table 5 5 Device Messages 1 of 6 Message What It Indicates What To Do Access level is n User s access level is 2 No action needed Read only or 3 user is not authorized to change configurations Already Active Test selected is already Allow test to continue running Select another test Stop the test Blank Entries Removed New had been selected from the Administer Logins screen no entry was made then Save was selected No action needed Reenter the Login ID Password and Access Level Cannot Delete Trap Manager Delete was selected from the Management PVCs Options screen but the PVC had been defined as a trap destination No action needed or configure another path for traps and try again Cannot Save no Level 1 Login IDs Security was being set up but all the logins were assigned either Level 2 or Level 3 access Set up at least one login with Access Level 1 so the unit can be configured Command Complete Configuration has been saved or all tests have been aborted No action needed Connection Refused Seen at an FTP terminal Two menu driven user interface sessions are already in use when a Telnet session was attempted Wait and try again Destination Not Unique Destination entered is already being used Enter another destination indicator
313. nsmitted data Enable Phase inverts the TXC clock Use this setting when long cable lengths between the FrameSaver unit and the DTE are causing data errors Disable Does not phase invert the TXC clock 3 38 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 5 Data Port Physical Interface Options 3 of 5 Transmit Clock Source Possible Settings Internal External Default Setting Internal Determines whether the DTE s transmitted data is clocked into the FrameSaver unit by its internal transmit clock or by the external clock provided by the DTE NOTE Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver unit to abort any physical port tests including any DTE initiated loopback tests Internal The FrameSaver unit uses the interchange circuit DB ITU 114 Transmit Signal Element Timing TXC DCE source for timing the incoming data External The DTE provides the clock for the transmitted data and the FrameSaver unit uses the interchange circuit DA ITU 113 Transmit Signal Element Timing XTXC DTE source for timing the incoming data Monitor RTS Control Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the state of the Request To Send RTS circuits on the user data port will be used to determine when valid data communication is possible with the DTE When this condition is detected CTS is deasserted
314. nt Summaries a DLCI has a high Health Index rating but low volume significant differences between a DLCs average and peak Health Index rating November 2000 9 7 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices Elements Summary Report Compares DLCI traffic with volume and the baseline bandwidth utilization and errors Use this report for DLCI detail information and comparison to identify DLCls with above or below average volume so they can be investigated when there are any significant changes Supplemental Report Shows DLCI availability and latency The information shown in this report is also on other Health reports However these charts show more than ten DLCls at a time so you have a broader view of the service provided by the network Service Level Reports Provide summary information for a group list for a longer reporting period than other reports Executive Service Level Report Provides service level performance for an enterprise on a single page Use this report to assess whether IT service levels are meeting availability and service goals IT Manager Service Level Report Provides service level information for various groups Using this report you can compare service level performance of various groups The report summarizes service levels for a group of DLCls along with details on individual DLCls within that group Customer Service Level Report Provides service level inf
315. nt systems attempting to communicate with the unit Make sure that SNMP Management is set to Enable See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 3 Configuration for Menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management SNMP Management Enable more information about SNMP management configuration options gt Procedure To limit SNMP access through IP addresses 1 Select the SNMP NMS Security options Main Menu gt Configuration gt Management and Communication gt SNMP NMS Security 2 Select and set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Enable IP address checking NMS IP Validation to Enable Specify the number between 1 and 10 of SNMP management systems that are authorized to send SNMP messages to the FrameSaver unit Number of Managers to the desired number Specify the IP address es that identifies the SNMP manager s authorized to send SNMP messages to the unit NMS n IP Address to the appropriate IP address Specify the access allowed for an authorized NMS when IP address validates is performed Access Level to Read or Read Write 3 Save your changes November 2000 See Configuring SNMP NMS Security in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about SNMP NMS Security configuration options 4 11 Security and Logins Cre
316. ntering Information What appears on the screens depends on Current configuration How your network is currently configured Security access level The security level set by the system administrator for each user Data selection criteria What you entered in previous screens 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 2 1 User Interface and Basic Operation Logging On 2 2 Start a session using one of the following methods m Telnet session via An in band management channel through the frame relay network A local in band management channel configured on the DTE port between the FrameSaver unit and the router Dial in connection using the internal modem Direct terminal connection over the COM port When logging on the User Interface Idle screen appears f no security was set up or security was disabled the Main Menu screen appears see Main Menu on page 2 4 You can begin your session f security was set up and is enabled you are prompted for a login Enter your login ID and password When the user interface has been idle a session is automatically ended and the screen goes blank when the unit times out Press Enter to reactivate the interface gt Procedure To log in when security is being enforced 1 Type your assigned Login ID and press Enter 2 Type your Password and press Enter Valid characters All printable ASCII characters Number of characters Up to 10 charact
317. nto its Current Configuration area may take time Allow a minute or more for the downloaded file to be put into the unit s currently active configuration November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 B gt Procedure Operation and Maintenance To initiate an FTP session 1 Start the FTP client program on your host For example on a UNIX host type ftp followed by the FrameSaver unit s IP address If a login and password are required see Creating a Login in Chapter 4 Security and Logins you are prompted to enter them If not press Enter The FTP prompt appears The starting directory is the root directory Use standard FTP commands during the FTP session as well as the following remote FTP commands Command Definition cd directory Change the current directory on the FrameSaver node to the specified directory dir directory Print a listing of the directory contents in the specified directory If no directory is specified the current one is used get file file2 Copy a file from the remote directory of the FrameSaver node to the local directory on the host for configuration files only remotehelp command Print the meaning of the command If no argument is given a list of all Known commands is printed Is directory Print an abbreviated list of the specified directory s contents If no directory is specified the current one is used put file1 file2
318. nutes seconds format Invalid Password Login is required and an incorrect password was entered access is denied Try again Contact your system administrator to verify your password Invalid Test Combination A conflicting loopback or pattern test was in progress when Start was selected to start another test or was active on the same or another interface when Start was selected Wait until other test ends and message clears Cancel all tests from the Test screen Path main test Stop the test from the same screen the test was started from Limit of six Login IDs reached An attempt to enter a new login ID was made and the limit of six login password combinations has been reached Delete another login password combination Reenter the new login ID Limit of Mgmt PVCs reached New was selected from the PVC Connection Table and the maximum number of management PVCs has already been created Do not create the management PVC Delete another management PVC and try again Limit of PVC Connections reached New was selected from the PVC Connection Table and the maximum number of PVCs has already been created Do not create the PVC connection Delete another PVC connection and try again Name Must be Unique Name entered for a management PVC has been used previously Enter another 4 character name for the logical management link
319. oes not use a routing protocol Proprietary Uses a proprietary variant of RIP version 1 to communicate routing information between FrameSaver units A FrameSaver unit must be on the other end of the link This is the factory default for management PVCs configured on multiplexed DLCls see Table 3 12 DLC Record Options Standard_out The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing information only about FrameSaver SLV and FLEX devices in the network This is the factory default for management PVCs configured on standard DLCls NOTE The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the FrameSaver unit for the management interface e g Cisco config t router RIP int serialx IP RIP Receive version 1 ctl z WR See Setting Up So the Router Can Receive RIP Alternate Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 Port n ISDN Link Name Clear Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface to use for this management PVC as the alternate link The interface selected must have at least one DLCI or DLCI with EDLCI defined which is not part of a PVC connection or already assigned as a management PVC Display Conditions This option does not appear unless ISDN backup is available Net1 FR1 Specifies the Network interface as the frame relay link Port n Specifies the frame relay link on the user data port as the alternate destination link for the connect
320. of access allowed to the objects in the MIB This is the type of access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 2 Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP get and set commands Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support 9128 A2 GB20 40 Telnet and FTP options control whether a Telnet or FTP File Transport Protocol session is allowed through an interconnected IP network and the access security applicable to the session Two Telnet sessions can be active at a time see Table 3 17 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Session When a TS Access Management Link has been set up and activated the following options have no effect upon the PVC m Telnet Login Required m Session Access Level m FTP Login Required November 2000 3 77 Configuration Table 3 17 Telnet and FTP Session Options 1 of 2 Telnet Session Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether the FrameSaver unit will respond to a session request from a Telnet client on an interconnected IP network Enable Allows Telnet sessions between the FrameSaver unit and Telnet client Disable Does not allow Telnet sessions Telnet Login Required Possible Settings Enable Dis
321. of time between call retries when an SNMP trap message is sent the wait between call attempts see the Call Retry option 1 10 Sets the number of minutes for the delay between call retry attempts Alternate Dial Out Directory Possible Settings None 1 5 Default Setting None Specifies whether an incomplete call busy or no answer etc resulting from an attempt to send an SNMP trap message is retried using an alternate telephone number Up to 5 alternate call directories can be set up but only one at a time can be used When Call Retry is enabled the alarm directory s telephone number is called first If the call cannot be completed after one additional try then the specified alternate directory s telephone number is called None Does not dial out using one of the alternate directory telephone numbers 1 5 Specifies the call directory containing the telephone number to call if a call cannot be completed using the telephone number in the alarm directory Directory Number A in the Control menu s Modem Call Directories inclusive November 2000 3 85 Configuration Configuring the Ethernet Port 3 86 For the FrameSaver SLV 9128 II only select Ethernet Port from the Management and Communication menu or Ethernet Port Options Screen from the Easy Install screen to configure the Ethernet port see Table 3 20 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Etherne
322. on 1 10 Specifies the number of authorized SNMP managers NMS n IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Provides the IP address of an SNMP manager that is authorized to send SNMP messages to the unit If an SNMP message is received from an unauthorized NMS and its IP address cannot be matched here access is denied and an authenticationFailure trap is generated If a match is found the type of access read only or read write is determined by the corresponding Access Type Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Adds to or changes the NMS IP address Clear Fills the NMS IP address with zeros 3 80 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 18 SNMP NMS Security Options 2 of 2 Access Type Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the type of access allowed for an authorized NMS when IP address validation is performed Display Conditions This option appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command to the MIB objects This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP Ge
323. onnected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXSDN interface ABCD 1111 FXOD busy PLAR idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for a PLAR D3 interface ABCD 0000 PLAR idle PLAR3busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an PLAR D3 interface ABCD 1111 PLAR3busy PLAR4idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for a PLAR D4 interface ABCD 1111 PLAR4idle PLAR4busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an PLAR D4 interface ABCD 0000 PLAR4busy DPO idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for a DPO interface ABCD 0000 DPT idle DPO busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for a DPO interface ABCD 1111 DPT busy DPT idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for a DPT interface ABCD 0000 DPO idle DPT busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for a DPT interface ABCD 1111
324. or FTP access by network service providers with the capability to view unit information and run tests only they cannot change configuration options Level 3 Allows Telnet access by network service providers with the capability to view unit information only they cannot change configuration options or run tests Configuring Management PVCs 3 72 Select Management PVCs to define inband management links by adding or changing Management PVCs see Table 3 15 First DLC records must have been configured for the interface where the Management PVC will reside See Manually Configuring DLC Records for additional information Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Management PVCs Select New or Modify to add or change Management PVCs m When you select New the configuration option field is blank m When you select Modify the values displayed for all fields are based on the PVC ID number that you specified These options do not apply when the Management PVC is designated as a TS Management Link see Configuring Node IP Information for additional information From this screen you can go directly to the PVC Connections screen by selecting the PVCConn function key for easy movement between screens Select the Delete function key a Management PVC ID and respond Yes to the Remove otherwise unused components associated with the deleted PVC prompt for quick removal of unused DLCls If the Management P
325. or previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh PgUp PgDn Select Refresh to update the screen with the twelve most recently collected LMI messages The following information is provided m The internal LMI record number assigned to the packet 1 8000 and the amount of time the utility was running when the packet was captured The maximum amount of time displayed is 4 294 967 seconds s which is reset to 1 second when this amount of time is exceeded m The type of message either Status or Status Enquiry from the captured packet and the number of bytes in the packet The LMI Type identified in the Protocol Discriminator portion of the captured packet and the DLCI number for the packet m The type of information contained in the captured packet either Sequence Number Exchange or Full Status Report m The send and receive rcv sequence numbers from the captured packet 0 255 m On the Packets Received side of the screen PVC status for up to ten DLCls can be shown It shows the DLCI number its active bit status and if Standard LMI is running the DLCs CIR value 6 6 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Troubleshooting Alarms 9128 A2 GB20 40 The following table describes the alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP trap for a physical interface and the frame relay LMIs and DLCls These alarm conditions also generate Health and Status messages seen on the System and Test Status screen Main Menu gt Status Sy
326. ork sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies the maximum number of errors LMI Clearing Event N3 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 1 Configures the LMI defined N3 parameter which sets the number of error free messages that must be received before clearing an error event Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies how many error free messages it will take to clear the error event LMI Status Enquiry N1 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 255 Default Setting 6 Configures the LMI defined N1 parameter which sets the number of status enquiry polling cycles that the user side of the LMI initiates before a full status enquiry is initiated Applies to the user side of a UNI only 1 255 Specifies the number of status enquiry polling cycles that can be initiated before a full status enquiry is initiated November 2000 3 61 Configuration 3 62 Table 3 11 Interface Frame Relay Options 3 of 3 LMI Heartbeat T1 Possible Settings 5 10 15 20 25 30 Default Setting 10 Configures the LMI defined T1 parameter which sets the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages on the user side of the LMI Applies to the user side of a UNI only 5 30 Specifies the number of seconds between the initiation of status enquiry messages in increments of 5 LMI Inbound Heartbeat T2 Poss
327. ormation for customers This report is used to provide service level information to service customers to help them determine optimum service levels needed based upon their own traffic data as well as provide documented evidence for increasing CIR It combines daily volume daily Health exceptions bandwidth distribution average Health Index ratings and availability for each DLCI onto a single page At a Glance Reports Provides consolidated DLCI and network performance information onto a single page At a Glance Report Consolidates bandwidth utilization network traffic events occurring over the reporting period and availability and latency levels information Variables other than bandwidth can be selected for a trend report e g burst octets but a bandwidth trend report should be generated when investigating problems that appear on Exceptions Reports Supplemental Reports and Health reports Use trend reports to view individual variables for DLCls having a high Health Index rating to help locate which variable is causing a problem leading to a DLCI s poor Health Index rating FrameSaver SLV Plus At a Glance Report Performs trend analysis on up to ten specified variables for DLCls see page 9 9 for an example This is the first Network Health report to integrate the FrameSaver SLV s unique monitoring capabilities using the unit s SLV enhanced network statistics 9 8 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Setting
328. ort You cannot change Port Use to Net Link when the Modem PassThru feature is enabled When you try the Cannot change Port Use Modem PassThru is enabled message is displayed Modem PassThru Available to the FrameSaver SLV 9626 only the COM port is connected to the router s auxiliary AUX or console port so the router can be accessed via a dial up connection to the unit When this feature is active a logical connection between the units modem and COM ports is made and data received over the modem port is transmitted out the COM port to the router s AUX or console port When an escape sequence minus minus minus with a minimum of 50 ms between each is detected the FrameSaver unit switches back to normal user interface operation Data Rate Kbps Possible Settings 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 115 2 Default Setting 19 2 Specifies the rate for the COM port in kilobits per second 9 6 115 2 kbps Sets the communication port speed Character Length Possible Settings 7 8 Default Setting 8 Specifies the number of bits needed to represent one character NOTE Character length defaults to 8 and cannot be changed if Port Use is set to Net Link 7 Sets the character length to seven bits 8 Sets the character length to eight bits Use this setting if using the COM port as the network communication link 3 88 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuratio
329. ote Call ID 3 None Backup has never been active on the link Remote device s ID the remote device initiated the call this is the Inbound Call ID If this Remote call origination Last Calling ID of the remote backup device received for the B channel If device originated the call this is the Outbound Phone Number 1 Only appears for a constituent frame relay link 3 Appears for frame relay links with only one constituent and for all constituent frame relay links November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages The following Cause Value Messages are presented in alphabetical order The Cause Number is also provided if you need to convert the message to its corresponding ITU number for your service provider Table 5 12 Most Recent and Previous Cause Value Messages 1 of 6 Cause Message No What It Indicates What To Do Bearer Capability 57 User has requested a Arrange for the desired Not Authorized bearer capability that the capability user is not authorized to use Bearer Capability 65 Device sending this cause Arrange for the desired not Implemented does not support the bearer capability capability i e channel type requested Bearer Capability 58 Bearer capability requested Arrange for the desired Presently Not is supported by the device capability
330. oth phone numbers and Calling IDs are needed gt Procedure 1 Select Link Profiles then Modify Main Menu gt Configuration ISDN gt Link Profiles 2 Add a name and phone number to the ISDN Link Profile s created by Automatic Backup Configuration Name for the destination entered e g Tampa The default setting is HQ_Site for the first ISDN Link Profile Phone numbers entered For Originating a Backup Call For Answering a Backup Call Outbound and Alternate Outbound phone numbers Valid characters can include Numbers 0 9 Special characters and Spaces Parentheses Inbound Calling ID1 and ID2 These are the phone numbers of units from which calls will be accepted Valid characters can include Numbers 0 9 NOTES Remember to include local dial out numbers i e 9 then the number For every originating outbound phone number entered an answering inbound phone number must be entered at the far end and vice versa Maximum Link Rate Kbps set to the appropriate speed if necessary Caller Identification Method set to Proprietary if call validation is not required The setting must be the same at both ends of the circuit An Alternate Outbound Phone Number should a call using the primary Outbound Phone Number be unsuccessful if desired 3 Save the configuration See Table 3 9 ISDN Link Profile Options for configuration information
331. ovember 2000 9 1 Setting Up Network Health for FrameSaver Devices For additional information about installing accessing and managing FrameSaver SLV devices through Concord s Network Health and for information about applicable reports refer to Network Health Installation Guide to help you install the application Network Health User Guide to help you get started using the application Network Health Reports Guide to help you understand and use Frame Relay reports Network Health Traffic Accountant Reports Guide to help you understand and use Traffic Accountant reports Installation and Setup of Network Health Refer to the Network Health Installation Guide for installation instructions and follow the instructions applicable to your network platform Once Network Health is installed you need to set up the application so it will support FrameSaver units Each Network Health application provides a different set of functions called a module Each module used requires a separate license to gain access to those features and functions Make sure you license the Poller application so you can poll SLV units and collect data To use this application 1 Discover network elements units and interfaces in the network 2 Configure the Network Health applications then save them 3 Organize elements into groups for reporting purposes 4 Set up and run reports Setup and operation information is contained in the Network
332. p Configuration to Single_Site_Backup A BRI DBM is already configured for single site backup Modify the HQ_Site Link Profile that Automatic Backup Configuration created to add a phone number Set the criteria by which automatic backup will take place Setting Up the DBM Physical Interface gt Procedure 1 Configure the DBM interface Main Menu gt Configuration gt ISDN Physical 2 Enable the interface and enter the Service Profile IDs SPIDs and local phone numbers 3 Save the configuration See Table 3 7 ISDN BRI DBM Physical Interface Options or Table 3 8 ISDN PRI DBM Physical Interface Options for configuration information 3 16 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Setting Up Automatic Backup Configuration 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration The Automatic Backup Configuration feature is used to automatically create alternate DLC records and PVC connections on the ISDN DBM backup interface for current or newly discovered PVC Connections and Management PVCs This feature is already set up with Single_Site_Backup as the default for units with a BRI DBM and Multi_Site_Backup for units with a PRI DBM If the unit at the central site has a BRI DBM change the Automatic Backup Configuration to Multi_Site_Backup if necessary Main Menu gt Auto Configuration Automatic Backup Configuration If you select Then Single_Site_ Backup default for a BRI DBM Used at remote sites since
333. page show how each RMON default alarm is set by the FrameSaver unit shows the alarm and event types the interval used when generating alarms and thresholds Physical Interface Alarm Defaults a Frame Relay Link Alarm Defaults DLCI Alarm Defaults Paradyne Area DLC Alarm Defaults NetScout Area See Standards Compliance for SNMP Traps for information about how traps work and Traps RMON Specific for traps specific to remote monitoring November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Rising Event Operation If a rising threshold is crossed during the interval shown in a table e g frames dropped by the network the event is armed and an alarm is generated at the end of the interval Only one alarm per event per interval is generated The alarm condition persists until the event has been disarmed reset The event is disarmed when a falling threshold has been crossed and the rising threshold has not been crossed during an interval allowing the event to return to its original disarmed state Physical Interface Alarm Defaults This alarm only applies to the FrameSaver unit s network interface Table B 9 Network Physical Interface Alarm Defaults Rising Falling Sample Event Threshold Threshold Item Type MIB Tag OID 2 Interval Type Default Default Unavailable D MIB DS1 E1 MIB RFC 1406 900 secs Rising 1 1 acednds Tag dsx1TotalUASs 15mins OID 1 3 6
334. performance monitoring graphs are available when the software release for the OpenLane SLM system is Release 5 2 or later Historical SLV graphs provide service level management historical reports so frame relay SLAs can be verified Diagnostic troubleshooting provides an easy to use tool for performing tests which include end to end PVC loopback connectivity and physical interface tests For units with ISDN backup capability provides ISDN physical interface and PVC testing when the software release for the OpenLane SLM system is Release 5 2 or later Basic configuration allows you to configure FrameSaver devices Network DLCI Circuit IDs can also be assigned Automatic SLV device and PVC discovery allows all SLV devices with their SLV Delivery Ratio configuration option enabled to be discovered automatically along with their PVCs A FrameSaver unit can be reset from the OpenLane system Firmware downloading provides an easy to use tool for downloading to an entire network or a portion of the network On demand polling of FrameSaver devices and SNMP polling and reporting are available The maintenance scheduling feature allows for the scheduling of multiple periodic maintenance periods and provides a record of all scheduled maintenance periods past present and future November 2000 1 7 About the FrameSaver SLV NetScout Manager Plus and NetScout Probes Provides complete LAN and WAN traffic analysis and monito
335. r s troubleshooting TS management link Limiting Telnet Access Telnet access can be limited by Disabling Telnet access completely Requiring a login for Telnet sessions that are not on the TS Access Management Link Assigning an access level for Telnet sessions Disabling TS Access Management Link access To limit Telnet access via a service provider s troubleshooting management link see Limiting Telnet or FTP Access Over the TS Access Management Link gt Procedure To limit Telnet access when the session is not on the TS Access Management Link 1 Select the Telnet and FTP Session options Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable Telnet access Telnet Session to Disable Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login Assign an access level Session Access Level to Level 2 or Level 3 NOTE Regardless of a user s login access level a user cannot operate at a level higher than the access level specified for the Telnet session e g if a user has a Level 1 login and Level 2 telnet access has been set the Level 1 user can only operate as a Level 2 user If you are going to allow users to configure the unit keep the access at Level 1 3 Save yo
336. r so they can be used A separate udh file must be created and loaded for each DLCI or link that will be monitored before a customized user history table can be loaded Use a text editor to create these udh files by Copying one of the interface specific files DLCI or link and editing it using one of the examples provided as a guide Copying one of the examples provided and editing the extensions to fit the FrameSaver unit CAUTION Two user history table files are already configured and installed in the unit UserHistory1 and UserHistory2 These files must not be modified These two tables are used to keep SLV data for reports It is always a good idea to rediscover agents and their DLCls before starting to be sure your agent and DLCI lists are current To rediscover agents and their DLCls select the Learn button on the NetScout Manager Plus main window the FrameRelay and Admin radio buttons still selected November 2000 8 13 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices B gt Procedure 1 Open a terminal window and go to NSHOME usr 2 Copy an example or interface specific file to a new file that contains the user history table number 3 Open the new file using a text editor The variables in the file are listed with their OIDs Object IDs The frame relay interface number 101015001 must replace IFN and the DLC number to be monitored must replace DLCI Example frCircuitSentFrames Change 1
337. rStats ClrNearStats Select 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 For the ESF line performance statistics the following performance statistics are kept for each 15 minute interval over the past 24 hour period A Near set anda Far set are kept for each statistic The Far set is based on information kept by the unit at the other end of the local loop and is only available when ANSI performance report messages are enabled in the unit Summary information that appears near the top of the screen includes Near Far Current Interval Timer Contains the number of seconds that have elapsed in the current 15 minute interval for the near or far information which can show a value up to 900 seconds Near Far ESF Error Events Maintains a count of ESF error events as specified by AT amp T TR 54016 which counts CRC and OOF events A maximum of 65 535 error events can be counted Once 65535 is reached it stays at that number until the network issues a reset command 5 58 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance The following performance statistics are collected for ESF line conditions Table 5 17 ESF Line Condition Performance Statistics Statistic What It Indicates Errored Seconds ES Any second with one or more ESF Error events Unavailable Seconds Any second in which service is unavailable Begins UAS incrementing at the onset of 10 consecutive seconds of severely errored seconds SES and stop
338. rameSaver SLV specific support 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 8 1 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Preparation Before getting started you need to copy some OpenLane directories to a NetScout Manager Plus user directory OpenLane provides these directories as a starting point for loading new alarms and creating history files A template of alarms and values for configuring alarms and several templates for creating history files specific to the FrameSaver unit are available OpenLane paradyne directories include the following Properties paradyne fsd file found in O penLane netscout alarms directory Properties paradyne fst file found in OQpenLane netscout alarms directory Alarms slvtemplate fct file found in OpenLane netscout alarms directory User history pd udh files found in O penLane net scout userHistory directory These files should be moved to SNSHOME usr So they can be used See Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template and Creating History Files for additional information 8 2 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Configuring NetScout Manager Plus 9128 A2 GB20 40 For the NetScout Manager Plus main window to appear make sure your environment is set up exactly as specified in your NetScout Readme file You need to Copy the OpenLane directory to a user directory Add frame relay agents to the NetScout Manager Configure agent
339. rap 1 Latency MIB variables should be Absolute all others should be Delta 2 Generally Rising is selected 5 Select the OK button at the bottom of the screen to add this alarm 6 Repeat Steps 3 through 5 until all traps are configured for all DLCls Refer to Configuring Alarms in the NetScout Manager Plus amp NetScout Server Administrator Guide for additional information 8 12 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Creating History Files 9128 A2 GB20 40 Up to 14 additional user history tables can be created in the FrameSaver unit for each interface An interface is a specific DLCI or the entire frame relay interface A table must be created for each DLCI or frame relay link to be monitored Additional user history tables are created using the command line prompt in NetScout Manager Plus to load a file that contains the OIDs Object IDs to be monitored into the unit OpenLane provides several useful examples including three files containing a complete set of OIDs appropriate to the interface to be monitored one for a DLCI one for a frame relay link and one containing system type OIDs Any of these files can be used as a template when creating customized history files specific to the FrameSaver unit These files have a pdn udh user defined history format and are found in the OpenLane netscout userHistory directory The userHistory files should be moved to SNSHOME us
340. rcuit Identifier asynchronous terminal access circuit multiplexed PVCs dial in access Clearing FTP access cross connection assignments 3 50 ISDN access Event LMI SNMP access existing information Telnet access statistics 5 48 conversation elements Clock copyrights A Invert Transmit CRC setting system creating Source 3 30 3 31 a login 4 12 Transmit new PVC connections management links CNIS user history files COM port Ee cross connections connector C 3 CTS to PC or terminal printer cable down to router cables down to Port Device current software revision IN 2 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 D Data Channel Loopback 3 35 b 20 6 32 Delivery Ratio DDR Link Control Identifier DLC 3 74 3 75 3 37 Port physical options port connector pin assignments Rate Kbps selection criteria uploading SLV and packet capture Date amp Time setting DBM BRI Card Failed call performance statistics changing BRI software configuring interface configuring to send traps connector oa 4 Download Required 5 20 forcing backup and placing a call Health and Status messages interface status ISDN problems test status messages tests 6 19 verifying setup DCLB DDR DE Set Default IP Destination 2 6 DLCI EDLCI 3 67 3 68 Link 3 67 3 68 Device message
341. red w Custom 135 67 Add 135 90 153 3 Samples Interval Logging 135 90 153 4 Edit Domain Groups SH LH SH LH Stat Host Conv Delete Test l Learn Property Install SNA oo0oo0oo00000000 eoooooooooS SOSOoSSDSOSDOS Pere FE aN Pot ye Trap Sample DLCI Name DTE DCE lt GrenadaS8 gt Variable Type Rising Falling DLCI 300 1536K 1536K Edit DLCI 301 1536K 1536K DLCI 302 1536K 1536K Download _ DLCI 303 1536K 1536K DLCI 304 1536K 1536K Reve DLCI 305 1536K 1536K DLCI 306 1536K 1536K DLCI 307 1536K 1536K DLCI 308 1536K 1536K Verify that only FrameSaver SLV supported domains appear listed in the Domain column FrameSaver SLV supported domains include ATALK IPX RMON DECNET NETB SNA IP NET VINES IPV6 OSI NEWVINES Verify that S statistics collection appears for each domain listed in the Group column H hosts appears for the IP domain only Dashes occupy all other positions under the Group column Zeros appear under the Samples and Interval SH and LH columns Dashes appear under all Logging columns Stat Host Conv If all these requirements are met no further action is required Close the Configuration Manager window If all these requirements are not met a FrameSaver SLV supported domain needs to be added or if an unsupported domain needs to be deleted the Prop
342. represents the cross connect status of the associated top field DSX 1 time slot DSX 1 Timeslot Assignment Status Screen Example main status timeslot dsx_display 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 DSX 1 TIMESLOT ASSIGNMENT STATUS D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 D08 D05 1 01r D05 1 02r D05 1 03r S1P01 S1P01 S1P01 S1P01 S1P01 D09 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 FrameRly1 D17 D118 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Unassign Slot 1 Tl FR NAM Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 The Cross Connect Status Field bottom Indicates the blank The time slot is unassigned Nett tt Network interface 1 time slot ft is assigned to DSX 1 time slot 01 to 24 using Clear Channel Nett ttr Network interface 1 time slot ft is assigned to DSX 1 time slot 01 to 24 using Robbed Bit Signaling r DBM Interface Status 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance The following information is available for DSX 1 interface time slots DO1 D24 When an ISDN DBM is installed these interface statuses appear when DBM Interface Status is selected from the Status menu Main Menu gt Status gt DBM Interface Status DBM Interface Status Screen Example main status dbm Device Name Node A 9128
343. rface and Basic Operation Once you reach the desired menu or screen select a field to view or change or issue a command Press the Tab or right arrow key to move the cursor from one field to another The current setting or value appears to the right of the field Entering Information 9128 A2 GB20 40 You can enter information in one of three ways Select the field then Manually type in enter the field value or command Example Entering bjk as a user s Login ID on the Administer Logins screen from the Control menu branch Type in enter the first letter s of a field value or command using the unit s character matching feature Example When configuring a port s physical characteristics with the Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks configuration option field selected possible settings include Disable Local DTPLB DCLB and Both entering d or D displays the first value starting with d Disable In this example entering dt or DT would display DTPLB as the selection Switch to the function keys area and select or enter a designated function key Example To save a configuration option change select Save S or s is the designated function key If a field is blank and the Message area displays valid selections press the spacebar the first valid setting for the field appears Continue pressing the spacebar to scroll through other possible settings November 2000 2 9 User Interface and Basic Operation
344. rface is assigned to the network interface time slot identified right above it Nit 3 52 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration DSX 1 to Network Time Slot Assignment Screen Example Page 1 main config tslot_assign dsx 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 1999 23 32 DSX 1 TO NETWORK 1 ASSIGNMENTS Page 1 of 2 N01 N02 N03 N04 N05 NO06 N07 N08 DSX 1 01 DSX 1 02 DSX 1 03 DSX 1 04 Assigned Assigned Assigned Assigned N09 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 DSX 1 09 DSX 1 01 Available Available Available Available Available Available N17 N18 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Available Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save PgDn PgUp ClearAll FrAssign Page 2 of 2 is for defining signaling assignments and trunk conditioning for each DSX 1 interface time slot See DSX 1 Signaling Assignments and Trunk Conditioning for an example of this screen For easy movement between screens select the FrAssign function key to go directly to the Frame Relay Network Assignments screen Time Slot Assignment Rules m Valid Network time slots are either Available or contain a DSX 1 time slot assignment Valid DSX 1 time slots are those that are unassigned including the currently assigned time slot Order of display is as follows Available is the first selection Then from the lowest DSX 1 interface to the highest DSX 1
345. ring functions for FrameSaver devices The following features are supported using this application Thresholds for RMON 1 Remote Monitoring Version 1 alarms and events can be configured Performance monitoring can be performed using collected RMON 2 Version 2 data NetScout Manager Plus s Protocol Directory and Distribution functionality allows FrameSaver devices to measure up to eleven network layer protocols and report the amount of traffic generated by each Its IP Top Talkers and Listeners reporting identifies the devices using network bandwidth for traffic and protocol analysis identifying the network s top six users In addition it collects performance statistics from FrameSaver devices Up to 900 samples can be stored in 15 minute buckets with 96 buckets in a 24 hour period for up to five days worth of data Optional standalone NetScout Probes can be used with FrameSaver devices at sites where full 7 layer monitoring an unlimited number of protocols and advanced frame capture and decode capabilities are desired 1 8 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 User Interface and Basic Operation This chapter contains information about how to access use and navigate the menu driven user interface It includes the following Logging On Main Menu m Screen Work Areas Navigating the Screens Keyboard Keys Function Keys Selecting from a Menu Switching Between Screen Areas Selecting a Field E
346. rk Physical Tests DSX 1 Physical Tests 2 Select the desired pattern in the Send or Monitor field If sending monitoring a user defined pattern enter the the desired 2 byte hexadecimal value in the field next to Send or Monitor When sending a pattern the InjectERR function key appears Use LnjectERR if you want to inject a bit error in the transmitted bit pattern 3 To send a pattern highlight the Send command to send a pattern and press Enter To monitor the test highlight the Start command and press Enter The length of time that the test has been running is shown in the Result column An error count is also displayed When monitoring a pattern the ResetMon function key appears ResetMon resets the error count to zero 4 To stop the test press Enter to send the Stop command Start reappears and the status of the test changes back to Inactive November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Troubleshooting IP Ping Test An IP Ping test can be run to test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and any FrameSaver unit router or NMS to which it has a route Times when you might want to run an IP Ping test are To test connectivity between the FrameSaver unit and any FrameSaver unit in the network to verify that the path is operational Select Procedure 1 to ping any far end FrameSaver unit To verify the entire path between a newly installed remote site FrameSaver unit and the central site NMS During a remote site installation a
347. rk interface will not affect the state of LMI on Port 1 Traffic Policing Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether or not CIR Committed Information Rate and EIR Excess Information Rate will be enforced by the unit on frames being sent on network frame relay links Enable CIR and EIR are enforced Frames that exceed CIR will be marked Discard Eligible DE These frames are counted in the Above CIR but within EIR category until this category is full Once full additional frames are counted as being in the Within CIR category Frames in excess of EIR will be discarded Disable CIR and EIR are not enforced LMI Error Event N2 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 3 Configures the LMI defined N2 parameter which sets the number of errors that can occur on the LMI link before an error is reported Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1 10 Specifies the maximum number of errors November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options 3 of 3 LMI Clearing Event N3 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 1 Configures the LMI defined N3 parameter which sets the number of error free messages that must be received before clearing an error event Applies to both the user and network sides of a UNI 1
348. rmat 0 11 00 16 11 05 16 11 10 17 11 15 17 11 20 16 11 25 16 Wed Oct 21 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 10 301 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 4 10 301 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 10 301 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices 5 Select History List from the View menu The History List window opens The newly defined user history variables should appear on this list History List 6 Highlight the desired set of user history variables and select the OK button Data is gathered based upon the configured user history variables This may take some time so please be patient 7 Select 2D or 3D Bar from the Format menu if desired 3D Bar is shown File Yiew Format NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 Interval 60 Seconds 0 11 02 16 11 07 16 11 12 17 11 17 17 11 22 17 11 27 17 Wed Oct 21 10 32 2 1 6 10 301 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 4 10 301 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 10 301 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 8 17 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices Using the 2D or 3D Bar to view the user history data collected you can click on a particular bar and get an expanded view of the data NetScout Custom History GrenadaS1 DLCI 301 NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 Interval 60 Seconds File Yiew Format 150004 100004 11 26 17 11 27 17 11 28 17 11 29 16 11 30 16 Wed Oct 21 1 10 32 2 1 6 10 301 B 1 10 32 2 1 8 10
349. rom SNMP user at ipAddress November 2000 B 9 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 4 authenticationFailure Trap 2 of 2 Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause authenticationFailure Variable Binding devLastTrapString An ISDN backup call has devHealthAndStatus mib been received but the call was rejected String Bad Caller ID phone phone is either a phone number or no number Traps linkUp and linkDown These traps are supported on the following interfaces Network DSX 1 and synchronous data ports Physical sublayer interfaces m Frame relay logical link layer interfaces Table B 5 linkUp and linkDown Traps Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause linkDown A failure in one of the A failure in one of the communication interfaces communication interfaces has has occurred occurred linkUp One of the failed One of the failed communication communication interfaces is interfaces is up and operational up and operational linkUp and linkDown variable bindings are in Table B 6 Physical and logical sublayers are represented by the entry in the MIB II Interfaces Table It is supported by a combination of the Frame Relay Extension MIB and either the Frame Relay Services MIB or the Frame Relay DTEs MIB November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Table B 6 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults
350. rrors 99999 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit InjectErr ResetMon The InjectErr function key at the bottom of the screen only appears when a Send Pattern Test is Active Select InjectErr to inject a single bit error into the pattern being sent The ResetMon function key at the bottom of the screen only appears when a Monitor 511 test pattern is Active Select ResetMon to reset the monitor pattern error counter CAUTION You should not run these tests with frame relay equipment attached you must disconnect the frame relay equipment and use external test equipment November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Line Loopback 9128 A2 GB20 40 Troubleshooting The Line Loopback LLB loops the information received on the selected interface back to the source of the loopback When used with a pattern test at the remote node LLB determines whether the problem is with the sending device or the T1 facility Main Menu gt Test Network Physical Tests Framer Other lt i Ti All LLB The T1 Interface 1S Interface i a 97 15336 CAUTION This test may affect operation of frame relay PVCs assigned to the selected port While in loopback the frame relay link will be down so any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted An LLB cannot be started when one of the following tests is active Payload Loopback Send Remote Line Loopback or an active Monitor
351. rt Connection for each current user is identified along with the user s login ID B gt Procedure To end the session 1 Press Ctrl a to switch to the function keys area of the screen 2 Type e Exit and press Enter For aterminal connected to the COM port the session is ended For aterminal connected to the modem port the session is ended and the modem is disconnected For a Telnet connection the session is closed and if no other Telnet or FTP session is occurring over the connection the modem is disconnected If ending a session from the Configuration branch see Saving Configuration Options in Chapter 3 Configuration 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 2 3 User Interface and Basic Operation Main Menu Entry to all of the FrameSaver unit s tasks begins at the Main Menu which has six menus or branches The Access Level at the top of the screen only appears when security has been set up main Access Level 1 9128 II Device Name Node A 05 26 2000 23 32 Slot 1 Type T1 FR NAM MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control Easy Install Ctrl a to access these functions Select To Status View diagnostic tests interfaces PVC connections and statistics You can also display LEDs and FrameSaver unit identity information Test Select and cancel test for the FrameSaver unit s interfaces Configuration Display and edit the configuration opt
352. ry Uses network timing received from incoming SLV communications and provides network based synchronization information to other devices in the network Controller Uses its own internal time of day clock and provides synchronization information to other devices in the network based upon its own clock NOTE Only one device in the network should be configured as the SLV synchronization controller None Incoming timing information is ignored and no timing information is sent out This setting should only be used when network synchronization is not desirable or when a single unit connects multiple networks or network segments 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 29 Configuration Configuring General System Options Select General from the System menu to configure the general system configuration options see Table 3 3 Main Menu gt Configuration System General Table 3 3 General System Options 1 of 3 Test Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether or not loopback and pattern tests have a duration after which they are terminated automatically Enable All Loopback and Pattern tests have a timeout This setting is recommended when the FrameSaver unit is managed remotely through an in band data stream If the FrameSaver unit is accidently commanded to execute a disruptive test on the interface providing the management access control can be regained
353. s MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciStsInactiveSecs 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 8 1 D Backup Count MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciStsBackupCnt 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 2 1 9 1 D Backup Time MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtDlciStsBackupTime 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 5 1 D Average Latency MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyAvg 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 6 1 D Maximum Latency MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyMax 1 Interface ID of the frame relay link D DLCI number H Host control index P Protocol index T The time mask N Additional numeric index used by tables like frame or burst size 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 B 29 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 14 History OID Cross Reference 4 of 5 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 3 1 8 1 D Latency Packet Size MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtLatencyPacketSz 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 2 1 N Frame Size Upper Limit 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtFrameSzUpLimit 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 4 2 1 3 1 N Frame Size Count 1 5 MIB pdn_FrExt mib E Tag devFrExtFrameSzCount 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 5 2 1 2 1 D
354. s e Last System Reset e Health and Status Test Status PVC Tests DLCI Number PVC Loopback Send Pattern e Monitor Pattern e Connectivity Test Call System and Test Status LMI Reported DLCls PVC Connection Status Timeslot Assignment Status DBM Interface Status P Routing Table Performance Statistics MAIN MENU Test Configuration Auto Configuration Control Easy Install Trap Event Log Display LEDs and Control Leads dentity LMI Reported DLCIs DLCI Status CIR bps PVC Connection Status Source Link DLCI EDLC Primary Destination Link DLCI EDLCI Statusl Alternate Destination Link DLCI EDLCI Status Timeslot Assignment Status Network Timeslot Status DSX 1 Timeslot Status Identity System NAM DBM Trap Event Log e Number of Trap Events Time Elapsed Since Event Event MAIN MENU Status Configuration Auto Configuration Control Easy Install Test lt PVC Tests Network Data Port ISDN Call Physical Tests Network Data Port PRI Other IP Ping Lamp Test Abort All Tests Physical Tests e Local Loopbacks Remote Loopbacks e Send Monitor Pattern Tests Configuration ee Edit Display oe System Frame Relay and LMI Service Level Verification General A 4 System Network DSX 1 Data Ports ISDN Time Slot Assignment PVC Connections
355. s 5 11 troubleshooting problems 6 14 dial backup Dial In Access controlling Dial Out dialControl traps dialCtlPeerCall traps Directory Alternate Dial Out disabling SNMP access system alarm relay disaster recovery 3 16 3 23 Discard Eligible DE 9128 A2 GB20 40 Index Disconnect modem 5 64 Time Minutes 3 79 B 90 3 94 discovering elements DLCls Discovery frame relay FR 3 13 Frame Relay Mode saving a mode change time slot 7 3 displaying configuration options identity information LEDs and control leads DLCI 3 74 3 75 Alternate assigning to a Backup Group Destination 3 67 3 68 Down 5 20 6 7 on SLV Timeout interface status monitoring user history Number Priority Records Source statistics status 5 28 Traps on Interfaces Type 3 63 domains and groups correcting verifying download downloading determining when completea 5 72 MIBs and SNMP traps SLV alarms software user history file DSX 1 adapter pin assignments C 11 assigning data port to time slots assigning time slots connector pin assignments interface LEDS setting up signaling assignments timeslot assignments trunk conditioning DTE Loopback 6 30 port connector pin assignments port initiated loopbacks DTLB DTR control lead down down from Port 1 Devic
356. s 16 1007 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the number for the DLCI in the DLCI record The parameter determines which DLCI record is used for transferring data on a particular frame relay interface DLCI numbers range from 0 to 1023 However the numbers 0 15 and 1008 1023 are reserved Entry of an invalid number results in the error message Value Out of Range 16 1007 If the DLCI number is part of a connection this field is read only NOTES If aDLCl number is not entered the DLCI record is not created The DLCI number entered must be unique for the interface Changing settings for this configuration option causes the FrameSaver unit to abort any active frame relay tests 16 1007 Specifies the DLC number inclusive DLCI Type Possible Settings Standard Multiplexed Default Setting For user data port DLCls Standard For network interface DLCIs Multiplexed Specifies whether the DLCI is standard or multiplexed This field is read only when the selected DLCI is used in a PVC or Management link connection and the DLCI Type is Standard Display Conditions This option does not appear for a user data port and it cannot be changed if the DLCI is specified as the TS Access Management Link Standard Supports standard DLCls as specified by the Frame Relay Standards Use this setting when a non FrameSaver unit is at the other end Multiplexed Enables
357. s Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 14 Node IP Options 2 of 3 Default IP Destination Possible Settings None Modem COM Ethernet PVCname Default Setting None Specifies an IP destination to route data that does not have a specifically defined route Examples f the default IP network is connected to the communications port select COM f the default IP network is connected to a far end device over the management PVC named London for the remote device located in the London office select the PVC name London as defined by the Name configuration option Table 3 15 Management PVC Options NOTE Ifthe link to the IP destination selected as the default route becomes disabled or down the unrouteable data will be discarded Make sure that the link selected is operational and if that link goes down change the default destination CAUTION Use care when configuring a default route to an interface that has a subnet route configured at a remote end where the NMS router LAN adapter terminal server etc is connected Communicating with an unknown IP address on the subnet will cause temporary routing loops which will last 16 iterations times the retry count None No default network destination is specified Unrouteable data will be discarded This is the recommended setting Modem Specifies that
358. s Identity Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit DBM Interface Status will not appear on the menu if the unit does not have the optional ISDN DBM feature NOTE Status messages contained in the following sections are in alphabetical order 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 5 17 Operation and Maintenance System and Test Status Messages System and test status information is selected from the Status menu Main Menu gt Status gt System and Test Status The following information is included on this screen Self Test Results Messages see Table 5 6 Last System Reset Date and Time Health and Status Messages see Table 5 7 m Test Status Messages see Table 5 8 Self Test Results Messages One of these self test result messages appears in the Self Test Results field at the top of the System and Test Status screen Table 5 6 Self Test Results Messages Message What It Indicates What To Do Failure xxxxxxxx An internal failure occurred XXXXXXXX represents an 8 digit hexadecimal failure code used by service personnel Record the failure code before resetting the unit otherwise the error information will be lost 1 Record the failure code 2 Reset the unit 3 Contact your service representative Passed No problems were found during power on or reset No action needed Last System Reset Date and Time This field indica
359. s backup charges when redundant PVCs have been configured Display Conditions This option is not available on a user data port or ISDN DBM interface A Z Specifies the designation for this group of DLCls Only DLCls in a PVC will be considered part of a Backup Group None No Backup Groups have been set up November 2000 3 65 Configuration Configuring PVC Connections 3 66 The Auto Configuration feature automatically configures PVC Connections and their DLCI Records PVC Connections can also be created manually see Table 3 13 Main Menu gt Configuration PVC Connections From this screen you can go directly to the Management PVC screen by selecting the MgmtPVCs function key for easy movement between screens Quick removal of unused DLCls and ISDN Link Profiles except for HQ_Site if the model has an ISDN DBM installed included in an existing PVC Connection is also available when the Delete function key is selected and you respond Yes to the Remove otherwise unused components associated with the deleted PVC prompt Table 3 13 PVC Connection Options 1 of 3 Source Link Possible Settings Port n ISDN Link Name Net1 FR1 Default Setting Initially blank no default Specifies the frame relay interface that starts a PVC connection the from end of a from to link The only valid settings for this configuration option are frame relay interfaces that have at least one DLCI or EDLCI define
360. s extensive online Help system the application is self documenting and you have access to the most current system information gt Procedure To set up FrameSaver SLV support 1 2 oo Oot a Start the OpenLane services then access the application Enter Admin for access to customer profiles frame relay access facilities components and PVC components Add FrameSaver devices Create customer profiles Set up historical data collection Set up SLV report filters for Web access to report data See the Quick Start Installation Instructions to learn how to perform these steps and for additional information November 2000 7 3 Setting Up OpenLane for FrameSaver Devices 7 4 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Setting Up NetScout Manager Plus for FrameSaver Devices This chapter includes NetScout Manager Plus information as it relates to FrameSaver SLV devices It includes the following Preparation Configuring NetScout Manager Plus Adding FrameSaver SLV Units to the NetScout Manager Plus Network Verifying Domains and Groups Correcting Domains and Groups Adding SLV Alarms Using a Template Editing Alarms Adding SLV Alarms Manually Creating History Files Installing the User Defined History Files Monitoring a DLCI s History Data Monitoring the Agent Using NetScout Manager Plus Statistical Windows Supported Release 5 5 or higher of the NetScout Manager Plus software provides F
361. s incrementing after 10 consecutive seconds of no SESs Severely Errored Any second with 320 or more CRC errors or one or more Seconds SES Out Of Frame OOF events Bursty Errored Any second with more than one but less than 320 CRC errors Seconds BES Controlled Slip Any second with one or more controlled slips a replication or Seconds CSS deletion of a DS1 frame by the receiving device This is collected for network performance statistics only Loss of Frame Count The number of Loss of Frame conditions LOFC Worst Interval The largest number of seconds for either ES UAS SES BES or CSS or the greatest Loss of Frame Count LOFC If more than one interval contains the same worst value then the oldest interval is displayed 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 5 59 Operation and Maintenance DBM Call Performance Statistics 5 60 When an ISDN DBM is installed these statistics are available for ISDN calls and call attempts You can clear these statistics by selecting the ClrDBMStats function key or you can clear all performance statistics for the system Main Menu gt Status Performance Statistics Clear All Statistics Clearing these statistics will not affect performance statistics stored in user history for the system The statistics are only cleared locally Table 5 18 DBM Call Performance Statistics Statistic What It Indicates Total Call Attempts Number of
362. s sent on the selected DLCI Tx Octets of the frame relay link with backward explicit congestion notifications With BECN Set BECNSs are sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator Total Rx Frames Total number of data frames and octets 8 bit bytes received Rx Octets for the selected DLCI on the frame relay link Within CIR The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were within the committed information rate Between CIR amp EIR The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were between the committed information rate and excess information rate Above EIR The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link that were above the excess information rate With DE Set The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with the discard eligible bit set With BECN Set The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with backward explicit congestion notifications BECNs are sent to notify users of data traffic congestion in the opposite direction of the frame carrying the BECN indicator With FECN Set The number of frames and octets received on the selected DLCI of the frame relay link with forward explicit congestion notifications The network se
363. s value is contained 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 B 25 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Object ID Cross References Numeric Order The FrameSaver unit supports automatic generation of RMON alarm and event information Each alarm sets an SNMP variable to monitor When the threshold set for the monitored variable is exceeded an SNMP trap or a log event is sent This table is helpful in identifying alarm conditions being tracked when viewing the NetScout Custom History screen shown below which provides the OID instead of the alarm condition NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 NetScout Custom History Grenada51 DLCI 301 Interval 60 Seconds File Yiew 0 11 00 16 11 05 16 11 10 17 11 15 17 11 20 16 11 25 16 Wed Oct 21 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 32 2 1 6 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 4 10 301 1 3 6 1 4 1 1795 2 24 2 6 9 4 1 1 17 10 301 See Table B 14 for an RMON history OID cross reference and Table B 15 for an RMON alarm OID cross reference B 26 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Table B 14 History OID Cross Reference 1 of 5 Object ID OID Item MIB Tag 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 5 1 Link Speed MIB MIB II RFC 1573 Tag ifSpeed 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 1 All DLCI LMI Rx Octets MIB MIB Il RFC 1573 Tag iflnOctets 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 16 1 All DLCI LMI Tx Octets MIB MIB II RFC 1573 Tag
364. se number to the dbmprog ocd file to start the upgrade If the message displayed is Then DBM Download Required Errors were detected during the DBM download The domprog ocd file will need to be downloaded again dbmprog ocd File Transfer Complete The download was successful dbmprog ocd File Transfer Failed The download was not successful Possible cause A bad or invalid file or the wrong checksum A different domprog ocd file will need to be downloaded for the DBM to become operational Repeat the step or end the FTP session 5 Close the FTP session 6 Verify that the new software release was successfully installed as the DBM Software Revision Main Menu gt Status gt Identity November 2000 5 71 Operation and Maintenance Determining Whether a Download Is Completed To see whether a download has completed check the Identity screen Main Menu gt Status gt Identity Check Alternate Software Rev under the NAM Identity column m f a software revision number appears the file transfer is complete fIn Progress appears the file is still being transferred m f Invalid appears no download has occurred or the download was not successful Changing Software Once a software upgrade is downloaded it needs to be activated When activated the unit resets then executes the downloaded software With this feature you control when the upgrade software is imp
365. se the FTP session SLV statistics and or LMI Packet Capture data are now available for reporting November 2000 5 73 Operation and Maintenance Turning Off the System Alarm Relay 5 74 For carrier mounted FrameSaver units an alarm system relay is provided by the 9000 Series Access Carrier This relay activates a light or buzzer when an alarm condition is detected in one of the FrameSaver units Once the alarm relay is connected enabling the System Alarm Relay option activates this feature see Table 3 3 General System Options Once activated the relay is turned off in one of the following ways The alarm condition that activated the relay no longer exists The relay stays on until all alarm conditions have been corrected The System Alarm Relay option can be disabled Main Menu gt Configuration System General System Alarm Relay Cut Off can be selected Main Menu gt Control gt System Alarm Relay Cut Off See Alarm Relay Connector in the 9000 Series Access Carrier Installation Instructions for information about connecting the alarm relay November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Troubleshooting 9128 A2 GB20 40 This chapter includes the following Problem Indicators Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power Restoring Communication with a Misconfigured Unit Troubleshooting Management Link Feature LMI Pac
366. ser data port DTPLB Active Port 2 A Data Terminal Payload Loopback DTPLB is active on the synchronous user data port DTR Down from Port 1 Device The DTR control lead from the device connected to the user data port is deasserted EER at ISDN PRI Active Idle ISDN PRI DBM only The error rate of the received ISDN network signal exceeds the currently configured threshold This condition only occurs if the network interface is configured for ESF framing and a PRI dial backup module DBM is installed Active Backup call was in progress Idle DBM was in Idle mode This condition clears when the error rate falls below the threshold value which may take up to 15 minutes EER at Network 1 The error rate of the received network signal exceeds the currently configured threshold This condition only occurs if the network interface is configured for ESF framing This condition clears when the error rate falls below the threshold value which may take up to 15 minutes Ethernet Link Down FrameSaver SLV 9128 II only The Ethernet port is enabled but communication between the management system and the unit is not currently possible on the port Internal Modem Failed The unit s internal modem failed to pass the self test 1 nnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 2 frame relay link is one of the following Neti FR1 The frame relay link specified for the networ
367. set to Net Link None No routing is used Standard_out The device will send standard RIP messages to communicate routing information about other FrameSaver units in the network Standard RIP messages received on this link are ignored NOTE The router must be configured to receive RIP on the port connected to the COM port configured as the management interface e g Cisco config t router RIP int serialx IP RIP Receive version 1 ctl z WR To create this management interface make sure that Node or COM port IP Information has been set up see Configuring Node IP Information November 2000 3 91 Configuration Table 3 21 Communication Port Options 5 of 5 Link Protocol Possible Settings PPP SLIP Default Setting PPP Specifies the link layer protocol to be used Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network communication link Port Use option is set to Net Link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link PPP Point to Point Protocol SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol Configuring the Modem Port 3 92 Select Modem Port from the Management and Communication menu to configure the modem port see Table 3 22 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Modem Port Table 3 22 Modem Port Options 1 of 4 Port Use Possible Settings Terminal Net Link Default Setting Terminal Assigns a
368. sion Threshold 4 Specify the amount of delay after a DLCI is declared operation before backup is ended Backup Restoration Delay 5 Specify When Auto Backup Allowed Always or Restrict If Restrict is selected specify the days and hours of the week during which automatic backup can take place 6 Save the configuration See Table 3 23 Auto Backup Criteria Options for configuration information 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 21 Configuration Configuring the DBM Interface to Send SNMP Traps The ISDN DBM interface can be specified as an interface that monitors and generates SNMP traps Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communications gt SNMP Traps The configuration options for doing this include m Link Trap Interfaces DLCI Traps on Interfaces ISDN Dial Control Traps When DBM is selected trap messages are generated for linkUp and linkDown events on DLCls and frame relay links for the originating DBM interface only For peer to peer backup backing up to a neighboring node like a regional node dial control traps can be sent to trap manager s See Table 3 19 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options for configuration information Assigning DLCIs to a Backup Group DLCls can be assigned to a Backup Group to reduce backup charges when redundant PVCs have been configured This feature prevents backup as long as any DLCI in the group is operational Backup is not initiated as long as one D
369. specific subnet mask for the interface Node Subnet Mask Uses the Interface IP Subnet contained in the Node Subnet Mask configuration option see Table 3 14 Node IP Options Calculate Calculates the subnet mask created by the IP protocol based on the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 Cannot be displayed or edited Special 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Allows you to edit display the subnet mask for the management PVC when the subnet mask is different for this interface A text field displays where you can enter the subnet mask for this unit s management PVC Set DE Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether frames packets sent on a management PVC have the Discard Eligible DE bit set This bit is used by the network to prioritize which frames to discard first during periods of network congestion This allows management traffic to be viewed as lower priority than customer data Enable Sets the DE bit to one on all frames sent on the management PVC Disable Sets the DE bit to zero on all frames sent on the management PVC This is the recommended setting particularly for NSPs providing a managed network service 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 73 Configuration Table 3 15 Management PVC Options 2 of 4 Primary Link Possible Settings Net1 FR1 Port n ISDN Link Name
370. ss An assigned security level can also control access When a DLCI has been defined as the troubleshooting management link the link is identified in the status field at the bottom of the Management PVC Entry screen with the Note This PVC has been designated as the TS Access Management Link message NOTE The unit may come from the factory with a TS Management PVC already set up e g 980 Table 3 14 Node IP Options 1 of 3 Node IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address needed to access the node Since an IP address is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a management PVC 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the node which can be viewed or edited Clear Fills the node IP address with zeros Node Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the node Since the subnet mask is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a management PVC 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the node which can be viewed or edited Clear Fills the node subnet mask with zeros When the node s subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP addres
371. sted in ascending order i e lowest number first Status Active Inactive Deleted 1 New LMl reported status of the DLCI Whether the DLCI is active capable of carrying data in the frame relay network Whether it is inactive in the frame relay network Whether it has been deleted by the frame relay network or Whether it has been created by the frame relay network CIR bps 0 1536000 Displays the committed information rate reported by the Stratacom switch CIR information only appears in this column when LMI Protocol is set to Standard If blank the switch does not support this feature 1 Appears for 10 seconds only before the network changes Deleted to Inactive and New to Active November 2000 5 29 Operation and Maintenance PVC Connection Status PVC connection statuses are selected from the Status menu Main Menu Status PVC Connection Status The PVC Connection Status screen shows all PVC connections and management links configured for the unit The source and primary destination are shown along with an alternate destination for backup When a primary destination DLC was assigned to a Backup Group the Backup Group designation appears next to the DLC number In the example below DLCls 502 and 504 had been assigned to Backup Group A PVC Connection Status Screen Example main status connections Device Name Link Source Node A P
372. stem and Test Status Table 6 1 Alarm Conditions 1 of 7 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do AIS at DSX 1 For the DSX 1 interface the attached DTE is transmitting an AIS For the DSX 1 interface check the DTE attached to the interface AIS at Network 1 An Alarm Indication Signal AIS is being received by the interface AIS is an unframed all ones signal For the network interface report the problem to your T1 service provider CTS down to Port 1 Device The CTS control lead on the device s interface is off Check DTR and RTS from Port 1 Verify that the port is enabled Check DTR from the user data port DBM BRI Card Failed The ISDN BRI DBM failed to pass the self test Reset the FrameSaver unit Main Menu gt Control gt Reset Device If the DBM fails again contact your service representative DLCI nnnn Down frame relay link 1 2 The DLCI for the specified frame relay link is down Verify that the network LMI is up If it is contact your network provider or your ISDN service provider if an ISDN Link Name is the link DTR Down from Port 1 Device The DTR control lead on the device connected to Port n is disasserted The DTR control lead on the device connected to the specified port is off This message applies to data ports that act as DCEs Examine the attached DTE and cable connected to the system s port
373. story November 2000 IN 11 Index V v 35 connector crossover cable straight through cable V 54 Loopback 8 35 5 20 5 26 6 32 Value Out of Range message 3 63 3 64 variable bindings B 11 B 16 vel 1 6 verifying ISDN lines modem setup viewing LEDs 5555 packet capture results virtual path or channel identifier VPI 1 6 IN 12 W warmStart events General Traps trap warranty A Web site access to documentation glossary Y Yellow Alarm B 11 Signal at DSX 1 or Network 5 25 6 13 at ISDN PRI 5 25 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40
374. t Options Table 3 17 Telnet and FTP Session Options Table 3 18 SNMP NMS Security Options Table 3 19 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options Table 3 20 Ethernet Port Options Table 3 21 Communication Port Options Table 3 22 Modem Port Options Table 3 23 Auto Backup Criteria Options November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Configuring the Overall System The System menu includes the following m Frame Relay and LMI Service Level Verification m General Configuring Frame Relay and LMI for the System Select Frame Relay and LMI from the System menu to display or change the Frame Relay and LMI options for the entire system see Table 3 1 Main Menu gt Configuration System Frame Relay and LMI See Configuring Frame Relay for an Interface to set an interface s frame relay options Table 3 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options 1 of 3 LMI Behavior Possible Settings Independent Net1 FR1_Follows_Port 1 Net1 FR1_Follows_Port 2 Port 1_Follows_Net1 FR1 Port 2_Follows_Net1 FR1 All_Ports_Follow_Net1 FR1 Port 1_Codependent_with_Net1 FR1 Port 2_Codependent_with_Net1 FR1 Default Setting Independent Configures the device to allow the state of the LMI to be passed from one interface to another determining how the unit will handle a change in the LMI state Sometimes referred to as LMI pass through NOTE LMI Behavior cannot be changed while Auto Backup is enabled A warning message appears
375. t Port Main Menu gt Easy Install Ethernet Port Options Screen Table 3 20 Ethernet Port Options 1 of 2 Interface Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the Ethernet port is being used and can be configured Enable The port is active It can receive Version 2 or IEEE 802 3 MAC frames and transmit Version 2 MAC frames only When the Ethernet port is enabled the Would you like to set the Node s IP Destination to Ethernet prompt is displayed f you select Yes the Default IP Destination see Table 3 14 Node IP Options is automatically changed to Ethernet so the Ethernet port s Default Gateway Address is used for packets that do not have a route This is required when the NMS is on a different subnet than the unit f you select No the COM port or a PVC will be used for packets without a route Disable The port is not active When the port is disabled the following will occur No alarms or traps configured for the port will be generated All port uses that refer to the Ethernet port like the Default IP Destination and Initial Route Destination will be reset to their default values see Table 3 14 Node IP Options and Table 3 19 SNMP Traps Options IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address needed to access the Ethernet port 001
376. t and Communication Options 9128 A2 GB20 40 The following options can be selected from the Management and Communication menu Node IP Options Management PVC Options General SNMP Management Options Telnet and FTP Sessions Options SNMP NMS Security Options SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options Ethernet Port Options Communication Port Options Modem Port Options Auto Backup Criteria Options November 2000 3 69 Configuration Configuring Node IP Information 3 70 Select Node IP to display add or change the information necessary to support general IP communications for the node see Table 3 14 When deploying units to remote sites minimally configure the Node IP Address and Subnet Mask Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Node IP This set of configuration options includes a Troubleshooting TS Management Access Link feature to help service providers isolate device problems within their networks This feature allows Telnet or FTP access to the unit on this link Troubleshooting over this link is essentially transparent to customer operations No alarms or SNMP traps are generated to create nuisance alarms for the customer TS_Access_Management_Link is initially disabled in most models but the link can be enabled at any time Any valid network Management PVC created on a standard DLCI can be used When enabled a troubleshooting link can be accessed any time the service provider requests acce
377. t and Set commands to the MIB objects However access for all read only objects is specified as read only Configuring SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Select SNMP Traps from the Management and Communication menu to configure SNMP traps and dial out when a trap is generated see Table 3 19 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP Traps See Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults for trap format standards and special trap features including RMON specific traps and the default settings that will generate RMON specific SNMP traps Table 3 19 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 1 of 5 SNMP Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the FrameSaver unit sends trap messages to the currently configured SNMP trap manager s Enable Sends trap messages Disable Does not send trap messages Number of Trap Managers Possible Settings 1 6 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that will receive SNMP trap messages from the FrameSaver unit An NMS IP Address must be configured in the NMS n IP Address configuration option for each trap manager to receive trap messages 1 6 Specifies the number of trap managers inclusive 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 81 Configuration Table 3 19 SNMP Traps and Trap Dial Out Options 2 of 5 NMS n IP Address Possi
378. t feature is available to automatically terminate a test as opposed to manually terminating a test after it has been running a specified period of time It is recommended that this feature be used when the FrameSaver unit is remotely managed through an inband data stream PVC If a test is accidently commanded to execute on the interface providing management access control is regained when the specified time period expires automatically terminating the test To use this feature enable the Test Timeout configuration option and set a duration for the test to run in the Test Duration min configuration option see Configuring General System Options in Chapter 3 Configuration NOTE These configuration options do not pertain to tests commanded by the DTE like a DTE initiated External Loopback The Test menu allows you to run PVC loopbacks and test patterns on the unit and its DBM interface It is available to users with a security access level of 1 or 2 Currently there are no physical tests for a BRI DBM interface DBM tests are started and monitored the same as the network tests See System and Test Status Messages in Chapter 5 Operation and Maintenance for ISDN backup related test messages appearing on the System and Test Status screen See PVC Tests on page 6 22 for additional information November 2000 6 19 Troubleshooting Starting and Stopping a Test Use this procedure to start monitor or abort specific tests To a
379. t person for this SNMP managed node System Location Physical location for this SNMP managed node NAM NAM Type Type of unit installed referred to as a network access module or NAM i e T1 FR NAM This card type is supported by the SNMP SysDescr Object Hardware Revision Unit s hardware version Format nnnn nnx consists of a 4 digit number followed by two digits and one alphabetic character Current Software Revision Software version currently being used by the unit Format nn nn nn consists of a 6 digit number that represents the major and minor revision levels Alternate Software Revision Software version that has been downloaded into the unit but has not yet been implemented Format is the same as for the Current Software Revision In Progress indicates that the flash memory is currently being downloaded Invalid indicates that no download has occurred or the download was not successful Serial Number Unit s 7 character serial number Ethernet MAC Address Media Access Control MAC address assigned to the Ethernet port during manufacturing 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 5 3 Operation and Maintenance View this field To find the ISDN DBM Card Type The type of dial backup module installed ISDN BRI or ISDN PRI if applicable f an unsupported DBM is installed Unsupport displays If the DBM has failed Failed displays
380. tatus messages manually disconnecting operation PassThru PassThru feature 1 4 3 11 5 63 port destination 3 71 3 82 port options setting up 3 10 verifying setup and operation modifying a login Monitor DTR Pattern RTS monitoring DLCI history data FrameSaver unit 5 17 LEDs LEDs and control leads using NetScout Manager Plus most recent cause values Multilink Constituent Link Multilink Frame Relay Bundle implementation Me Se DLCI 3 66 3 67 3 68 3 74 3 75 3 76 DLCI p pe 3 63 PVCs N N1 LMI Status Enquiry 3 27 3 61 N2 LMI Error Event 3 26 3 61 N3 LMI Clearing Event 3 27 3 61 NAM Name 1 or 2 Access Access Ea Community 3 76 3 77 navigating the screens 2 6 Net Link Port Use 2 EEA EST NetOnly mode NetScout Manager Plus nS support 1 8 NMS support 9128 A2 GB20 40 Index Network access module assigning data port to time slots cable pin assignments Com Link Down 5 22 6 10 configuring the interface DLCI records options Health Concord reports Health installation and setup 9 2 Initiated Data Channel Loopback Initiated DCLB Initiated LLB 3 34 3 46 Initiated PLB 3 35 3 46 interface control leads interface LEDS interface options latency rs reference time timeslot assignments NMS IP Address 3 80 3 82 4 11 IP Validation
381. ted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXS Ground Start interface ABCD 0101 FXOg idle FXSg busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXS Ground Start interface ABCD 1111 FXOg busy FXSI idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXS Loop Start interface ABCD 0101 FXOI idle FXSI busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXS Loop Start interface ABCD 1111 FXOl busy FXOD idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXODN interface ABCD 0000 FXSD idle FXOD busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXODN interface ABCD 1111 FXSD busy FXSD idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXSDN interface ABCD 0000 FXOD idle 3 56 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Table 3 10 Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values 3 of 3 Configuration Network Side Meaning DSX 1 Side FXSD busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross c
382. tes the last time the FrameSaver unit was reset It appears after the Self Test Results field at the top of the System and Test Status screen Date is in mm dd yyyy format month day year Time is in mm ss format minutes seconds 5 18 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Health and Status Messages Operation and Maintenance The following table provides Health and Status messages that apply to the FrameSaver unit Table 5 7 Health and Status Messages 1 of 7 Message What It Indicates AIS at DSX 1 An Alarm Indication Signal AIS is received by the DSX 1 interface AIS is an unframed all ones signal AIS at ISDN PRI Active Idle ISDN PRI DBM only An Alarm Indication Signal AIS is received by the ISDN PRI interface AIS is an unframed all ones signal Only appears when a PRI dial backup module DBM is installed Active Backup call was in progress Idle DBM was in Idle mode The ISDN network is transmitting an AIS AIS at Network 1 An Alarm Indication Signal AIS is received by the network interface AIS is an unframed all ones signal Possible reasons include Upstream FrameSaver unit is transmitting AIS keep alive signal The network is transmitting an AIS Auto Configuration Active Auto Configuration feature is active which allows automatic configuration and cross connection of DLCls as they are reported by the network LMI
383. test has been started by the ISDN BRI Active network and it is currently active Send Pitn Active DLCI nnnn A selected Send Pattern test is active on the frame_relay_link 1 3 specified DLCI for the specified frame relay link Monitor Pttn Active DLCI nnnn A selected Monitor Pattern test is active on the frame_relay_link 1 3 specified DLCI for the specified frame relay link Test Call Active ISDN Link Name A test call is active on the specified frame relay link the link being the ISDN Link Name assigned in the ISDN Link Profile This message would only appear for units with the ISDN DBM feature 1 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n for a 1 slot unit or SsPort n for a NAM in a multislot housing the frame relay link associated with the specified user data port in the specified slot ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface 2 Interface is one of the following Network 1 DSX 1 Port n ISDN BRI or PRI 3 nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 5 27 Operation and Maintenance Network LMI Reported DLCIs Status 5 28 Network LMl reported DLCI statuses are selected from the Status menu Main Menu gt Status LMI Reported DLCIs The LMI Reported DLCls screen displays the status and CIR if supported by the switch for ea
384. th the user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance Table 5 7 Health and Status Messages 5 of 7 Message What It Indicates OOF at ISDN PRI Active Idle An Out of Frame OOF condition is detected on i Fi h ISDN PRI DBM only the ISDN PRI interface An OOF is declared when two out of four frame synchronization bits are in error Active Backup call was in progress Idle DBM was in Idle mode Possible reasons include Incompatible framing format between the ISDN network and the FrameSaver unit ISDN network cabling problem ISDN network problem OOF at Network 1 An Out of Frame OOF condition is detected on the network interface Possible reasons include Incompatible framing format between the network and the FrameSaver unit Network cabling problem T1 facility problem PLB Active Interface A Payload Loopback PLB is active on the specified interface Power Supply Fan Alarm 9000 Series Access Carrier only The power supply output voltage has dropped below the specified tolerance level required for the system Or the fan tray is not operating properly Primary Clock Failed A failure of the primary clock source configured for the unit is detected and the secondary clock is providing the timing for the unit This condition clears when
385. that are allowed to access the objects in the FrameSaver unit s MIB The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB ASCII text entry Adds to or changes Community Name 1 maximum 255 characters Clear Clears Community Name 1 3 76 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 16 General SNMP Management Options 2 of 2 Name 1 Access Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Write Specifies the type of access allowed to the objects in the MIB This is the type of access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing MIB objects using Community Name 1 Read Allows read only access SNMP Get command This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access SNMP get and set commands Community Name 2 Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Clear Specifies the second of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the FrameSaver unit s MIB The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB ASCII text entry Adds to or changes Community Name 2 maximum 255 characters Clear Clears Community Name 2 Name 2 Access Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the type
386. the configuration process again Level 2 Allows limited access and control of the device The user can monitor and perform diagnostics display status and configuration option information Level 3 Allows limited access with monitoring control only The user can monitor and display status and configuration screens only Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether a user session is disconnected after a specified time of inactivity no keyboard activity Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal Enable Disconnects user session after the specified time of inactivity Disable Does not disconnect user session Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 10 Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity that can elapse before the session is disconnected Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Terminal 1 60 Sets the time from 1 to 60 minutes inclusive 3 90 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 21 Communication Port Options 4 of 5 IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies a unique IP address for accessing the unit via the COM port Only in effect when the COM port is configured as a network com
387. the configured primary clock is restored Primary amp Secondary Clocks Failed A failure of the primary and secondary clock sources configured for the unit are detected and the internal clock is providing timing for the unit The clock source will not automatically switch from internal until the primary clock source returns PVC Loopback Active DLCI nnnn frame_relay_link 1 2 A PVC Loopback is active on the specified DLCI on the frame relay link RLB Active Interface A network Repeater Loopback RLB is active on the specified interface 1 nnnn indicates a DLCI number of 16 through 1007 2 frame relay link is one of the following Neti FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network interface Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with the user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface November 2000 5 23 Operation and Maintenance 5 24 Table 5 7 Health and Status Messages 6 of 7 Message What It Indicates Secondary Clock Failed A failure of the secondary clock source configured for the unit is detected and the internal clock is providing the timing for the unit The clock source will not automatically switch from internal until the primary clock source returns Send Pattern Active DLCI nnnn frame_relay_link 1 2 A Send Pattern test is currently active on the specified DLCI on the specified frame relay link
388. the system throttles bandwidth to match this setting 1 1536 Sets the download line speed from 1 kilobits per second to the maximum management speed November 2000 3 79 Configuration Configuring SNMP NMS Security Select SNMP NMS Security from the Management and Communication menu to display add or change SNMP security configuration options for the FrameSaver unit to set up trap managers see Table 3 18 Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP NMS Security A table is displayed consisting of the network management systems identified by IP address that are allowed to access the FrameSaver unit by SNMP Table 3 18 SNMP NMS Security Options 1 of 2 NMS IP Validation Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether security checks are performed on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to access the node Only allows access when the sending manager s IP address is listed on the SNMP NMS Security Options screen Enable Performs security checks Disable Does not perform security checks Number of Managers Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that are authorized to send SNMP messages to the FrameSaver unit An IP address must be configured for each management system allowed to send messages Configure IP addresses in the NMS n IP Address configuration opti
389. this Link Profile will only be activated when the Caller ID received from the switch matches one of the configured Inbound Calling IDs Proprietary Incoming calls will always be answered even when no Caller ID is provided by the switch provided the following conditions are met Link Status is set to Auto the default Atleast one ISDN Link Profile is enabled When using the Proprietary method the unit queries the originating unit for its Local Phone Number If the returned phone number matches one of the configured Inbound Calling IDs the call is accepted If the queried unit does not respond with its phone number within five seconds the unit drops the call Alternate Outbound Phone Number Possible Settings 0 9 space _ or Default Setting none Specifies an alternate phone number to call the ISDN Called Party Identifier when a call using the primary Outbound Phone Number was unsuccessful Up to 18 valid characters can be entered Each Outbound Phone Number must be unique If not the Alt Outbound Phone Number is Not Unique message appears and you must enter another phone number NOTE For every originating alternate outbound phone number entered an answering inbound phone number must be entered at the far end and vice versa Currently active calls are not effected when this number is changed Assigning Time Slots Cross Connections 3 50 The Time Slot Assignment Cross Conn
390. tifies the MIBs supported and how they can be downloaded describes the unit s compliance with SNMP format standards and with its special operational trap features and describes the RMON specific user history groups and alarm and event defaults Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments Shows the rear panel tells what cables are needed and provides pin assignments for interfaces and cables Technical Specifications Equipment List Lists key terms acronyms concepts and sections A master glossary of terms and acronyms used in Paradyne documents is available on the World Wide Web at www paradyne com Select Library gt Technical Manuals gt Technical Glossary November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 About This Guide Product Related Documents Document Number Document Title Paradyne FrameSaver Documentation 9000 A2 GN19 FrameSaver SLV ISDN Installation Instructions 9000 A2 GN1D 9000 Series Access Carrier Installation Instructions 9126 A2 GL10 FrameSaver SLV 9126 Quick Reference 9126 A2 GN10 FrameSaver SLV 9126 1 Slot Unit Installation Instructions 9128 A2 GL10 FrameSaver SLV 9128 9128 II Quick Reference 9128 A2 GN10 FrameSaver SLV 9128 1 Slot Housing to 9000 Series Access Carrier Upgrade Instructions 9128 A2 GN11 FrameSaver SLV 9128 9128 Il Network Access Module NAM Installation Instructions 9128 A2 GN12 FrameSaver SLV 9128 9128 II 1 Slot Unit Installation Instructions Paradyne OpenLane NMS Documentation 7800 A2 GZ41
391. tion Auto Backup Criteria Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Save Changing an Auto Configuration setting can also change the FrameSaver unit s configuration See Setting Up Auto Configuration for additional information 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 3 Configuration Configuration Option Areas 3 4 The FrameSaver unit arrives with configured factory default settings which are located in the Factory Default Configuration option area You can find the default settings for configuration options in the m FrameSaver SLV 9126 Quick Reference or FrameSaver SLV 9128 9128 II Quick Reference Configuration Option Tables If the factory default settings do not support your network s configuration you can customize the configuration options to better suit your application Four configuration option storage areas are available Configuration Option Area Description Current Configuration The currently active set of configuration options Customer Configuration 1 An alternate set of configuration options that the customer can set up and store for future use Customer Configuration 2 Another alternate set of configuration options that the customer can set up and store for future use Default Factory Configuration A read only configuration area containing the factory default set of configuration options You can load and edit default factory configuration settings but yo
392. tivity to the unit can be restored via a directly connected asynchronous terminal B gt Procedure To reset COM port settings 1 Configure the asynchronous terminal to operate at 19 2 kbps using character length of 8 bits with one stop bit and no parity In addition set Flow Control to None 2 Reset the unit then hold the Enter key down until the System Paused screen appears See Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication for other methods of resetting the unit 3 Tab to the desired prompt and type y Yes at one of the prompts If selecting The following occurs Reset COM Port usage Port Use is set to Terminal so the asynchronous terminal can be used Data Rate Kbps Character Length Stop Bits and Parity are reset to the factory defaults Unit resets itself Reload Factory Defaults m All configuration and control settings are reset to the Default Factory Configuration overwriting the current configuration Unit resets itself CAUTION This causes the current configuration to be destroyed and a self test to be performed If no selection is made within 30 seconds or if No n is entered the unit resets itself and no configuration changes are made Once the unit resets itself connectivity is restored and the Main Menu screen appears 6 4 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Management Link Feature A dedicated troubleshooting management l
393. tocol setting reflects the LMI type being used f LMI was never up Verify that the proper time slots have been configured Verify that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used Verify that Frame Relay Performance Statistics show LMI frames being transmitted If all of the above have been verified and the physical link is not in Alarm contact your network provider For user data port Check that the DTE cable is securely attached at both ends Verify that Transmit Clock Source and Invert Transmit Clock options are properly configured Verify that Frame Relay Performance Statistics show LMI frames being received If no frames are being received Check the attached device Verify that the LMI Protocol setting reflects the LMI type being used 2 frame relay link is one of the following Net1 FR1 The frame relay link specified for the network port Network 1 Port n The frame relay link associated with a user data port ISDN Link Name on a non network ISDN DBM interface 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 6 9 Troubleshooting 6 10 Table 6 1 Alarm Conditions 4 of 7 Alarm Condition What It Indicates What To Do LOS at DSX 1 A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the DSX 1 interface Clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal to 12 5 DSX 1 cable problem No signa
394. ts Ntt This field represents time slot tt of the network interface Dit This field represents time slot tt of the DSX 1 interface Assigned The time slot is already assigned to a network or DSX 1 time slot Assigned time slots cannot be modified from this screen Available The time slot is currently unassigned Port 2 For a FrameSaver SLV 9128 or 9128 II synchronous data Port 2 is assigned to the time slot 3 58 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration For easy movement between screens select the ErAssign function key to go directly to the Frame Relay Network Assignments screen or the DSXAssign function key to go to the DSX 1 to Network Assignments screen Time Slot Assignment Rules To assign a synchronous data port to network or DSX 1 time slots Port 2 s Port Use option must be set for Synchronous Data see Table 3 5 Data Port Physical Interface Options If the DSX 1 interface is disabled only Net1 is available for synchronous data port assignment see the Interface Status option in Table 3 6 DSX 1 Physical Interface Options B gt Procedure 1 5 Clearing Assignments 9128 A2 GB20 40 Select one of the following menu selection sequences Main Menu gt Configuration Time Slot Assignment gt Sync Data Port Assignments or Main Menu gt Easy Install Time Slot Assignment Screen Select an interface in the Assign To field A matrix of the current cross connect status of all
395. ts is inactive the LED is off November 2000 5 9 Operation and Maintenance Control Lead Descriptions 5 10 See Table 5 2 Network DSX 1 or PRI Interface LEDs for descriptions of these leads See Table 5 3 User Data Port LED to interpret the user data port OK control lead The LED descriptions and control lead descriptions are the same In addition to these LEDs additional control leads can be monitored through the Display LEDs and Control Leads screen These indicators show the current state of each control lead and what they indicate when they are highlighted that is in the On state They are described in Table 5 4 Table 5 4 Additional Control Leads Label Indication What It Means Network Interface LMI OK LMI Operational Status LMI is operating successfully on the first frame relay link on the network interface User Data Port TXD Transmit Data Data is being sent to the far end device RXD Receive Data Data is being received from the far end device DTR Data Terminal Ready Shows the current state of the DTR control lead This indicator should always be on RTS Request to Send Shows the current state of the RTS control lead This indicator should always be on November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Device Messages Operation and Maintenance These messages appear in the messages area at the bottom of the scree
396. two local phone numbers Switched Network Interface One USOC RJ49C 8 pin keyed modular plug and jack specified in ISO IEC 8877 Transmit Interface Signal Level Impedance 13 5 dBm nominal over frequency band 0 Hz 80 kHz 135 Q Receive Interface Dynamic Range Impedance Operates on 2 wire loops defined in ANSI T1 601 1992 135 Q Modulation and Frequency 2B1Q line coding with 4 level amplitude modulation PAM at 80 kbps baud Channel Equalization Receiver Automatic adaptive equalizer with echo cancellation November 2000 D 7 Technical Specifications Table D 5 ISDN PRI DBM Optional Feature Technical Specifications Specification Criteria Standards Compliance ANSI T1 403 1989 physical layer and AT amp T 62411 Bellcore SR NWT 002120 Issue 1 May 1992 ITU Q 921 1992 link layer ITU Q 931 1993 network layer TR TSY 00860 ISDN Calling Number Identification Services February 1989 and Supplement June 1990 Power Consumption 8 mA at 120 VAC Average power 1 watt 3 4 Btu per hour Weight 0 15 Ibs 2 4 oz 0 07 kg 68 grams Switch Compatibility National ISDN 2 NI 2 ATT 4ESS or ATT 5ESS Service Supported PRI NI 2 ATT 4ESS custom or ATT 5ESS custom supporting up to 23 B channels with Circuit Switched Data capability Framing Format D4 ESF Coding Format B8ZS Line Build Out LBO 0 0 dB 7 5
397. twork interface discover LMI protocol by sending polls to an attached Network line and listening for correct poll response messages Standard Supports Standard LMI and the Stratacom enhancements to the Standard LMI Annex A Supports LMI as specified by Q 933 Annex A Annex D Supports LMI as specified by ANSI T1 617 Annex D November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 11 Interface Frame Relay Options 2 of 3 LMI Parameters Possible Settings System Custom Default Setting System Allows you to use the system LMI options or to set specific LMI options for this interface System Use system LMI options see Table 3 1 System Frame Relay and LMI Options Custom Use the following options in this table to configure LMI parameters Frame Relay DSOs Base Rate Possible Settings Nx64 Nx56 Default Setting Nx64 Selects the base rate for the DSOs allocated to frame relay on the network interface Display Conditions This option only appears on the network interface of the FrameSaver SLV 9128 not the 9128 ll Nx64 The base rate is 64 kbps Nx56 The base rate is 56 kbps LMI Error Event N2 Possible Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Default Setting 3 Configures the LMI defined N2 parameter which sets the number of errors that can occur on the LMI link before an error is reported Applies to both the user and netw
398. u can only save those changes to the Current Customer 1 or Customer 2 configuration option areas The Current Customer 1 and Customer 2 configuration option areas are identical to the Default Factory Configuration until modified by the customer November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options 9128 A2 GB20 40 To access and display configuration options load copy the applicable configuration option set into the edit area gt Procedure To load a set of configuration options for editing 1 From the Main Menu press the down arrow key so the cursor is on Configuration Press Enter to display the Configuration menu The Load Configuration From menu appears NOTE Loading a configuration with many DLCls from a unit s Customer Configuration 1 or 2 option area may take time Allow a minute or more for the file to be loaded Select the configuration option area from which you want to load configuration options and press Enter Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 or Default Factory Configuration The selected set of configuration options is loaded into the configuration edit area and the Configuration Edit Display menu appears This sequence of steps would be shown as the menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration November 2000 3 5 Configuration Changing Configuration Options B gt Procedure
399. ue in the CIR bps option as the committed burst size Bc The Bc and excess burst size Be options are updated when a CIR update is received from the network switch Other Allows you to specify the committed burst size for the DLC When Other is selected the Bc and Be values must be manually entered and maintained as well Bc Possible Settings 0 1536000 Default Setting 64000 Allows you to display or change the DLCI s committed burst size Display Conditions This option only appears when Committed Burst Size is set to Other 0 1536000 Specifies the DLCI s committed burst size Excess Burst Size Bits Specifies the maximum amount of data in bits that the network may accept beyond the CIR without discarding frames Be Possible Settings 0 1536000 Default Setting 1472000 Allows you to display or change the DLCl s excess burst size 0 1536000 Specifies the DLCI s excess burst size 3 64 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 12 DLCI Record Options 3 of 3 DLCI Priority Possible Settings Low Medium High Default Setting High Specifies the relative priority for data received on the DLCI from an attached device also known as quality of service All data on Port 1 is cut through as long as there is no higher priority data queued from another user port The DLCI priority set for an interface app
400. units at either the far end or both ends of the link may be configured incorrectly Invalid Rx Frames The number of invalid frames received over the Network or Port 1 interface There is a non frame relay device on the other end of the link Short Rx Frames The number of frames received over the Network or Port 1 interface that were less than 5 octets five 8 bit bytes in length There may be a non frame relay device on the other end of the link Long Rx Frames The number of frames received over the Network or Port 1 interface that were more than 8192 octets in length The device on the far end of the link may be configured incorrectly Invalid DLCI The number of frames received over the interface that were addressed to DLCls outside the valid range that is a number less than 16 or greater than 1007 The device on the far end of the circuit may have been configured incorrectly or the DLCls configured for the FrameSaver unit may not match the DLCls supplied by the service provider Unknown DLCI The number of frames received over the interface that were addressed to unknown DLCls The DLCI may not have been configured or it has been configured to be Inactive Indicates that the FrameSaver units or devices at both or either end of the circuit have been configured incorrectly Unknown Error The number of frames received over the interface that do not fall into one of the other statistic categories Indi
401. ur changes 4 6 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Security and Logins See Configuring Telnet and or FTP Session Support in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about setting Telnet configuration options Limiting FTP Access 9128 A2 GB20 40 FTP access can be limited by Disabling FTP access completely Requiring a user ID and password to login m Limiting FTP bandwidth gt Procedure To limit FTP access when the session is not on the TS Access Management Link 1 Select the Telnet and FTP Session options Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt Telnet and FTP Sessions 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable FTP FTP Session to Disable Require a login Login Required to Enable NOTE User ID and password combinations must be defined See Creating a Login If you want to allow users to configure the unit or perform file transfers including downloads keep the access at Level 1 Level 1 access is required to download software to the unit or to upload or download configuration files Level 3 is sufficient for NMS access for SLV historical information Limit bandwidth for FTP FTP Max Transfer Rate to a rate less than the network line speed typically less than or equal to the CIR This method is not recommended if SLV reports are desired since FTP is required to generat
402. ures are unique to FrameSaver SLV 9128 and 9128 II units 1 6 Multiple Data Ports Provides two data ports instead of one which have standard connectors so no special order cables are required Carrier Mounted Models For customers with high density requirements FrameSaver SLV 9128s and 9128 Ils can be ordered as multislot units called Network Access Modules NAMs for insertion in the 14 slot 9000 Series Access Carrier November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 About the FrameSaver SLV FrameSaver SLV 9128 II Only Features FrameSaver SLV 9128 II units provide a 10 100 BaseT Ethernet LAN interface for management with automatic sensing of the operation rate of 10Mb or 100Mb conforming to ANSI IEEE 802 3 OpenLane SLM System 9128 A2 GB20 40 Being standards based the OpenLane SLM Service Level Management system can be used with other management applications like HP OpenView or IBM s NetView OpenLane includes HP OpenView adapters for integrating OpenLane features with the OpenView Web interface Being Web based the OpenLane system provides Web access to the data contained in the database to provide anytime anywhere access to this information via a Web browser Some of the OpenLane system s features include Real time performance graphs provide exact performance measurement details not averages which can skew performance results of service level agreement SLA parameters Port bursting and EIR Excess Information Rate
403. use when an attempt to access the menu driven user interface through the COM port is made IP addresses and logins of the users currently accessing the interface are also provided Wait and try again Contact one of the IP address user and request that they log off User Interface Idle Previously active session is now closed ended and access via the COM port is now available Log on to the FrameSaver unit Session has been ended due to timeout No action needed Value Out of Range CIR entered for the DLCI is a number greater than the maximum allowed Enter a valid CIR 0 64000 Excess Burst Size entered for the DLCI is a number greater than the maximum allowed Enter a valid Excess Burst Size 0 1536000 DLCI Number entered is less than 16 or greater than 1007 Enter a valid number 16 1007 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Operation and Maintenance Status Information Status information is useful when monitoring the FrameSaver unit The following illustration shows the Status menu for a FrameSaver SLV 9128 II with the ISDN DBM feature installed Status Menu Example main status 9128 II Device Name Node A 5 26 2000 23 32 STATUS System and Test Status LMI Reported DLCIs PVC Connection Status Timeslot Assignment Status DBM Interface Status IP Routing Table Performance Statistics Trap Event Log Display LEDs and Control Lead
404. vFrExtDiciDIci aoa Threshold has been devFrExt mib i ea String s ies aya ae SLV down on ifString due to s devFrExt mib excessive SLV packet loss Total devLastTrapString SLV packets lost is numLost i 7 devHealthAndStatus enterpriseMissedSLV mib SLV Timeout Error Event has Up 116 been cleared String SLV up on ifString because SLV communication was reestablished Total SLV packets lost is numLost enterprisePrimary ClockFail 1 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib enterprisePrimary ClockFailClear 101 Operating software has detected that the primary clock source has failed String Primary clock failed Operating software has detected that the primary clock source is operational again String Primary clock restored enterprise RMON ResetToDefault 13 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib All RMON related option changes have been reset to their default values Default Factory Configuration settings have been reloaded returning RMON related options to their original settings String RMON database reset to defaults enterpriseSecondary ClockFail 4 devLastTrapString devHealthAndStatus mib enterpriseSecondary ClockFailClear 104 Operating software has detected that the secondary clock source has failed String Secondary clock failed Operating software has detect
405. vailable event Switching 42 Switching equipment Wait and try again Equipment sending the cause is Congestion experiencing heavy traffic Suspended Call 83 A call resume has been 1 Verify the number in the Exists But Not attempted but no Inbound Calling ID Call ID suspended call exists for field for the suspended this phone number call 2 Reissue the Call Resume command using the correct number Temporary Failure 41 Network is not functioning Wait and try again correctly but the condition is not expected to continue for long Unallocated 1 Destination requested Assign the Inbound Number cannot be reached because Calling ID the Inbound Calling ID number is not assigned or allocated User Access 43 Network was unable to No action is needed Information deliver the access Discarded information when trying to establish the call User Alerting 19 During call establishment 1 Verify that the remote No Answer an alerting was received device is operational but a connection was not and configured to answer 2 Retry the call User Busy 17 Called number cannot Wait and try again receive the call November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 IP Routing Table The IP Routing Table shows all the routes configured in the FrameSaver unit Main Menu gt Status IP Routing Table IP Routing Table Screen Example main status ip_route Device Name Node A Destination IP ROUTING TABLE Gateway Operation an
406. ve Configuration To screen appears NOTE If you try to exit the Configuration menu without saving changes a Save Configuration screen appears requiring a Yes or No response If you select No the Main Menu screen reappears and the changes are not saved If you select Yes the Save Configuration To screen appears 3 Select the configuration option area to which you want to save your changes usually the Current Configuration and press Enter When Save is complete Command Complete appears in the message area at the bottom of the screen NOTE There are other methods of changing configurations like SNMP and Auto Configuration Since multiple sessions can be active at the same time the last change made overwrites any previous or current changes being made For instance Saving your configuration changes would cause configuration changes made via another method to be lost If you are making changes and someone else makes changes and saves them your changes would be lost 9128 A2 GB20 40 November 2000 3 7 Configuration Using the Easy Install Feature The Easy Install feature provides a straight forward installation menu that requires minimal configuration to get the FrameSaver unit up and running quickly and to set up remote configuration and management via Telnet access from the NOC Network Operations Center Main Menu gt Easy Install Easy Install Screen Example main easy install 91
407. ve Data DTE Receive Data RXD 3 From DTE 6 RXD DCE Request to DTE Request to Send RTS 4 To DTE 1 Send RTS DCE Clear to Send DCE Clear to Send CTS 5 From DTE 8 CTS DCE Data Set DCE Data Set Ready DSR 6 From DTE 7 Ready DSR DCE Signal Ground DTE Signal Ground SG 7 4 5 SG DCE Data Terminal DTE Data Terminal Ready DTR 20 To DTE 2 Ready DTR Cisco 7000 Series Router DB25 Plug COM Port AUX Port Signal DB25 Pin Direction DB25 Pin Signal DCE Transmit Data DTE Transmit Data TXD 2 To DTE 2 TXD DCE Receive Data DTE Receive Data RXD 3 From DTE 3 RXD DCE Request to DTE Request to Send RTS 4 To DTE 4 Send RTS DCE Signal Ground DTE Signal Ground SG 7 7 SG DCE Carrier Detect DTE Carrier Detect CD 8 To DTE 8 CD DCE Data Terminal DTE Data Terminal Ready DTR 20 To DTE 20 Ready DTR November 2000 C 5 Connectors Cables and Pin Assignments 3COM Router DB9 Socket COM Port Console Port Signal DB25 Pin Direction DB9 Pin Signal DCE Transmit Data DTE Transmit Data TXD 2 To DTE 3 TXD DCE Receive Data DTE Receive Data RXD 3 From DTE 2 RXD DCE Request to DTE Request to Send RTS 4 To DTE 7 Send RTS DCE Signal Ground DTE Signal Ground SG 7 5 SG DCE Carrier Detect DTE Carrier Detect CD 8 To DTE 1 CD DCE Data Terminal DTE Data Terminal Ready DTR 20 To DTE 4 Ready DTR The following tables provid
408. ver an SNMP manager attempts to access an object in the MIB the community name must be supplied gt Procedure To assign SNMP community names and access types 1 Select the General SNMP Management options Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt General SNMP Management 2 Set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Assign SNMP community names Community Name 1 and Community Name 2 to a community name text up to 255 characters in length Assign the type of access allowed Name 1 Access and Name 2 Access to Read for the SNMP community names or Read Write 3 Save your changes See Configuring General SNMP Management in Chapter 3 Configuration for more information about General SNMP Management configuration options 4 10 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses 9128 A2 GB20 40 Security and Logins An additional level of security is provided by Limiting the IP addresses of NMSs that can access the FrameSaver unit Performing validation checks on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to access the FrameSaver unit Specifying the access allowed for the authorized NMS when IP address validation is performed The SNMP NMS Security Options screen provides the configuration options that determine whether security checking is performed on the IP address of SNMP manageme
409. vice frame relay service RJ48C CA81A using adapter cable D4 ESF AMI B8ZS 0 0 dB 7 5 dB 15 dB 22 5 dB Selectable AT amp T TR 62411 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 9128 A2 GB20 40 Technical Specifications Table D 2 1 Slot FrameSaver Unit Technical Specifications 3 of 3 Specification Criteria DSX 1 Interface Physical interface FrameSaver SLV 9126 FrameSaver SLV 9128 and 9128 II Framing format Coding format DTE line equalization 8 position modular connector with 8 position modular to DB15 adapter D Sub 15 socket 15 position D Subminiature connector D Sub 15 socket D4 ESF AMI B8ZS 5 selectable ranges from 0 to 655 feet 0 196 5 meters Send AIS Selectable Data Port 34 position V 35 connector Standard V 35 ITU ISO 2593 Data rates Variations for T1 rates automatically set to the network rate Modem MDM Interface Data rates Link Protocol 6 position unkeyed modular USOC RJ11C jack Up to 14 4 kbps PPP SLIP ISDN BRI DBM Interface Service supported Data rates 8 position keyed modular USOC RJ49C jack BRI NI 1 56 kbps and 64 kbps ISDN PRI DBM Interface FrameSaver SLV 9128 and 9128 II only Service supported Data rates Framing format Coding format Line Build Out LBO ANSI PRM 8 position unkeyed modular USOC RJ48C jack PRI NI 1 or NI 2 1 536 kbps D4 ESF B8ZS 0 0 dB 7 5 dB 15 dB 22 5 dB Selectable
410. vides a variety of tests to identify and diagnose device and network problems including nondisruptive PVC loopbacks and end to end connectivity Tests can be commanded from the unit s menu driven user interface or the OpenLane system These tests include V 54 or FT1 ANSI data channel loopback support so the frame relay network service provider can perform a physical loopback from its own switch without having to contact the local service provider for loopback activation LMI Packet Capture Provides a way of uploading data that has been captured in a trace file so the data can be uploaded and transferred to a Network Associates Sniffer for analysis or viewed via the menu driven user interface When viewed from the menu driven user interface the twelve most recent LMI messages are displayed via the LMI Trace Log November 2000 1 3 About the FrameSaver SLV 1 4 Integral Modem Provides an internal 14 4 kbps modem to support dialing in to the unit for out of band management and automatic dialing out of SNMP traps Modem PassThru Provides access to another device s VT100 compatible user interface over a dial connection When this feature is enabled a logical connection between the unit s modem and COM ports is created allowing access to a collocated device s serial port via the FrameSaver unit s internal modem This feature is sometimes referred to as the Router Assist feature Optional ISDN Backup When an ISDN BRI or PRI DBM
411. w long a problem has existed Alarm conditions that will generate an SNMP trap Alarms on page 6 7 SNMP traps Appendix B SNMP MIBs and Traps and RMON Alarm Defaults Traps supported include warm start authentication failure enterprise specific those specific to the unit link up and link down Novem ber 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Troubleshooting Resetting the Unit and Restoring Communication You can reset the unit in one of four ways Reset it from the Control menu Cycle the power Reset the configuration options for the COM port or reload the factory default settings Set the appropriate MIB object from NMS see your NMS documentation The unit performs a self test when it is reset Resetting the Unit from the Control Menu Use this procedure to initiate a reset and power on self test of the unit B gt Procedure To reset the unit from the Control menu 1 2 From the Main Menu screen select Control Select Reset Device and press Enter The Are You Sure prompt appears Type y Yes and press Enter The unit reinitializes itself performing a self test Resetting the Unit By Cycling the Power 9128 A2 GB20 40 Disconnecting then reconnecting the power cord resets the unit November 2000 6 3 Troubleshooting Restoring Communication with a Misconfigured Unit Misconfiguring the unit could render the menu driven user interface inaccessible If this occurs connec
412. with this interface are held in an off state Specifically the DSX PRI LEDs are held off if they represent the PRI status Switch Type Possible Settings NI 2 ATT_4ESS ATT_5ESS Default Setting NI 2 Specifies type of ISDN switch provided by the server NI 2 The DBM will communicate with a service provider supporting the National ISDN 2 switching standard ATT_4ESS The DBM will communicate with a service provider supporting the ATT 4ESS switching standard ATT_5ESS The DBM will communicate with a service provider supporting the ATT 5ESS switching standard Local Phone Number Possible Settings 10 digits Default Setting Clear Provides the telephone number associated with all Bearer channels All blanks is a valid setting 10 digits Where you enter the telephone number up to 10 digits If a nondigit numeric is entered an Invalid Character x message appears at the bottom of the screen Clear Clears the phone number field so it can be reentered Line Framing Format Possible Settings D4 ESF Default Setting ESF Specifies the framing format for transmitted and received signals on the ISDN interface D4 Uses D4 framing format NOTE This setting is not recommended by network carriers False yellow alarms may occur after traffic has been running and the channel returns to idle or when there is light traffic when other settings are selected ESF format does not
413. y Connectivity is a proprietary method that determines whether the FrameSaver device at the other end of the frame relay PVC is active This test stops automatically and can only be executed for circuit multiplexed PVCs To run a connectivity test on a link Main Menu gt Test gt Network PVC Tests Data Port PVC Tests ISDN Call PVC Tests Selecting Connectivity sends a frame to the FrameSaver unit at the other end of the PVC ARndTrip Time ms message appears in the Result column when a response is received within 5 seconds indicating that the FrameSaver unit at the remote end is alive operational and connected and the round trip RT time is shown in milliseconds ms with a resolution of 1 ms If a response is not received within 5 seconds No Response appears in the Result column Test Call Test Call tests the device s ability to place a call It allows an alternate means of controlling the activation or deactivation of an ISDN link This test only appears for a FrameSaver device with a DBM that is configured to originate backup calls typically the remote site and has its ISDN Link Status option set to Auto To place a test call Main Menu gt Test gt ISDN Call PVC Tests When a test call is started Active appears in the Status column While the call is Active the status of the call connection and the link appears in the Results column m AFrame Relay Link Up message indicates that the required calls have be
414. y 3 79 8 90 3 93 mac g timers setting backup timeslot assignment status timeslot assignments DSX 1 network Trace Log LMI 6 6 trademarks A Traffic Policing Training A transfering data 5 73 Transmit Clock Invert Source Transmit Timing Trap Dial Out Disconnect Event Log 1 6 5 62 6 14 Managers Number of 9128 A2 GB20 40 Index Traps authentificationFailure dialControl dialCtIPeerCall B 17 DLCI 3 84 Enterprise Specific 3 83 B 13 General Link Link Interfaces linkUp and linkDown RMON 3 84 RMON Specific B 16 SNMP and dial out options 3 10 3 81 standards supported 6 2 warmStart B 9 Trend reports troubleshooting creating a management link device problems frame relay PVC problems ISDN BRI DBM problems management link PVC tables TruePut technology TS Access Management Link 3 70 3 71 4 6 4 8 limiting Telnet access TST LED TTL 5 46 turning off system alarm relay TXD control lead Type Access U UNI 1 2 3 26 3 27 3 61 3 62 upgrade ISDN BRI DBM upgrading system software uploading data 5 73 user history adding files installing files monitoring DLCI statistics gathering user interface cannot be accessed communication port options resetting restoring access Telnet session user defined hi
415. you can view or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the COM port and fills the address with zeros When the node subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based upon the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 Link Protocol Possible Settings PPP SLIP Default Setting PPP Specifies the link layer protocol to be used This option is only in effect when the modem port is configured as a network communication link Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link PPP Point to Point Protocol SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol 3 94 November 2000 9128 A2 GB20 40 Configuration Table 3 22 Modem Port Options 4 of 4 Alternate IP Address Possible Settings 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting Clear 000 000 000 000 Specifies the alternate IP address for the modem port If this configuration option is not configured i e it is zero the modem port s primary IP address is used when the alternate telephone directory is used for dial out traps Display Conditions This option only appears when Port Use is set to Net Link 001 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the modem s alternate IP address which you can view or edit Clear Clears the alternate IP address for the modem port and fills the address with zeros Alt

FrameSaver SLV, Models 9126, 9128, and 9128

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents